Sei sulla pagina 1di 176

Photoelectric Sensors

GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS

WORKING PRINCIPLES WHITE 100


RED 98
A sensor is made up of an irradiating element, a particular type of light INFRARED GREEN 95
(usually infrared, red or green) and an element photosensitive to the LED YELLOW 95
irradiated light. The presence or absence of light on the photosensitive
BLUE 90
element is used as a signal producing a change in the output of the sensor.
BLACK 20
Thanks to the qualities of transmission and propagation of the light,
different types of sensor can be used. 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
SENSING DISTANCE %
Thru-beam
This type is made up of an emitter and B
OUT
STA

a receiver on the same axis. Every time Sensing distance for Retro reflective sensor and Thru-beam
an object interrupts the light beam, It is the maximum distance between photocell and reflector or between
which goes from the emitter to the MAX.
OUT
STA B
emitter and receiver.
receiver, a change in the receiver MIN.

output takes place. This type alows Hysteresis


great sensing distances and is It is the maximum distance between the detected and non detected
particularly suitable for being used in points. These points are obtained by moving the object towards or away
dirty and dusty locations. from the photocell axis. Data are expressed in percentage to the value of
the sensing distance.
Diffuse reflective
In this case the light source and the Sensing distance
photosensitive element are included in Switching
the same unit. The emitted light OFF ON
STOU
AB T
MAX.

reaches the photosensitive element


MIN.

after being reflected from an object


present in the irradiation field. The
presence or absence of the light on the Hysteresis
receiver causes a change in the output
state signaling either the presence or
absence of an object in the sensing area. Switching frequency
Retro reflective It shows the maximum number of operations per second perfomed by the
As in Diffuse type the light source and photocell.
the photosensitive element are in the
same unit. Differing from the Diffuse Response time
type, the reflection of the light emitted It is the time the object takes to cover the optical sensor field to perform a
is obtained by using a reflector. As a MAX.
OUT
STAB
MIN.
correct switching.
consequence, the detection occurs when
the beam of reflected light is interrupted,
that is, when there is an object between ELECTRICAL PARAMETERS
the reflector and the sensor. NOMINAL VOLTAGE
This system is limited by the fact that Is indicates the maximum and minimum voltage values within which
shining or reflecting objects cannot be sensors work correctly.
identified by the sensor as they reflect the
emitted light, as if thay were reflectors. RESIDUAL RIPPLE
Maximum admissible ripple of the DC supply voltage shown as
Polarized retro reflective
percentage to its medium value.
The working principle is the same as in the retro reflective type. This
sensor allows shining or reflecting objects to be sensed. This is due to the MAXIMUM OUTPUT CURRENT
fact that reflectors deviate the light radiation of 90. By using special It shows maximum output current a sensor can cope with when working
polarizing filters, only the light steadly.
reflected by the reflector is sensed by
the photosensitive element. Therefore MAXIMUM LEAKAGE CURRENT
common reflecting objects can be Existing load current when output stage is stopped and supply voltage is
sensed because they cannot deviate
MAX.
STAOU
BT
MIN. at maximum nominal value.
the light radiation and act as the ABSORPTION
retroreflector. However if the reflecting This in the consumption of the photocell referred to the maximum limits
surface is of "active material", the light of the nominal voltage and without load.
beam through this material may have
the same behaviour as the reflector. VOLTAGE DROP
This is due to the disposition of Voltage drop on switching circuit when output transistor is conducting.
molecules of that particular material. To avoid this, is advisable to rotate
the optical axis (photoelectric sensor-reflector) 45 to the surface to scan. SHORT CIRCUIT PROTECTION
A protection in case of short circuits or overload to avoid inner circuit
Detecting distance for diffuse reflective sensor damage. Once the short circuit is eliminated the photocell resets.
Detecting distance for optical proximity sensors varies according to the PROTECTION AGAINST INVERSION OF POLARITY
material to sense. The parameters that influence the maximum capacity of Available in DC supplied type, it prevents the sensor from being damage
the sensor are mainly the colour and the brightness or roughness of the when supply cables are incorrectly connected.
surface to be detected. Data below are approximate value and are the result
of lab tests with mat paper targets 10 x 10 wide of the following colours. INDUCTIVE LOAD PROTECTION
It protects sensor output in presence of high inductive loads. This
WHITE 100 protection is performed by a diode or zenner diode.
RED 95
RED LED GREEN 45
PROTECTION DEGREE
YELLOW 97
It shows degree of protection of housing conform to IEC 529 regulation.
BLUE 42 START UP DELAY
BLACK 15 Time interval between sensor supply connection and active output. This
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
time interval is to avoid the switch output beinginan undefined state
SENSING DISTANCE % when the system is switched on.

1
Photoelectric Sensors
GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS

CONNECTION FOR PHOTOELECTRIC SENSORS WITH NPN OR PNP OUTPUT Connection in parallel (OR)
Connection in series (AND) When connected in this way sensors can activate the common output
independently, when energize. Thanks to the really low leakage current,
Connected in this way sensors activated one output when activated
there is no actual limitation in the number of sensor that can be connected
simultaneously. When using this type of connection keep into account as follows:
in parallel, providing that the min. current of load accumulated is mA.
1) drop of voltage for each sensor (<1,5 V);
2) the maximum load current of the sensor used together
with the absorption of each sensor (<30mA).
NPN NPN NPN PNP PNP PNP
PNP CONFIGURATION
BLUE
BLACK
BROWN

BLUE
BLACK
BROWN

BLUE
BLACK
BROWN

BROWN
BLACK
BLUE

BROWN
BLACK
BLUE

BROWN
BLACK
BLUE

BROWN

BROWN

BROWN
BLUE

BLUE

BLUE
WHITE WHITE WHITE
Connection in parallel (OR)
BLACK BLACK BLACK
Connected in this way sensors can activate the common output indi-
pendently, when activated. When omitting the diodes indicated in the
diagram, use sensors with the final stage which has an open collector (NO).
N.C. CONNECTION N.O. CONNECTION
NPN NPN NPN PNP PNP PNP
BROWN
BLACK
BLUE

BROWN
BLACK
BLUE

BROWN
BLACK
BLUE
BLUE
BLACK
BROWN

BLUE
BLACK
BROWN

BLUE
BLACK
BROWN

NPN CONFIGURATION
CONNECTION FOR PHOTOELECTRIC SENSORS WITH PROGRAMMABLE OUTPUT
Thank to the output separated from the rest of circuit, photoelectric
BROWN

BROWN

BROWN
sensors so connected provide important advantages, such as the

BLUE

BLUE

BLUE
possibility of 4 output configurations (NPN-NO, NPN-NC, PNP-NO, PNP- BLACK BLACK BLACK
NC) on the same model and the possibility of connection in series. WHITE WHITE WHITE
OUTPUT DIAGRAM
BROWN BLUE
WHITE WHITE
NPN NPN
BLACK BLACK N.C. CONNECTION N.O. CONNECTION
NO NC BROWN
BLUE

BROWN BLUE
WHITE WHITE
PNP PNP
BLACK BLACK
NO NC BROWN
POWER SUPPLY FOR SENSORS IN DC CURRENT
BLUE
A stabilised source of voltage can be obtained using the table indicated
Connection in series (AND) below. Use the following example to determine the components :
Connected in this way sensors only activate the output when they are
VAC = (V RMS transformer) = (V OUT + 4.5) x 1.1
energized simultaneously. The maximum number of sensors of this type, 1.41
connected in this way, is given by the following formula:
n = (V supply - V load) / V residual C1 = (0.0053) x I OUT (value indicated in F)
2
where:
V supply = voltage VL1 = VAC x 1.41 x 1.2
V load = voltage for min. load energization
V residual = residual voltage in the comulative circuit in ON state. If " " is bigger than 10 cm, add C4 beside the stabiliser

PNP CONFIGURATION C4 = 100 f; VL4 = VAC x 1.41 x 1.2


C2 = 220 f; VL2 = VOUT x 1.2
C3 = 0.1 f; VL3 = 63V
Note: the regulator must be provided with adequate power or dissipation,
BROWN

BROWN

BROWN
BLUE

BLUE

BLUE

it must dissipate:

D P DISS. = (VAC x 1.41) - VOUT Where IOUT max. is the maximum available (supplied) current
I OUT max.
BLACK

BLACK

BLACK
WHITE

WHITE

WHITE

N.C. CONNECTION N.O. CONNECTION

NPN CONFIGURATION
BROWN

BROWN

BROWN

VAC
BLUE

BLUE

BLUE

REGULATOR IOUT
C1 C4 C2 C3
VL1 VL4 VL2 VL3
D VOUT
BLACK

BLACK

BLACK
WHITE

WHITE

WHITE

N.C. CONNECTION N.O. CONNECTION


NOTE: In presence of inductive loads, when more sensors are connected
in series, diode D should be connected in antiparallel to the load.

2 EMX Industries Inc.


Photoelectric Sensors
GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS

INSTRUCTIONS FOR CORRECT INSTALLATION 5) If the state LED indicator is off, move the photoelectric sensor towards
the object to be detected until the LED lights up. If the LED is already
THESE PHOTOELECTRIC SENSORS ARE NOT SAFETY DEVICES, THEREFORE THEY CANNOT BE illuminated, move the photoelectric sensor away until the state LED goes off
USED TO PREVENT INJURIES TO PERSONS, DAMAGES, INDUSTRIAL DAMAGES, ACCIDENTS. and then move it nearer again until when it re-lights up (position A).
Connections 6.0) If there is no background go to point 6.1. If there is background go to point 6.2.
6.1) NO BACKGROUND: move the photoelectric sensor nearer to the object by a
1) Do not exceed the voltage limits printed on the product label. For DC
distance of 15% of the detection distance.
photoelectric sensors use stable tension.
6.2) BACKGROUND PRESENT: remove the object to be detected (the LED will go off, if it does
2) Do not connect the photoelectric sensors power supply cables down-steam from
not go off, proceed to point 6.3) and move the photoelectric sensor towards the
other devices and make sure that they are directly connected to the mains.
background until the state LED lights up (position B). Position the photoelectric sensor at a
3) If the power supply source is a switching voltage regulator, connect the FG
distance between position A (determined in point 5) and position B where the LED goes off.
(Frame Ground) terminal to the ground.
6.3) If the photoelectric sensor still detects the background, one solution may be to
4) Connect to ground the FG (Frame Ground) terminal and all metallic parts of
incline the optical detection axis in relation to the normal of the plane of the
every industrial machinery or not if a photoelectric sensor is used in it.
background by about 10 and repeat the setting procedure from point 4
5) Do not use the photoelectric sensor near electromagnetic or high frequency fields.
onwards. If the LED still does not go off with this procedure, a model of
6) The cables of photoelectric sensors must be separate from the power supply cables,
photoelectric sensor with a more restricted range will have to be chosen.
from the engines cables, from the inverters cables, or from any other electromagnetic
7) The system should then be securely fixed in place.
device because induction noise could cause malfunction or damage to the
photoelectric sensors. Separate the wires of the photoelectric sensors from the above Retro reflective - Polarized retro reflective
indicated cables and then insert the wires into an earthed metal conduit. 1) Fit the photoelectric sensor and the reflector facing each other within the operating
Earth terminal connection of metal conduit
range (distance determined by the kind of reflector used; see table at page 35).
Photoelectric sensor wire
2) Supply power to the sensor.
3) Carefully align the photoelectric sensor and reflector unit around the optical
axis in order to set limits of the operation area and position the
photoelectric sensor approximately at the centre.

Photoelectric sensor Power lines


State LED
7) After making all operations mentioned in the above point 6, if inductive indicator
interference exists, an adequate transient suppression filter must be used
on the power supply line in proximity to the photoelectric sensors.
8) When a large distance by the connection wires to the sensor has to be Retroreflective sensor Reflector
covered, use conductors with a cross-section of a least 0.50 mm2 and do
not exceed the maximum distance of 100 m. 4) Make sure that when an object is placed between the photoeletric sensor
9) The output signal of a photoelectric sensors cannot be used during the start and the reflector, the state LED indicator lights up.
up delay. 5) The photoelectric sensor should switch when an obstacle, placed in
10) Several sensors should not be connected in series, whereas several sensors proximity to the retroreflective, obscures at least 30/40% of its surface. If
can be connected in parallel. switching occurs with less darkness, align the photoelectric sensor and the
Assembly retroreflective better so that the above condition is achieved.
6) The system should then be securely fixed in place.
1) For correct assembly and alignment, all the accessories supplied with the
sensor must be used. DETECTION OF REFLECTING OBJECTS
2) To regulate the sensitivity adjustment trimmer use a suitable srew-driver When the object to be detected is particularly reflective, polarized
without exerting excessive force. retroreflective sensors should be used. In any case, the photoelectric sensor should
3) Do not turn too much fixing screws or nuts to avoid electrical or mechanical be orientated as in the diagram in order to avoid false reflections given by the object.
damages.
4) Mounting photoelectric sensors side by side, leave an appropriate place
between them to avoid mutual interference. Object to be detected
5) When installing two or more emitters and the receivers side by side, alternate
the emitter with the receiver or install a light barrier to prevent reciprocal Reflector
interferences. Avoid reflection coming from the side or back walls or objects.
30-40
6) Do not expose the photoelectric sensors to direct source of fluorescent light Retroreflective or
which could prevent the correct working. Do not exceed the immunity polarized retroreflective
sensor
limits to external light.
7) Do not use organic solvents or corrosive liquids to clean the lenses of the photo-
electric sensors. The optical parts must be cleaned with a soft cloth and then dried.
8) Do not use the sensors in open air without adequate protection.
9) Do not use the photoelectric sensors in dusty places, in presence of steam, N. B.: The reflex and polarized reflex photoelectric sensors should never be used
gases, corrosive steams,corrosive liquids, rain or water jets. Do not let for maximum range values in the presence of adverse environmental conditions
condensation form on the sensor lenses. (such as dust, smoke, etc.) which could reduce the efficiency of the sensors.
10) Do not exceed the indicate temperature limits.
11) Do not subject the appliance to strong vibrations or to shocks which can Emitter - Receiver Thru-beam
damage the sensor or can harm its impermeability. 1) Fit the emitter and the receiver facing each other within the indica-ted operating range.
12) Although some range of phtoelectric sensors are protect IP-67, this does not 2) Supply power to the two photoelectric sensors.
mean that these devices can be used to detect objects in water or in the rain. 3) Align the emitter and receiver carefully: orientate the receiver around the optical
Further information axis in order to set the limits of the operation area and position the receiver
approximately at the centre.
The manufacturer is not liable for the improper use of the product.
Any use and/or application which are not provided for by this instruction sheet
must be previously and directly authorized by the same manufacturer.
SETTING OF NON-ADJUSTABLE PHOTOELECTRIC SENSORS
The following regulation procedure is for photoelectric sensors with N.O. State LED
indicator
output state, for photoelectric sensors with N.C. output state, the LED
conditions are the opposite.
Diffuse reflective
Receiver Emitter
1) Mount the photoelectric sensor in working position but do not fasten it completely.
2) Supply power to the sensor. 4) Make sure that when an object is placed between the emitter and receiver,
3) Position the object to be detected, making sure that the optical axis is perpendicular the state LED indicator lights up.
to the surface of the object. If the surface to be detected is shiny, incline the optical 5) The photoelectric sensor should switch when an obstacle, placed in
axis by a few degress so that the specular reflection is blocked out. proximity to the receiver, obscures at least 30/40% of its surface. If switching
4) Set up the photoelectric sensor in the worst working conditions: occurs with less darkness, align the emitter and the receiver better so that
smaller object to be detected; the above condition is achieved.
State LED indicator
darker object or part of object; 6) The system should then be securely fixed in place.
object in the furthest possible
N. B.: The emitter and receiver barriers should never be used for maximum
position in relation to Object
range values in the presence of adverse environmental conditions (such as
the photoelectric sensor; Diffuse reflective phtoelectric sensor dust, smoke, etc.) which could reduce the efficiency of the sensors.

3 EMX Industries Inc.


Photoelectric Sensors
GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS

SETTING OF ADJUSTABLE PHOTOELECTRIC SENSORS DETECTION OF REFLECTING OBJECTS


The following regulation procedure is for photoelectric sensors with N.O. output state, for When the object to be detected is particularly reflective, polarized
photoelectric sensors with N.C. output state, the LED conditions are the opposite. retroreflective sensors should be used. In any case, the photoelectric sensor should
be orientated as in the diagram in order to avoid false reflections given by the object.
Diffuse reflective
1) Mount the photoelectric sensor in working position but do not fasten it completely.
2) Supply power to the sensor. Object to be detected
3) Position the object to be detected, making sure that the optical axis is perpendicular
to the surface of the object. If the surface to be detected is shiny, incline the optical
axis by a few degrees so that the specular reflection is blocked out.
4) Set up the photoelectric sensor in the worst working conditions: 30-40
smaller object to be detected; Retro reflective or polarized Reflector
retro reflective sensor
darker object or part of object;
object in the furthest possible position in relation to the photoelectric sensor;

OUAT B
ST X. M
MA
5) Turn the sensitivity adjustment trimmer clockwise (+) until maximum

IN.
sensitivity is reached: the yellow LED should be illuminated; if this is not the
case adjust orientation and/or bring the photoelectric sensor nearer.
N. B.: The adjustment obtained in point 7 is the most efficient for shiny and/or
semi-transparent objects; if the objects to be detected are opaque and non-
Screwdriver State Led
Indicator reflecting, the trimmer can be brought to the extreme clockwise position which
Adjustment will allow the photoelectric sensor to operate even in very dusty environments.
trimmer STOU
AB T
MAX
. MIN
.

Emitter - Receiver Thru-beam


Object 1) Fit the emitter and the receiver facing each other within the indica-ted
operating range.
EXTREME
CLOCKWISE 2) Supply power to the two photoelectric sensors.
Diffuse reflective LED POSITION
photoelectric sensor ON 3) Make sure that the sensitivity adjustment trimmer of the receiver is in the
extreme clockwise position (+) and carefully align the emitter
I

LED
and receiver: orientate the receiver around the optical axis in OFF I
I LED
6) Turn the adjustment trimmer anticlockwise (-) until the LED goes out. OFF order to set the limits of the operation area and position the

I
7) Turn the adjustment trimmer clockwise (+) until the LED receiver approximately at the centre until the state LED
lights up again (hysteresis recovery); this determines point A. LED ON I A indicator on the receiver goes out.
8.0) If there is no background go to point 8.1. If there is back- AB T
STOU

ground go to point 8.2.


8.1) NO BACKGROUND: turn the trimmer to a position bet-ween point Screwdriver
A and the extreme clockwise position (determined in point 5). LED
A
AL ION
I IDEOSIT
8.2) BACKGROUND PRESENT: remove the object to be dete-cted ON P Adjustment
I

trimmer STO UT
AB
(the LED will go out: if it does not go out proceed to point
I

MAX
E.O. . MIN
.

8.3) turn the trimmer clockwise until the state LED lights
N
ITIO
POSEAL.

up (point B). Turn the trimmer to a position between point LED A


Status
ID

I I B
A and point B where the LED goes out. ON LED
I

indicator
8.3) If the photoelectric sensor still detects the back-ground,
one solution may be to incline the optical detection axis in relation to the Emitter
Receiver
normal of the plane of the background by about 10 and repeat the
adjustment procedure from point 5 onwards. If, with this procedure, the
LED still does not go off in the presence of background, the photoelectric
A
sensor should be moved nearer the object to be detected and the 4) Position the object to be detected between the emitter and LED ON
I
adjustment procedure from point 5 onward should be repeated. the receiver and check that the yellow LED on the receiver is

I
9) The system should then be securely fixed in place. illuminated, if the yellow LED is off, turn the trimmer LED I
ON
Retro reflective - Polarized retro reflective anticlockwise (-) until the yellow LED lights up: point A.
5) Remove the object and gradually turn the trimmer anti- I
1) Fit the photoelectric sensor and the reflector facing each other within the B
operating range (distance determined by the kind of reflector used; see clockwise (-) until the yellow LED lights up: point B. A
table on page 31). 6) Position the trimmer half way between point A and point B in IDEAL
I

order to complete adjustment. POSITION


2) Supply power to the sensor. B

3) Make sure that the sensitivity adjustment trimmer is in the extreme clockwise position 7) The system should then be securely fixed in place.
(+) and carefully align the photoelectric sensor and reflector around the optical axis in N. B.: The adjustment obtained in point 6 is the most efficient for obtaining
order to set the limits of the operation area and position the photoelectric sensor maximum sensitivity in the detection of small and semi-transparent objects; if
approximately at the centre until the LED goes out. EXTREME the objects to be detected are opaque and are larger than the lens, the
LED
CLOCKWISE
POSITION
trimmer should be turned to the extreme clockwise position which will allow
OFF
the photoelectric sensor to operate even in very dusty environments.
Screwdriver
I

Optical brackets
Adjustment
trimmer MAX
OUT
STAB
1) Mount the optical brackets in working position and fasten it completely.
. MIN.

LED I
2) Supply power to the optical brackets.
ON
Reflector 3) NO SENSING OBJECT Turn the trimmer clockwise (9 full turns) to con-firm
the status (yellow LED is off).
I

LED LED
A 4) Position the object to be sensed and LED I
ON I OFF
check the yellow LED is on.
I

If the yellow LED is off, turn the trimmer MAX


I

Retro reflective
sensor LED
ON
I anti-clockwise and find point A where LED A
the yellow LED is on. ON I
I
4) Slowly turn the adjustment timmer anticlockwise (-) until the SENSING 5) Remove the object and turn the
I

B
OBJECT
LED lights up and then improve orientation so that the LED A trimmer anti-clockwise and find point LED
goes off. Once better oientation is achieved, turn the trimmer POSITION IDEAL B where the yellow LED is on. ON I
I

clockwise (+) until the extreme clockwise position. B 6) Set the trimmer to half way between ponts I
5) Position the object to be detected between the photo-electric A and B for the adjustment is completed. B
sensor and the reflector and check that the yellow LED is illuminated, if the yellow A
IDEAL
LED is off, turn the trimmer anticlockwise (-) until the yellow LED lights up: point A.
I

POSITION
BY OBJECT B
6) Remove the object and gradually turn the trimmer anticlockwise (-) until the
yellow LED lights up: point B.
7) Position the adjustment trimmer half way between point A and point B in Further information
order to achieve the ideal position. Although some ranges of INFRA photoelectric sensors are protected to IP67, this
8) The system should then be securely fixed in place. does not mean that our devices can be used to detect objects in water or in the rain.

4 EMX Industries Inc.


Photoelectric Sensors
GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS

DEFINITIONS AND TERMINOLOGY FOR PHOTOELECTRIC SENSORS


n. THERMINOLOGY DESCRIPTION
Photoelectric Sensor: device sensitive to direct or reflected visible or infra-red
PHOTOELECTRIC light radiation; it can detect the presence of an object (target) in a fixed area
1 - -
SENSOR (sensing area) by means of the reflection or the interruption of the beam
projected in the sensing area.

Photoelectric Sensor without electrical power supply and therefore out


PHOTOELECTRIC NOT
1.1 - of order. Solid state outputs are in a not defined condition; relay outputs
SENSOR STATUS SUPPLIED correspond to the not activated relay condition (relay off ).

Photoelectric Sensor properly supplied and therefore working with no target; particularly:
- diffuse reflective sensor with no target in the sensing area;
PHOTOELECTRIC NOT - retro reflective sensor or thru beam with aligned beam and not interrupted
1.2 SUPPLIED
SENSOR STATUS ACITVATED beam by a target;
the outputs status called normal (i.e. output N.O. : output normally open;
output N.C. : output normally closed) refers to this photoelectric sensor condition.

Photoelectric Sensor properly supplied and therefore working with target ; particularly:
PHOTOELECTRIC - diffuse reflective sensor with target in the sensing area;
1.3 SUPPLIED ACITVATED
SENSOR STATUS - retro reflective sensor or thru beam with not aligned beam or interrupted
beam by a target.

1.4 LIGHT ON - - It shows for the photolectric sensor the case of reception of direct or reflected light.

It shows for the photolectric sensor the case of failure in receiving the direct
1.5 LIGHT OFF - -
or reflected light.

IN SOLID It corresponds to a transistor collector that is to say a triac anode or to a scr


2 OUTPUT -
STATE anode according to the electrical power supply ( d.c. or a.c.).

IN SOLID Output in solid state with pnp transistor; when it is activated, it supplies a
2.1 OUTPUT PNP
STATE positive voltage whose reading is near the supply positive pole (+).

IN SOLID Output in solid state with npn transistor; when it is activated, it supplies
2.2 OUTPUT NPN
STATE a negative voltage whose reading is near the supply negative pole (-).

IN SOLID ON Activated output in solid state, it supplies on the load an output voltage whose
2.3 OUTPUT
STATE (ACTIVATED) reading is near to the voltage power supply of the same Photoelectric Sensor.

IN SOLID OFF (NOT Not activated output in solid state; the load, which is connected to it, does
2.4 OUTPUT
STATE ACTIVATED) not receive any voltage; a not considerable leakage current can be present.

IN SOLID Output in solid state in off status (not activated) when the Photoelectric
2.5 OUTPUT N.O.
STATE Sensor is in normal condition, that is to say not activated.

IN SOLID Output at solid state in on status (activated) when the Photoelectric Sensor
2.6 OUTPUT N.C.
STATE is in normal condition , that is to say not activated.

3 OUTPUT RELAY - It corresponds to a relay contact isolated from the Photoelectric Sensor power supply.

Closed contact when the Photoelectric Sensor is in normal condition, that


3.1 OUTPUT RELAY N.C.
is to say not activated.

Open contact when the Photoelectric Sensor is in normal condition, that


3.2 OUTPUT RELAY N.O.
is to say not activated.

OUTPUT NOT ACTIVATED


4 - Relay in not working condition and therefore not switched.
RELAY (OFF)

OUTPUT ACTIVATED
4.1 - Relay in working condition and therefore switched.
RELAY (ON)

5 EMX INDUSTRIES INC.


LC 2001
COLOUR SENSOR
LC 2004

LC 2001 (1 col.) - LC 2004 (4 col.)


A range of 7 different fibres:
- Tip from de 1,8 to 18 mm
- Sensing distance from 2 to 60 mm
Operating voltage: 24 VDC
Outputs: PNP / NPN
Response time: 1 ms or 20 ms according to
selected mode

Description :
Dimensions
Detection of one to four
recorded colours 61
26
51 5
Fibres: see next page
5

4.2
Self-teach function: easy
and quick adjustment
Signal

External input for self- FPCF 1/+


115

teach (channel 1)

125
FPCP 2/-

3 sensitivities: fine, Teach 3/Clr


Filter 4
medium and low
Timer LO/DO

Keyboard locking feature


1 2
Programmable timer
Four NPN/PNP outputs
Light on / dark on selection Wiring Connections
M12 plug LC 2001 plug 1
IP 65 polycarbonate LC 2004 plug 1 and 2 1 2
Same outputs as
output 1 NPN or PNP
housing (Additionnal outputs)
Brown White
+ Supply output 2
Applications : N
Black Black
output 1 output 3
Detection of marks and
P
coloured tags. Blue Blue
- Supply output 4
O1 - O3 O4
Quality control: External
4 3 4 3

1 2 1 2
- lids colour. record White
+ Ext O2
- presence of labels.
Detection of coloured
Keyboard and Visualisation
wires.
Programming for FPCF type and FPCP type: To adjust the timer:
Detection of coloured
FPCF , FPCP Timer + /+ , /- or /Clr
liquids.
To select sensitivity: fine, medium, large: To adjust the filter:
Sorting out of colored
1/ , 2/ , 3/ Filter + /+ , /- or /Clr
parts.
To record colours on output 1, 2, 3 or 4: To select light on / dark on:
Teach + 1/ , 2/ , 3/ or 4 Lo/Do

Next to every key, a LED indicates the status of the function.


LC 2001
COLOUR SENSOR
LC 2004

Technical Information
Supply voltage 24 VDC 10%
ripple < 10% within specified limits
consumption 120 mA
Response time ton or toff 1 ms (mode FPCF) - 20 ms (mode FPCP)
switching frequency 500 Hz (mode FPCF) - 25 Hz (mode FPCP)
Outputs max. nominal intensity 100 mA per output
voltage drop at 100 mA < 2,2 V
voltage drop at 10 mA < 0,5 V at low level
Emission LED red, green, blue
Timer range 0 to 5 s
increment duration first increment : 50 ms, following increments : 250 ms
Temperature operating 0 to 40 C
storage -20 to 60 C
External light immunity incandescent light 3 000 lux
sunlight 5 000 lux
Protections supply inverse polarity protection
output permanent short-circuit or over-load protection
degree of protection IP 65
External record on 4 to 24 V, 10 s minimum
off <1V
Recording duration 1s

Ordering Codes
Product Colour sensor Colour sensor fibres
Reference LC 2001 - 1 channel see hereby
LC 2004 - 4 channels
2 m connectors (M12), cable included

FIBRES FOR COLOUR SENSOR ( FPC )

Fibre set-up:

Comply with advised sensing distance as indicated hereby.


If the surface is glossy, tilt the tip 20 approximatly from the perpendicular to the surface.
Plug the fibre polarized adapter in the front side of the sensor and tighten the two M4 screws.

20
OPTICAL FIBRES FOR COLOUR SENSOR FPC

Diffuse Type - P

LENGTH SENSING
REFERENCES DISTANCE MODE / TR
(MM) (MM)
8 M18 x 100
FPCF 61 600 18 FPCF / 1 ms
FPCF 101 1000
39.3
20.1 600 or 1000 mm 57.5
Application : Fine detection with focused spot 1.5

8 M18 x 100
FPUCF 61 600 18 FPCF / 1 ms
FPUCF 101 1000
39.3
20.1 600 or 1000 mm 57.5
Application : Detection with focused spot 1.5 for moving fibre

8 M18 x 100
FPCP 61 600 40 to 60 FPCP / 20 ms
FPCP 101 1000
39.3
20.1 600 or 1000 mm 57.5
Application : Fine detection at fluctuating distance (spot approx. 6)

8 M18 x 100
FPUCP 61 600 40 to 60 FPCP / 20 ms
FPUCP 101 1000
39.3
20.1 600 or 1000 mm 57.5
Application : Detection at fluctuating distance for moving fibre (spot approx. 6)

M8 x 100
8
9
FPCFM8 61 600 4 to 6 FPCF / 1 ms
FPCFM8 101 1000
16.3
20.1 600 or 1000 mm 26.3

Application : Fine detection with small tip dimensions


1.8

2.2 M4
FPCFA 61 600 2 to 3 FPCF / 1 ms
FPCFA 101 1000
12
20.1 600 or 1000 mm 23
Application : Fine detection with needle noze tip
1.8

2.2 M4

40 FPCFC 61 600 2 to 3 FPCF / 1 ms


FPCFC 101 1000
20.1 600 or 1000 mm 51

Application : Fine detection with needle noze tip and pliable extension
LC 2001
COLOUR SENSOR
LC 2004

TYPES OF APPLICATIONS

FPCFC
Rocker switch colour verification.

FPCFM8
Seal colour bends
verification.

FPCP
Test of sponge orientation.

FPCFA
Correct assembly of colour
coded plugs.

V
4
-2
+

FPCP with reflector 4 x FPCFC

Liquid colour verification in a trans- Ribbon cable colour coded conduc-


parent tube, using a reflector. tor verification.
Diffuse Ref. Photoelectric Sensors
PHOTOELECTRIC SENSORS IN STANDARD HOUSING 12 30 V DC NPN O PNP OUTPUT
Miniature 18 mm tubular 18 Series
Operation LED aids installation
Models w/o pots for simple installation
Quick connect or integral cable
9-turn pot models

Identification code Wiring diagrams

18 15 D1 K R M BROWN

SERIES 18
BLACK
NPN
NPN NO output
15 BLUE
NPN NC output
16
PNP NO output
18 BROWN
PNP NC output CONNECTOR
19 OUTPUT M12
BLACK
PNP
Switching distance = 10 CM
D1 SENSITIVITY BLUE
Switching distance = 20 CM ADJUSTMENT
D2
Switching distance = 40 CM METAL HOUSING
D3
K and R are not available in the same model

AVAILABLE D1 D2 D3 Connection with connector M12 (K)


SWITCHING DISTANCE 10 cm (1) 20 cm (1) 40 cm (1)
HYSTERESIS 10% View of quadripole male connector.
EMISSION Infrared (875 m) 1

NOMINAL VOLTAGE 12 30VDC (-15 /+10%)


RESIDUAL RIPPLE 10% CONTACTS CONFIGURATION
2 4
MAX. OUTPUT CURRENT 200 mA Contacts numbers
Available
1 2 3 4
ABSORPTION AT 30 VDC 30 mA (NO or NC) + - NO/NC
VOLTAGE DROP (Sensor ON) 1.5V (I = 200 mA) 3 Emitter + -

OPERATION LED Yellow


Note: the K plug is compatible with the following connectors:
SWITCHING FREQUENCY 200 Hz VAUDEHA, BINDER, HIRSCHMANN, LUMBERG, AMPHENOL-TUCHEL.
RESPONSE TIME 5 mS
START UP DELAY 100 mS
SHORT CIRCUIT PROTECTION Present (self-resetting) Accessories
ELECTRIC PROTECTIONS Againts polarity reversal - inductive loads
TEMPERATURE LIMITS -10 +60 C Mirror 90
DEV90
LIGHT IMMUNITY 5000 Lux (2)
PROTECTION DEGREE IP 67 (IP 65 for models with sensitivity adjustment)
CABLE LENGTH 2m 35 Object
to be
CABLE SECTION 3 x 0.25 mm2 detected
HOUSING MATERIAL Housing: nylon loaded with fiberglass - Lenses: methacrylate
WEIGHT - cable output - (connector output) - 110 g - (55 g)
(1)
Determined with a white mat paper (cm 10 x 10). 23
Determined with halogen tungsten lamp 3000 K.
(2)

Note: for a proper use see norms at pages 6, 7 and 8.

Dimensions (mm) Characteristic curves

Configuration with cable Configuration with cable - Back view


55 15
LED visible through
transparence
LED visible through Cable output
M18 x 1

transparence DIFFUSE REFLECTIVE D1 DIFFUSE REFLECTIVE D2 DIFFUSE REFLECTIVE D3


Distance X (mm) Distance X (cm) Distance X (cm)

100 20 36
70 12
90 18 32
80 16
28
70 14
24
Configuration with connector K Configuration with sensitivity adjustment 60 12
20
55 15 50 10
LED visible through Y Y Y 16
transparence White mat 40 White mat 8 White mat
paper paper paper
LED visible through Sensitivity adjustment trimmer 10x10 cm 10x10 cm 10x10 cm 12
M18 x 1

M12 x 1

30 6
transparence (9 turns) X X X
20 8
4

Cable output 10 2 4
Sensor Sensore Sensor
70 12
20 10 0 10 20 30 20 10 0 10 20 30 20 10 0 10 20
Y (mm) Y (mm) Y (mm)

EMX INDUSTRIES INC.


Diffuse Ref. Photoelectric Sensors
PHOTOELECTRIC SENSORS IN LONG HOUSING 24 230 V AC TRIAC AND NC OUTPUT
Short AC housing, only 80 mm 18 Series
Leakage <1.5 mA @ 220 V DC
Models w/o pots for simple installation
Models with 9-turn pot

Identification code Wiring diagrams

18 31 D1 R
SERIES 18 BROWN
L1

WHITE 24 230 Vac


TRIAC NO output
31 AC
TRIAC NC output
32 BLUE
N

Switching distance = 10 CM
D1
Switching distance = 20 CM
D2
Switching distance = 40 CM
D3 WARNING: Short circuit in the output is not possible. Wrong supply cables
SENSITIVITY ADJUSTMENT connections can irreparably damage the detector. Therefore sensors whose
output status is short-circuited will not be substituted under warranty.

AVAILABLE D1 D2 D3
SWITCHING DISTANCE 10 cm (1) 20 cm (1) 40 cm (1)
CONNECTIONS IN PARALLEL
HYSTERESIS 10% In parallel connections with multiple outputs, the maximum leakage
EMISSION Infrared (875 m) current (<1,5 mA at 220 VAC) referring to the load and the supply
should be taken into account when calculating the max. quantity
NOMINAL VOLTAGE 24 230VAC (-15 /+10%) of connectable sensors.
MAINS FREQUENCY 50 60 Hz It is important in this connection that the sensors are connected
at the same phase.
MAX. OUTPUT CURRENT 150 mA
LEAKAGE CURRENT 1.5mA (at 220VAC)
ABSORPTION 1W Accessories
VOLTAGE DROP (Sensor ON) < 2.5 V
OPERATION LED Yellow
SWITCHING FREQUENCY 10 Hz
RESPONSE TIME 100 mS DEV90 90
Mirror
START UP DELAY 300 mS
ELECTRIC PROTECTIONS Againts inductive loads
TEMPERATURE LIMITS -10 +60 C 35 Object
LIGHT IMMUNITY 5000 Lux to be
detected
PROTECTION DEGREE IP 67 (IP 65 for models with sensitivity adjustment)
CABLE LENGTH 2m
CABLE SECTION 3 x 0.35 mm2
HOUSING MATERIAL Housing: nylon loaded with fiberglass - Lenses: methacrylate 23
WEIGHT - cable output - 120 g
(1)
Determined with a white mat paper (cm 10 x 10).
Determined with halogen tungsten lamp 3000 K.
(2)

Note: for a proper use see norms at pages 6, 7 and 8.

Dimensions (mm) Characteristic curves

Configuration with cable


65 15
LED visible through
transparence
M18 x 1

DIFFUSE REFLECTIVE D1 DIFFUSE REFLECTIVE D2 DIFFUSE REFLECTIVE D3


Distance X (mm) Distance X (cm) Distance X (cm)

100 20 36

80 12 90 18 32
80 16
28
70 14
24
60 12
20
Configuration with cable - Back view Configuration with sensitivity adjustment 50 10
Y Y Y 16
White mat 40 White mat 8 White mat
paper paper paper
10x10 cm 10x10 cm 10x10 cm 12
30 6
LED visible through Cable output LED visible through Sensitivity adjustment
X X X 8
transparence transparence trimmer (9 turns) 20 4

10 2 4
Sensor Sensore Sensor
Cable output
20 10 0 10 20 30 20 10 0 10 20 30 20 10 0 10 20
Y (mm) Y (mm) Y (mm)

EMX INDUSTRIES INC.


Diffuse Ref. Photoelectric Sensors
PHOTOELECTRIC SENSORS IN STANDARD HOUSING 12 30 V DC PROGRAMMABLE OUTPUT
Programmable outputs, NPN or PNP, N.C. or N.O. MF Series
Simpke one-turn sensitivity
M12 quick connect or integral cable
2 msec ON/OFF

Identification code Wiring diagrams


BROWN BROWN

MF 01 D2 K NPN WHITE
BLACK
PNP WHITE
BLACK
NO BLUE
NO BLUE
SERIES MF
BLUE BLUE
PROGRAMMABLE OUTPUT
NPN WHITE
BLACK
PNP WHITE
BLACK
NC NC
Switching distance = 20 CM
D2 BROWN BROWN

Switching distance = 40 CM
D3 Note: For series or parallel connections see notes at page 6.
CONNECTOR OUTPUT M12

Connection with connector M12 (K)


AVAILABLE D2 D3 1
SWITCHING DISTANCE 20 cm (1) 40 cm (1)
HYSTERESIS 10%
View of quadripole
EMISSION Infrared (875 m) 2 4
male connector.
NOMINAL VOLTAGE 12 30VDC (-15 /+10%)
RESIDUAL RIPPLE 10%
3
OUTPUT NPN or PNP (may be selected)
CONTACT NO or NC (may be selected) CONTACTS CONFIGURATION
MAX. OUTPUT CURRENT 200 mA Output
Contacts numbers
1 2 3 4
ABSORPTION AT 30 VDC 40 mA NPN NO NO

2 V (l = 100 mA)
NPN NC NC
VOLTAGE DROP (Sensor ON) PNP NO NO
PNP NC NC
STATUS LED Yellow
SENSITIVITY ADJUSTEMENT Trimmer 1 turn Note: the K plug is compatible with the following connectors:
SWITCHING FREQUENCY 500 Hz VAUDEHA, BINDER, HIRSCHMANN, LUMBERG, AMPHENOL-TUCHEL.
RESPONSE TIME 2 mS
START UP DELAY 100 mS Accessories
SHORT CIRCUIT PROTECTION Present (self-resetting)
ELECTRIC PROTECTIONS Againts polarity reversal - inductive loads
TEMPERATURE LIMITS -10 +60 C DEV90 Mirror 90

LIGHT IMMUNITY > 10.000 Lux (2)


PROTECTION DEGREE IP 65
CABLE LENGTH 2m 35 Object
to be
CABLE SECTION 4 x 0.25 mm2 detected

HOUSING MATERIAL Housing: ABS - Lenses: methacrylate


WEIGHT - cable output - (connector output) - 130 g - (70 g)
(1)
Determined with a white mat paper (cm 10 x 10). 23
Determined with halogen tungsten lamp 3000 K.
(2)

Note: for a proper use see norms at pages 6, 7 and 8.

Dimensions (mm) Characteristic curves


DIFFUSE REFLECTIVE D2 DIFFUSE REFLECTIVE D3
Distance X (cm) Distance X (cm)
Configuration with cable Configuration with connector K
47 30 47 30
LED visible LED visible
through transparence 20 36
through transparence
M18 x 1

M18 x 1
+

M12 x 1

18
REG.

REG.

32

16 28
Sensitivity adjustment Sensitivity adjustment
trimmer trimmer
77 14 77 12 14
24
12
20
Sensitivity adjustment 10
Y
16
White mat 8 White mat
paper paper
10x10 cm 10x10 cm 12
1) SENSITIVITY INCREASE 6
LED visible
Screw the trimmer towards right towards position + through transparence X X 8
+

4
REG.

2) SENSITIVITY DECREASE 2 4

Sensor Sensor
Screw the trimmer towards left towards position
Sensitivity adjustment trimmer 30 20 10 0 10 20 30 20 10 0 10 20
Note: the trimmer just needs one turn. Y (mm) Y (mm)

EMX INDUSTRIES INC.


Diffuse Ref. Photoelectric Sensors
PHOTOELECTRIC SENSORS IN SQUARE HOUSING 12 30 V DC PROGRAMMABLE OUTPUT
Compact size, output and stability indicators FQ Series
Cost effective
M12 quick connect or integral cable
5 msec ON/OFF

Identification code Wiring diagrams


BROWN BROWN

FQ 01 D2 K NPN WHITE
BLACK
PNP WHITE
BLACK
NO BLUE NO BLUE
SERIES FQ
BLUE BLUE
PROGRAMMABLE OUTPUT
NPN WHITE
BLACK
PNP WHITE
BLACK
Switching distance = 20 100 CM NC NC
D2 BROWN BROWN

Switching distance = 20 150 CM


D3 Note: For series or parallel connections see notes at page 6.
CONNECTOR OUTPUT M12
Connection with connector M12 (K)
AVAILABLE D2 D3
1
SWITCHING DISTANCE 20 100 cm (1) 20 150 cm(1) CONTACTS CONFIGURATION
Contacts numbers
HYSTERESIS 10% 2 4
Output
1 2 3 4

EMISSION Infrared (875 m) NPN NO


NPN NC
NO
NC
NOMINAL VOLTAGE 12 30VDC (-15 /+10%) PNP NO NO
3 PNP NC NC
RESIDUAL RIPPLE 10% Emitter
View of quadripole
OUTPUT NPN or PNP (programmable) male connector. Note: the K plug is compatible with the following
CONTACT NO or NC (programmable) connectors: VAUDEHA, BINDER, HIRSCHMANN,
LUMBERG, AMPHENOL-TUCHEL.
MAX. OUTPUT CURRENT 200 mA
ABSORPTION AT 30 VDC 40 mA Sensitivity adjustment
VOLTAGE DROP (Sensor ON) 1.8 V (l = 100 mA) Green LED Yellow LED
YELLOW LED Output indicator 1) SENSITIVITY INCREASE
Screw the trimmer towards

MIN.
GREEN LED Stability indicator right towards position +

MAX.

POW.
OUT
SENSITIVITY ADJUSTEMENT Trimmer 1 turn 2) SENSITIVITY DECREASE Sensitivity adjustment trimmer
SWITCHING FREQUENCY 200 Hz Screw the trimmer towards
left towards position Note: the trimmer just needs one turn.
RESPONSE TIME 5 mS
START UP DELAY 100 mS Stability signal led
SHORT CIRCUIT PROTECTION Present (self-resetting)
Range of
ELECTRIC PROTECTIONS Againts polarity reversal - inductive loads received
signal

TEMPERATURE LIMITS -20 +60 C 110% Switch limit of stability green LED

100% Switch limit of output yellow LED

LIGHT IMMUNITY > 10.000 Lux (2)


Time
PROTECTION DEGREE IP 65 Yellow LED

ON
CABLE LENGTH 2m
OFF Time
CABLE SECTION 4 x 0.25 mm2 Green LED

HOUSING MATERIAL Housing: ABS - Lenses: methacrylate ON

WEIGHT - cable output - (connector output) - 160 g - (120 g) OFF Time

(1) The stability signal LED shows the range of received signal and helps the
Determined with a white mat paper (cm 10 x 10). photoelectric sensor to line up.
(2)
Determined with halogen tungsten lamp 3000 K. A photoelectric sensor works in stability condition when the received light
Note: for a proper use see norms at pages 6, 7 and 8. signal range is 10% ahead the switching limit of output.

Dimensions (mm) Characteristic curves


40
50 18 18 30,5 DIFFUSE REFLECTIVE D2
5 Mounting 21 Distance X (cm)
4,5

bracket 100
5

(supplied 90
accessory)
24,5

4,5
50

53

80

70
15,5

R 2,25
5

5 4.5
60
DIFFUSE
20

POLARIZED
REFLECTIVE RETRO 50
Y
Configuration with cable RETRO
REFLECTIVE
REFLECTIVE
10
56 White mat
40
paper
10x10 cm
Configuration with 30
1,5

25 15,25 2,5
connector K X
20
13,5
20

6,5
11

10
M12 x 1

Sensor
4,5

6,5 25 12 9 2
15 10 5 0 5 10 15
14 56
Y (mm)
Rotating connector - coming soon -

EMX INDUSTRIES INC.


Diffuse Ref. Photoelectric Sensors
PHOTOELECTRIC SENSORS IN SQUARE HOUSING 18 230 V AC - DC REPLAY OUTPUT
Wide input voltage FQ Series
3A relay SPDT
M12 quick connect or integral cable
Output and Supply indicators

Identification code Wiring diagrams

FQ 05 D2 K BROWN
L
R WHITE
E
SERIES FQ L
RED

BLACK
A
REPLAY OUTPUT NORMAL OFF Y BLUE
N
Switching distance = 20 100 CM
D2
Switching distance = 20 150 CM
D3
Note: in case of inductive loads it is necessary to connect one diode
CONNECTOR OUTPUT M12 in antiparallel at the edges of the load.

AVAILABLE D2 D3 Connection with connector M12 (K)


SWITCHING DISTANCE 20 100 cm (1) 20 150 cm (1) 1
HYSTERESIS 10%
EMISSION Infrared (875 m)
2 4 View of quadripole
NOMINAL VOLTAGE 18 230V AC - DC (-15 /+10%) male connector.
MAINS FREQUENCY 50 60 Hz
OUTPUT Relay (10 x 106 ops. min.) 3
MAX. OUTPUT CURRENT 3A 30 V AC - 1A 220 V AC (90W, 360 VA)
ABSORPTION CONTACTS CONFIGURATION
2.5 VA
Contacts numbers
Output
YELLOW LED Output indicator 1 2 3 4
Relay L COM N NO
GREEN LED Supply indicator Emitter L N

SENSITIVITY ADJUSTEMENT Trimmer 1 turn Note: the K plug is compatible with the following connectors: VAUDEHA,
SWITCHING FREQUENCY 10 Hz BINDER, HIRSCHMANN, LUMBERG, AMPHENOL-TUCHEL.
RESPONSE TIME 100 mS
Sensitivity adjustment
START UP DELAY 300 mS
TEMPERATURE LIMITS - 20 +60 C
1) SENSITIVITY INCREASE
LIGHT IMMUNITY > 10.000 Lux (2) Screw the trimmer towards right towards position +
PROTECTION DEGREE IP 65
2) SENSITIVITY DECREASE
CABLE LENGTH 2m Screw the trimmer towards left towards position
CABLE SECTION 5 x 0.30 mm2
Green LED = supply
HOUSING MATERIAL Housing: ABS - Lenses: methacrylate
WEIGHT - cable output - (connector output) - 180 g - (125 g)
MIN.
MAX.

POW.
OUT

(1)
Determined with a white mat paper (cm 10 x 10).
(2)
Determined with halogen tungsten lamp 3000 K.
Sensitivity adjustment Yellow LED = output
Note: for a proper use see norms at pages 6, 7 and 8.
trimmer
Note: the trimmer just needs one turn.

Dimensions (mm) Characteristic curves


40
50 18 18 30,5 DIFFUSE REFLECTIVE D2
5 Mounting 21 Distance X (cm)
4,5

bracket 100
5

(supplied 90
accessory)
24,5

4,5
50

53

80

70
15,5

R 2,25
5

5 4.5
60
DIFFUSE
20

POLARIZED
REFLECTIVE RETRO 50
Y
Configuration with cable RETRO
REFLECTIVE
REFLECTIVE
10
56 White mat
40
paper
10x10 cm
Configuration with 30
1,5

25 15,25 2,5
connector K X
20
13,5
20

6,5
11

10
M12 x 1

Sensor
4,5

6,5 25 12 9 2
15 10 5 0 5 10 15
14 56
Y (mm)
Rotating connector - coming soon -

EMX INDUSTRIES INC.


Diffuse Ref. Photoelectric Sensors
PHOTOELECTRIC SENSORS IN RECTANGULAR HOUSING 12 30 V DC WITH TIMER NPN OR PNP OUTPUT
Rectangle compact size
Multi-function timer FW Series
ON/OFF delay
One shot-four functions
NPN or PNP outputs
Conduit wiring terminal block
Identification code Wiring diagrams
Time regulation
FW 01 D2 T (on request)
LED

Sensitivity adjustment

2 3
DIP switches
SERIES FW

O1
N
1 Not connected

NPN NO or NC output
01 2

3
NC

NO
PNP NO or NC output
02 4 +
5 -
SWITCHING DISTANCE = 20 80 CM

TIME DELAY 1 7 SEC.

AVAILABLE D2 Timing diagrams


SWITCHING DISTANCE 20 - 80 cm(1)
HYSTERESIS 10% MODELS WITHOUT TIMER
EMISSION Infrared (875 m) N. DIP. SWITCHES POSITION OBJECT
Light
OUTPUT DIAGRAM

12 30VDC (-15 /+10%)


impulse
NOMINAL VOLTAGE Output ON Outoput
1
10%
(2=NO; 3=NC) status
RESIDUAL RIPPLE
Output OFF Outoput
2
OUTPUT NPN or PNP (2=NC; 3=NO) status

MAX OUTPUT CURRENT 200 mA MODELS WITH TIMER


ABSORPTION 40 mA N. DIP. SWITCHES POSITION OBJECT OUTPUT DIAGRAM
Light
VOLTAGE DECREASE 2.5 VDC impulse

On operate Outoput
YELLOW LED Present 1
output ON status

SENSITIVITY ADJUSTEMENT Timmer 1 turn 2 On operate


output OFF
Outoput
status

TIME REGULATION 0.1 7 s 2 s (only models with timer) 3 On release


output ON
Outoput
status

SWITCHING FREQUENCY 100 Hz 4 On release Outoput


output OFF status
RESPONSE TIME 10 mS 5 One shot trailing edge Outoput
output ON status
START UP DELAY 300 ms One shot trailing edge Outoput
6
output OFF status
PROTECTION AGAINTS SHORT-CIRCUIT Present (self-resetting) One shot leading edge Outoput
7
TEMPERATURE LIMITS -25 +55C output ON status

One shot leading edge Outoput


8
LIGHT IMMUNITY 5.000 Lux (2) output OFF status

T = Fixed delay
PROTECTION DEGREE IP 67
CONNECTIONS Screw
CABLE GUIDE PG 13.5
HOUSING MATERIAL Polycarbonate
WEIGHT (Approximately) 110 g
(1)
Determined with a white mat paper cm 20 x 20.
(2)
Determined with halogen tungsten lamp 3000 K.
Note: for a proper use see norms at pages 6, 7 and 8.

Dimensions (mm) Characteristic curves


2,5

81 25

ON
PHOTOELECTRIC DIFFUSE REFLECTIVE

I SENSOR Distance X (cm)


Pg. 13.5

S
100

I
4,3

67,5
65

E V 80

R
5

7 40 19,5 Pg. 13.5

IN
60

3 6 12,5 Y
4,4

R 3,25
White mat 40
paper
20x20 cm
4,4
0
R4 X
59,5

20
52
40
4,4
30

MOUNTING BRACKET
18

4,4 Sensor
(SUPPLIED ACCESSORY)
6

6 30 20 10 0 10 20 30
6,5

10
52 Y (mm)

EMX INDUSTRIES INC.


Diffuse Ref. Photoelectric Sensors
PH. SENSORS IN RECTANGULAR HOUSING 12 240 V DC 24 240 V AC WITH TIMER RELAY OUTPUT
Wide range World Wide Power Supply FW Series
Rectangular compact size
Multi-function timer:
- ON/OFF delay - One shot-four functions
- 3A relay SPDT - Terminal block wiring

Identification code Wiring diagrams

FW 05 D2 T Time regulation
(on request)
LED
SERIES FW Sensitivity adjustment DIP switches

RELAY OUTPUT 12 - 240 VDC


24 - 240 VAC
50/60 Hz
SWITCHING DISTANCE = 20 80 CM
30 VDC
250 VAC
TIME DELAY 1 7 SEC. Max. 3A

Relay OFF
AVAILABLE D2
SWITCHING DISTANCE 20 -80 cm (1)
HYSTERESIS 10%
EMISSION Infrared (875 m) Timing diagrams
NOMINAL VOLTAGE 12 240VDC / 24 240 VAC (-15 /+10%)
NET FREQUENCY 45 60 Hz MODELS WITHOUT TIMER
OUTPUT DIAGRAM
OUTPUT Relay (40 x 106 mec. op. -5 x 106 elect. op.) N. DIP. SWITCHES POSITION OBJECT
Light
impulse
MAX OUTPUT CURRENT 3A 250VAC - 3A 30VDC Output ON Outoput
1
2W (2.5 VA)
(2=NO; 3=NC) status
ABSORPTION
Output OFF Outoput
2 (2=NC; 3=NO)
YELLOW LED Present status

GREEN LED - MODELS WITH TIMER


N. DIP. SWITCHES POSITION OBJECT OUTPUT DIAGRAM
SENSITIVITY ADJUSTEMENT Present
Light
TIME REGULATION 0.1 7 s 2 s (only models with timer) impulse

On operate Outoput
SWITCHING FREQUENCY 20 Hz 1
output ON status

On operate Outoput
RESPONSE TIME 50 ms 2
output OFF status

START UP DELAY 300 ms 3 On release


output ON
Outoput
status

TEMPERATURE LIMITS -25 +55C 4 On release Outoput


output OFF status
LIGHT IMMUNITY 5.000 Lux (2) 5 One shot trailing edge Outoput
output ON status
PROTECTION DEGREE IP 67 One shot trailing edge Outoput
6
output OFF status
CONNECTIONS Screw One shot leading edge Outoput
7 output ON status
CABLE GUIDE PG 13.5
One shot leading edge Outoput
8
HOUSING MATERIAL Polycarbonate output OFF status

T = Fixed delay
WEIGHT (Approximately) 110 g

(1)
Determined with a white mat paper cm 20 x 20.
(2)
Determined with halogen tungsten lamp 3000 K.
Note: for a proper use see norms at pages ? and ?.

Dimensions (mm) Characteristic curves


2,5

81 25

ON
PHOTOELECTRIC DIFFUSE REFLECTIVE

I
Pg. 13.5

I S
SENSOR Distance X (cm)
100
4,3

67,5
65

E V 80

R
5

7 40 19,5 Pg. 13.5

IN
60

3 6 12,5
4,4

R 3,25 Y
White mat 40
paper
4,4 20x20 cm

R 40
59,5

52
40

X
4,4
30

20
MOUNTING BRACKET
18

4,4
(SUPPLIED ACCESSORY) Sensor
6

6
6,5

10
52 30 20 10 0 10 20 30
Y (mm)

23 EMX INDUSTRIES INC.


DIFFUSE REFLECTION SENSOR P 952

P 952 S / R

Sensing : 4 m on white sheet 300 x 300 mm


Supply :10 to 30 VDC or 20 to 250 V AC/DC
Output : PNP / NPN or relay
ON-delay + OFF-delay timer

Description :
Dimensions
Simple and quick set-up
for self-teach (standard 29 60
5.5
and sensitive mode)
Double adjustable timer Optical axis

Alignment indicator 2xM4 4

Dirty optics indicator

80

30
Keyboard lock
30

Remote test input (S type)


simulate the beam cut-off 3
4.5

10.8
Direct or inverse output 18
cable seal 4 to 10 mm
Output : static or relay

Connection on screw Wiring Connections


terminal
STATIC (S) RELAY (R)
Polycarbonate strong
housing Output 0V NC C NO
N P Remote test

10/30 VDC
Applications : Supply
0V
Terminal 250 V - 1,5 mm2
Strip tearing sensing.

Handling. Visualisation and Keyboard


Admittance control. - Sensitivity decrease - Sensitivity increase
- On delay - Off delay - Light on - Dark on
- Decrease timer adjustment - Increase timer adjustment
- Automatic threshold set-up
- Special function key
LO-DO

SET
+

t
t

Terminal cover
- Detection

In case of a short-circuit on the - Dirty optics


output, both red and green LEDs - Detection limit
flash - Alignment indicator
- Key depressed
- Keyboard locked - Timer ON
- Timer indicator
DIFFUSE REFLECTION SENSOR P 952

Technical Information S R
Supply voltage 10 / 30 VDC 20 / 250 V AC/DC
ripple < 10%
within specified limits
consumption 50 mA 2 VA
Response time ton or toff 8 ms 20 ms
switching frequency 60 Hz 25 Hz
Output max. nominal intensity 100 mA change over type relay
residual voltage at 100 mA <2V U nominal : 250 V AC
residual voltage at 10 mA <1V permanent max. I : 3 A
Emission LED infra-red
modulation frequency 400 Hz 400 Hz
Timer type retriggerable - ON-delay / OFF-delay
range - increment duration o to 11s in 23 steps of 50ms, then 0.5s steps
Temperature operating 0 to 60 C
storage -20 to 80 C
External light immunity incandescent light 10 000 lux from optical axis
sunlight 20 000 lux 5 from optical axis
Protections supply inverse polarity protection
output short-circuit or over-load
degree of protection IP 65 and IP 67
Remote input on voltage < 1,4 V
off voltage > 3 V

To Place Order
Product Diffuse reflection sensor
Reference P - 952 ( )
Type (S) : static - 10 / 30 VDC
(R) : relay - 20 / 250 V AC/DC

TYPES OF APPLICATIONS

Example 1
Positionning for sticking, stapling or labelling operations.

DINEL

DINEL

DINEL

Example 2
Jam control on a parcels conveyor.
DIFFUSE REFLECTION SENSOR P 318

P 318
Sensing distance on 100x100 mm
white sheet : 0,10 m
Supply : 10 to 30 V
Output : PNP / NPN

Description : Dimensions
Function indicator 80
LED

M18x1
Direct or inverse output

Output : PNP / NPN

M12 plug or cable 4 58 18 8 21


24
Polyamid housing

Wiring Connections
Applications :
Brown Blue
White
+ White
+
Detection of various parts NPN NPN
Black Black
(plastic or metallic). Blue Brown
- -
Control of position or pre- Connection in NPN
sence of parts on a Brown Blue
+ +
conveyor. PNP White
PNP White

Black Black
Blue Brown
- -
Connection in PNP

Technical Information
Supply voltage 10 / 30 VDC
ripple < 10% within specified limits
consumption 20 mA
Response time switching frequency 80 Hz
Output nominal intensity 100 mA
residual voltage at 100 mA 1,2 V max.
Emission LED infra-red
Temperature operating -25 70 C
storage -20 80 C
External light immunity incandescent light 3 000 lux
sunlight 10 000 lux
Protections output short-circuit
degree of protection IP 67

To Place Order
Product Diffuse reflection sensor Type P 318 (C) - cable
Reference P 318 PK 318 (C) - M12 plug
DIFFUSE REFLECTION SENSOR P 328

P 328
Sensing distance on 100x100 mm
white sheet : 0,40 m
Supply : 10 to 30 V
Output : PNP / NPN

Description : Dimensions
LED 1 Trimmer
Function indicator 80
LED 2

M18x1
Direct or inverse output

10
Output : PNP / NPN

M12plug or cable at 90 4 58 12 6 21
24
Polyamid housing
Wiring Connections
Applications : Brown Brown
Black
+ Black
+
NPN NPN
Detection of various parts White White
(plastic or metallic). Blue Blue
- -
Control of position or pre- Connection type NPN

sence of parts on a Brown + Brown +


White White
conveyor. PNP PNP
Black Black
Blue Blue
- -
Connection type PNP

Technical Information
Supply voltage 10 / 30 VDC
ripple < 10% within specified limits
consumption 20 mA
Response time switching frequency 1 KHz
ton or toff <500 s
Output nominal intensity 100 mA
residual voltage at 100 mA 1,2 V max.
Emission LED infra-red modulated
Temperature operating -25 70 C
storage -20 80 C
External light immunity incandescent light 3 000 lux
sunlight 10 000 lux
Protections output short-circuit
degree of protection IP 65

To Place Order
Product Diffuse reflection sensor Type P 328 (CP) or PK 328 (CP)
output PNP with M12 plug
Rfrence P 328
P 328 (CN) or PK 328 (CN)
output NPN with M12 plug
DIFFUSE REFLECTION SENSOR P 954

P 954 S / R

Sensing : 1,5 m on 300x300 mm white sheet


Supply :10 to 30 VDC or 20 to 250 V AC/DC
Output : PNP / NPN or relay
ON-delay + OFF-delay timer

Description :
Dimensions
Simple and quick set-up
for self-teach (standard 29 60
5.5
and sensitive mode)
Double adjustable timer Optical axis

Alignment indicator 2xM4 4

Dirty optics indicator

80

30
Keyboard lock
30

Remote test input (S type)


simulate the beam cut-off 3
4.5

10.8
Direct or inverse output 18
cable seal 4 to 10 mm
Output : static or relay

Connection on screw Wiring Connections


terminal
STATIC (S) RELAY (R)
Polycarbonate strong
housing Output 0V NC C NO
N P Remote test

10/30 VDC
Applications : Supply
0V
Terminal 250 V - 1,5 mm2
Strip tearing sensing.

Handling. Visualisation and Keyboard


Admittance control. - Sensitivity decrease - Sensitivity increase
- On delay - Off delay - Light on - Dark on
- Decrease timer adjustment - Increase timer adjustment
- Automatic threshold set-up
- Special functions key
LO-DO

SET
+

t
t

Terminal cover
- Detection

In case of a short-circuit on the - Dirty optics


output, both red and green LEDs - Detection limit
flash - Alignment indicator
- Key depressed
- Keyboard locked - Timer ON
- Timer indicator
DIFFUSE REFLECTION SENSOR P 954

Technical Information S R
Supply voltage 10 / 30 VDC 20 / 250 V AC/DC
ripple < 10%
within specified limits
consumption 50 mA 2 VA
Response time ton or toff 500 s 20 ms
switching frequency 1 KHz 25 Hz
Output max. nominal intensity 100 mA change over type relay
residual voltage at 100 mA <2V U nominal : 250 V AC
residual voltage at 10 mA <1V permanent max. I : 3 A
Emission LED infra-red
modulation frequency 8 KHz 400 Hz
Timer type retriggerable - ON-delay / OFF-delay
range - increment duration o to 11s in 23 steps of 50ms, then 0.5s steps
Temperature operating 0 to 60 C
storage -20 to 80 C
External light immunity incandescent light 10 000 lux 5 from optical axis
sunlight 20 000 lux 5 from optical axis
Protections supply inverse polarity protection
output short-circuit or over-load
degree of protection IP 65 and IP 67
Remote input on voltage < 1,4 V
off voltage > 3 V

To Place Order
Product Diffuse reflection sensor
Reference P - 954 ( )
Type (S) : static - 10 / 30 VDC
(R) : relay - 20 / 250 V AC/DC

TYPES OF APPLICATIONS

Example 1
Strip slack control.

Example 2
Control of presence on a conveyor.
MINIATURE DIFFUSE REFLECTION SENSOR P 989 S

P 989 S
Adjustable sensing distance from 3 to 25 cm
On white sheet 92% from 100 x 100 mm
Supply : 10 to 30 VDC
Output : PNP or NPN
Trimmer sensibility set-up

Description :
Dimensions
Miniaturised
Control indicator

Integrated amplifier Set-up

Detection indication by
LED
Optical axis
Lateral beam
40

3,1

Direct / inverse output


23

9,5
Red pulsed visible light

2 m cable or M8 plug
2,5

3
Strong housing
10 13,5
Economical

Applications : Wiring Connections


Control of position or pre-
Diffuse reflection detection
sence of parts on assem-
bly machine.
P output type
Detection of opaque or Brown
10/30 VDC
Brown
10/30 VDC
transparent objects. Black Black

Small spaces positionning White White

sensors. 0V 0V
Blue Blue
in Lo in Do

N output type
Brown Brown
10/30 VDC 10/30 VDC

White White
Black Black
0V 0V
Blue Blue
in Lo in Do
MINIATURE DIFFUSE REFLECTION SENSOR P 989 S

Tecnical Information
Supply voltage 10 / 30 VDC
ripple < 10% within specified limits
consumption < 25 mA
Response time ton or toff 1 mS
switching frequency 500 Hz
Output max. nominal frequency 100 mA
residual voltage at 100 mA <2V
residual voltage at 10 mA <1V
Emission LED red pulsed
modulation frequency 6 KHz
Temperature operating 0 to 50 C
storage - 20 to 80 C
External light immunity incandescent light 5 000 lux
sunlight 10 000 lux
Protections supply inverse polarity protection
output permanent short-circuit or over-load protection
degree IP 65 and IP 67
Directe / inverse function by cable, see Wiring Connections

To Place Order
Product Miniature diffuse reflection sensor
Reference P 989 SN - 2 m cable output (NPN)
P 989 SP - 2m cable ouput (PNP)
P (C0) 989 SN - plug output (NPN)
P (C0) 989 SP - plug output (PNP)

TYPE OF APPLICATIONS

Example 1
Control of opaques objects.

Example 2
Control of metallic pins.
DIFFUSE REFLECTION AXIAL SENSOR PA 946 S

PA 946 S
Adjustable sensing distance
0 to 50 cm
On 100x100 mm white sheet 92%
Supply : 10 / 30 VDC
Output : PNP / NPN
On-delay or off-delay timer standard

Description :
Dimensions
Simple and quick set-up
Cable or M8 plug - 4 points
for self-teach (standard
and sensitive mode)
Optical axis
30

Adjustable timer

11
Alignment indicator
Release clip
4.1
Dirty optics indicator 25.4 20
DIN Rail Mounting
Keyboard lock
LO-DO

SET
13

Remote input for self-


t
t

teach (sensitive mode) 60


Direct or inverse output

Output : PNP / NPN Wiring Connections


Cable or M8 plug
Brown
10 - 30 VDC
Polycarbonate strong N

housing Black Output 100 mA max.


Microprocessor
P
Blue
0V
White Remote input
Applications :
Position or presence
control of parts on assem-
Visualisation and Keyboard
bly or conditioning machi-
ne.
- Sensitivity decrease - Sensitivity increase
- On delay - Off delay - Light on - Dark on
Detection of opaque or - Decrease timer adjustment - Increase timer adjustment

transparent parts. - Automatic threshold set-up


- Special functions key

Control of presence of
LO-DO

SET
+

t
t

parts in a container.
- Detection
- Key depressed
- Keyboard locked - Dirty optics
- Detection limit
- Alignment indicator
- Timer ON
DIFFUSE REFLECTION AXIAL SENSOR PA 946 S

Technical Information
Supply voltage 10 / 30 VDC
ripple < 10% within specified limits
consumption < 40 mA
Response time ton or toff < 500 s
switching frequency < 1 KHz
Output max. nominal intensity 100 mA
residual voltage at 100 mA <2V
residual voltage at 10 mA <1V
Emission LED infra red
modulation frequency 8 KHz
Timer range 0 to 5 s with 11 increments
increment duration first increment : 40 ms, following increments : 500 ms
Temperature operating 0 to 60 C
storage -20 to 80 C
External light immunity incandescent light 10 000 lux
sunlight 20 000 lux
Protections supply inverse polarity protection
output permanent short-circuit or over-load protection
degree of protection IP 65
Remote input on voltage < 1,4 V
off voltage > 3 V

To Place Order
Product Diffuse reflection axial sensor
Reference PA - ( ) - 946 S
( ) output with cable 2m
(C0) output M8 plug without cable

Cable for M8 plug CM 82 - cordon 2m


if necessary, please order
together with the amplifier CM 85 - cordon 5m

TYPES OF APPLICATIONS
Example 1
Boxes alignment control on a packaging line.

Example 2
Cap presence control on a bottle.
DIFFUSE REFLECTION AXIAL SENSOR PA 966 S

PA 966 S
Adjustable sensing distance
maximum : 50 cm
On 100x100 mm white sheet 92%
Supply : 10 / 30 VDC
Output : PNP / NPN
Friendly adjustment by key + / -
Bargraph

Description :
Dimensions
Simple adjustment
Cable or M8 socket - 4 points
Sensitivity bargraph
Maximum and minimum
Optical axis
30

sensitivity indication

11
Keyboard lock
Release clip
Direct or inverse output 4.1
DIN Rail Mounting
25.4 20
Output : PNP / NPN

Cable or M8 socket
13

Polycarbonate strong 60
housing

Wiring Diagram

Brown
Applications : 10 - 30 VDC
N

Position or presence Black Output 100 mA max.


Microprocessor
control of parts on assem- P
Blue
0V
bly or conditioning machi-
White
ne. Connected to + : light-on mode
Connected to - : dark-on mode

Detection of opaque or
transparent parts.
Display and Keyboard
Control of presence of
parts in a container.
- Sensitivity decrease - Sensitivity increase

- Keyboard lock
+

In case of a short-circuit, - Detection


both red and green
LEDs flash
- Sensitivity display
DIFFUSE REFLECTION AXIAL SENSOR PA 966 S

Technical Information
Supply voltage 10 / 30 VDC
ripple < 10% within specified limits
consumption < 40 mA
Response time ton or toff < 500 s
switching frequency < 1 KHz
Output max. nominal intensity 100 mA
residual voltage at 100 mA <2V
residual voltage at 10 mA <1V
Emission LED infra-red
modulation frequency 8 KHz
Temperature operating 0 to 60 C
storage -20 to 80 C
External light immunity incandescent light 10 000 lux
sunlight 20 000 lux
Protections supply inverse polarity protection
output permanent short-circuit or over-load protection
degree of protection IP 65
Light-on / dark-on function see wiring diagram

To Place Order
Product Diffuse reflection axial sensor
Reference PA - ( ) - 966 S
( ) output with cable 2m
(C0) output M8 socket without cable

Cable with M8 plug CM 82 - cable 2m


if required, please order CM 82 C - cable 2m with right angle connector
together with the sensor CM 85 - cable 5m

TYPES OF APPLICATIONS

Example 1
Boxes alignment on a packaging line.

Example 2
Cap presence on a bottle.
PAV 2000 is innovative and easy to use. It combines the simplicity
of a proximity detector with built-in computerized image processing.
The PAV 2000 can be used in all situations of simple quality control and compliance. It is an effective
solution for all industries aiming to simplify the problem of vision.

Operating Principle A state of the art product


With "standard" and "zero fault" being the scope of
requirements and target point, industry must ensure
reliable and effective quality control.
= 10

= 170

Simple and effective technology


The PAV 2000 is a simple proximity detector whose
= 325 performance is based on a camera and built-in image
processing system. It analyzes and compares
The reference image is divi- When the image is memo- the brightness of an image to that of a calibration
ded into 256 zones defined rized as reference, these image in 256 zones at rate of more than
by a 16 row x 16 column 256 coefficients are 1000 images/minute.
grid of the image. stored. The PAV 2000 responds in real time and according to a
For each box, the PAV 2000 In the analysis process, tolerance scale that can be set. Using self-learning and
calculates a coefficient that the 256 coefficients of with no focal length adjustment required, it precisely
depends on the brightness the new image are recalcu- detects the level of non-compliance of a product in com-
of this part of the image. parison to the reference product.
lated and compared to the
reference image that was
learned previously.
The level of non-compliance
A quality solution for industry
of the image is the sum of
Fulfilling the requirements of reliable detection in quality
the defective boxes.
control, the PAV 2000 is fully applicable in all sectors of
industries whose target is to simplify the problem of
optical control: packaging, pharmaceuticals, cosmetics,
Viewing the reference
automobiles, metallurgy, agribusiness and many more.
image
When a view is demanded
by the user or automatically,
the PAV 2000 imager pro-
gressively constructs an
image.
The resulting image is
continuous, even in
movement: lines are
not interlaced and there
is no ripple effect.
VISION-ASSISTED PROXIMITY DETECTOR PAV 2000

PAV 2000
Observation distance: 20 to 400 mm
depending on the model
Size of image analyzed:
20 x 12 mm to 300 x 250 mm
Power supply: 10 to 30 VDC
Output signal: NPN/PNP
Processing speed: 1000 images/minute

Description
Dimensions and Interface
Built-in camera and
processing system
LASER centering pointer
Built-in flash
Simple and rapid adjust-
ment by learning
External learning possible
External imaging intervals
Synchronous or
Bracket
asynchronous mode
M8 connectors
Monitor and RS 232
connections available
as options
Resistant polycarbonate
housing
Adjustment and viewing
Applications : Indicators

Packaging:
- control of presence
and positioning
- control of presence
of printing
Agribusiness:
- verification of appea-
rance of tins of canned Keypad
foods (swelling)
Automobiles:
- control of presence or Connection
absence of continuous
K1 K2
band (of glue, e.g.) White 2 4 Black White 2 4 Black RS 232
Synchro Output Teach Flash out
Female DB9

Video
Brown 1 3 Blue Brown 1 3 Blue
10 to 30 VDC 0V N.C. N.C. Male HD 15
VISION-ASSISTED PROXIMITY DETECTOR PAV 2000

Technical Characteristics
Power supply operating voltage 10/30 VDC
ripple < 10% within the authorized voltage range
consumption 3 VA
Response time ton or toff 60 ms
switching frequency 1000/mn
Outputs: flash and signal max. rated current 100 mA
residual V at 100 mA <2V
residual V at 10 mA <1V
Time interval 0 to 8 seconds
Optical adjustments none
Flash characteristics white LEDs
working distance 20 to 100 mm
Temperature working 10 to 40
storage -20 to 80
Resistance to stray light 200 lux (casing recommended)
Protection tightness IP 65

Observation Distance PAV 2050 PAV 2100 PAV 2300


Model 50 mm 100 mm 300 mm*
Observation distance (mm) 20 50 100 50 100 150 150 200 300 400
Surface observed dX mm 20 53 86 53 86 120 120 156 224 298
dY mm 12 41 69 41 69 97 97 127 185 244
* for these distances, the built-in flash is not effective

To order PAV 2050 PAV 2100 PAV 2300


Product Vision-Assisted Proximity Detector
Product No.
two CM 82 cords supplied PAV 2050 PAV 2100 PAV 2300

With VGA + RS 232 option PAV 2050 RV PAV 2100 RV PAV 2300 RV

APPLICATION EXAMPLES
Example 1
Verification of label position
on canned food tin.

Example 2
Recognition of form as shadow cast on a screen.
DIFFUSE REFLECTION LATERAL SENSOR PL 946 S

PL 946 S
Adjustable sensing distance
0 to 45 cm
On 100x100 mm white sheet 92%
Supply : 10 to 30 VDC
Output : PNP / NPN
On-delay or off-delay timer standard

Description :
Dimensions
Thickness reduced to
Cable or M8 plug - 4 points
13 mm

Simple and quick set-up


30

for self-teach (standard


and sensitive mode)
Release clip
Adjustable timer
4.1
DIN Rail Mounting
15 25.4 9
Alignment indicator

Dirty optics indicator


LO-DO

SET
13

t
t

Keyboard lock 78 Optical axis

Remote input for self-


teach (sensitive mode)
Wiring Connections
Direct or inverse output
Brown
Output : PNP / NPN 10 - 30 VDC
N
Black Output 100 mA max.
Cable or M8 plug Microprocessor
P

Polycarbonate strong Blue


0V
Remote input
housing White

Applications : Visualisation and Keyboard


Position or presence
control of parts on condi- - Sensitivity decrease - Sensitivity increase
- On delay - Off delay - Light on - Dark on
tioning machine. - Decrease timer adjustment - Increase timer adjustment
- Automatic threshold set-up
- Special functions key
Detection of opaque or
translucent parts.
LO-DO

SET
+

t
t

Detection of presence of
parts in a container. - Detection
- Key depressed
- Keyboard locked - Dirty optics
- Detection limit
- Alignment indicator
- Timer ON
DIFFUSE REFLECTION LATERAL SENSOR PL 946 S

Technical Information
Supply voltage 10 / 30 VDC
ripple < 10% within specified limits
consumption < 40 mA
Response time ton or toff < 500 s
switching frequency < 1 KHz
Output max. nominal intensity 100 mA
residual voltage at 100 mA <2V
residual voltage at 10 mA <1V
Emission LED infra red
modulation frequency 8 KHz
Timer range 0 to 5 s with 11 increments
increment duration first increment : 40 ms, following increments : 500 ms
Temperature operating 0 to 60 C
storage -20 to 80 C
External light immunity incandescent light 10 000 lux
sunlight 20 000 lux
Protections supply inverse polarity protection
output permanent short-circuit or over-load protection
degree of protection IP 65
Remote input on voltage < 1,4 V
off voltage > 3 V

To Place Order
Product Diffuse reflection lateral sensor
Reference PL - ( ) - 946 S
( ) output with cable 2m
(C0) output M8 plug without cable

Cable for M8 plug CM 82 - cordon 2m


if necessary, please order
together with the amplifier CM 85 - cordon 5m

TYPES OF APPLICATIONS

Example 1
Detection of presence of boxes on a packaging line.

Example 2
Detection of lids presence.
DIFFUSE REFLECTION LATERAL SENSOR PL 966 S

PL 966 S
Adjustable sensing distance
maximum : 45 cm
On 100x100 mm white sheet 92%
Supply : 10 / 30 VDC
Output : PNP / NPN
Friendly adjustment by key + / -
Bargraph

Description :
Dimensions
Thickness reduced to
Cable or M8 socket - 4 points
13 mm
Simple adjustment
30

Sensitivity bargraph
Maximum and minimum Release clip
sensitivity indication
4.1
DIN Rail Mounting
15 25.4 9
Keyboard lock
Direct or inverse output
13

Output : PNP / NPN


78 Optical axis
Cable or M8 socket
Polycarbonate strong
housing
Wiring Diagram

Brown
10 - 30 VDC
N
Black Output 100 mA max.
Microprocessor
Applications : Blue
P

0V
Position or presence White
Connected to + : light-on mode
control of parts on condi- Connected to - : dark-on mode

tioning machine.

Detection of opaque or Display and Keyboard


transparent parts.

Detection of presence of - Sensitivity decrease - Sensitivity increase

parts in a container.
- Keyboard lock
+

In case of a short-circuit, - Detection


both red and green
LEDs flash
- Sensitivity display
DIFFUSE REFLECTION LATERAL SENSOR PL 966 S

Technical Information
Supply voltage 10 / 30 VDC
ripple < 10% within specified limits
consumption < 40 mA
Response time ton or toff < 500 s
switching frequency < 1 KHz
Output max. nominal intensity 100 mA
residual voltage at 100 mA <2V
residual voltage at 10 mA <1V
Emission LED infra-red
modulation frequency 8 KHz
Temperature operating 0 to 60 C
storage -20 to 80 C
External light immunity incandescent light 10 000 lux
sunlight 20 000 lux
Protections supply inverse polarity protection
output permanent short-circuit or over-load protection
degree of protection IP 65
Light-on / dark-on function see wiring diagram

To Place Order
Product Diffuse reflection lateral sensor
Reference PL - ( ) - 966 S
( ) output with cable 2m
(C0) output M8 socket without cable

Cable with M8 plug CM 82 - cable 2m


if required, please order CM 82 C - cable 2m with right angle connector
together with the sensor CM 85 - cable 5m

TYPES OF APPLICATIONS

Example 1
Detection of boxes on a packaging line.

Example 2
Detection of lids presence.
LASER DIFFUSE DETECTION SENSOR
PS1 L 965 S
WITH SIMPLE TRIANGULATION

PS1 L 965 S
Sensing distance adjustable from :
50 to 300 mm
Supply : 10 / 30 VDC
Outputs : PNP / NPN
Timer standard
High accuracy

Description :
Dimensions
Emission by visible red 60 18
light 23

Spot size by adjustable


focus Timer

Output

Distance adjustment by

60
54

Laser
precision screw optical axis
LO/DO

Direct and inverse function

9
Programmable timer to 4.1 6
40 ms max.

3a class laser Wiring Connections and Outputs


DIRECT FUNCTION WITHOUT TIMER DIRECT FUNCTION WITH TIMER
On / Off function
Brown : + Brown and White : +
Black : output
Black : output
Blue and White : - Blue : -
Applications :
Control of small parts on a INVERSE FUNCTION WITHOUT TIMER INVERSE FUNCTION WITH TIMER
production machine.
Blue : + Blue and White : +
Black : output
Detection of components Black : output
Brown and White : - Brown : -
on a printed circuit.

Presence control of crack


in a part.
Visualition and Adjustments
Level control.
Timer On Timer

Elimination of back- Detected object Output

Detection spot set-up


ground.

On = direct function
Off = inverse function } LO/DO
LASER DIFFUSE DETECTION SENSOR
PS1 L 965 S
WITH SIMPLE TRIANGULATION

Technical Information
Supply voltage 10 / 30 VDC
ripple < 10% within specified limits
consumption 35 mA
Response time ton or toff < 150 s
switching frequency 5 KHz
Minimum object size < 0,5 mm
Outputs max. nominal intensity 100 mA
residual voltage at 100 mA <2V
residual voltage at 10 mA <1V
Emission pulsed laser LED T pulse = 6 s, T period < 50 s
wavelength = 675 nm
Timer 40 ms presence or absence of the object switches the output
Temperature operating 0 to 50 C
storage -20 to 80 C
External light immunity incandescent light > 50 cm with a 100 W / 230 Vac bulb
sunlight > 50 cm with a 55 W / 12 Vdc iodine bulb
Protections output permanent short-circuit or over-load protection
degree of protection IP 65
Programming by wiring
Distance set-up precision screw 30 rotations

Laser Radiation : do not look at the beam with naked eye, nor with an optical instrument.
3a class laser appliance

To Place Order
Product Laser diffuse detection sensor with simple triangulation
Reference PS1 L - ( ) - 965 S
( ) output by cable 2m
(C0) output M8 plug without cable

Cable for M8 plug CM 82 - cable 2m


if necessary, please order
together with the sensor CM 85 - cable 5m

TYPES OF APPLICATIONS
Example 1
Control of crack presence in a part.

Example 2
Break control of a drill on a tool-machine.
DIFFUSE DETECTION SENSOR WITH DOUBLE TRIANGULATION PS2 945 S

PS2 945 S
Sensing distance adjustable from :
50 to 600 mm
Supply : 10 / 30 VDC
Outputs : PNP / NPN
Timer standard
High accuracy

Description :
Four operating modes :
Dimensions
- two independent triangula- 60 18
tion sensors (A, B) 23

detected zones
Timer

- reflections immunity A and B

(A and B) mirror Optical axis

60
54

A
B

A xor B

detected zone LO/DO

- distance control

9
(A xor B) 4.1 6

detected zone

- contrasted objects
Wiring Connections and Outputs
(A or B) DIRECT OUTPUT INVERSE OUTPUT
TWO INDEPENDENT Brown : +10/30 V Brown : 0 V
TRIANGULATION SENSORS Blue : 0 V Blue : +10/30 V
Black : ZONE A output Black : ZONE A output
(A, B) White : ZONE B output White : ZONE B output
detected zone TIMER OFF TIMER ON
DIRECT INVERSE DIRECT INVERSE
Timer REFLECTIONS IMMUNITY
Brown : +10/30 V
Blue : 0 V
0V
+10/30 V
Brown : +10/30 V
Blue : 0 V
0V
+10/30 V
Direct or inverse output (A and B) Black : output
White : Blue
Black : Blue
White : output
Output : PNP / NPN TIMER OFF TIMER ON
Cable or M8 plug DIRECT INVERSE DIRECT INVERSE
Brown : +10/30 V 0V Brown : +10/30 V 0V
DISTANCE CONTROL Blue : 0 V +10/30 V Blue : 0 V +10/30 V
(A xor B) Black : output Black : Brown
White : Brown White : output
Applications : DIRECT OUTPUT INVERSE OUTPUT
Filling control (A xor B). CONTRASTED OBJECTS
Brown : +10/30 V
Blue : 0 V
Brown : 0 V
Blue : +10/30 V
(A or B) Black : output Black : output
Detection on a conveyor White : Black White : Black
with reflective background
(A and B).
Visualisation and Adjustments
DISTANCE GAP (mm)
(typical) Both indicators ON when the logical
100 Timer mode indicator Timer function object in zone A or zone B is 1
Indicator ON when the logical function A and B
object in zone A and zone B is 1 Zone A detection distance adjustment
Indicator ON when the object is in zone A A
10
Black 6% Grey 18%* Indicator ON when the object is in zone B B

Indicator ON when the function exclusive or Zone B detection distance adjustment


between zone A and zone B is 1 A xor B

LED ON when using direct mode LO/DO


1
Output (cable or M8 plug)
50 100 200 300 400 500 600
Distance adjusted on white 92%* (mm)
*KODAK 1527795
DIFFUSE DETECTION SENSOR WITH DOUBLE TRIANGULATION PS2 945 S

Technical Information
Supply voltage 10 / 30 VDC
ripple < 10% within specified limits
consumption < 1,5 watts
Response time ton or toff < 1,8 ms
switching frequency 370 Hz
Outputs max. nominal intensity 100 mA
residual voltage at 100 mA <2V
residual voltage at 10 mA <1V
Emission LED infra-red, beam 15 mm
Timer A and B / A xor B modes minimum signal duration 40 ms
Temperature operating 0 to 50 C
storage -20 to 80 C
External light immunity incandescent light > 30 cm with a 100 W / 220 Vac bulb
sunlight > 50 cm with a 75 W / 12 Vdc iodine bulb
Protections output permanent short-circuit or over-load protection
degree of protection IP 65
Programming by wiring
Distance set-up precision screw 30 rotations

To Place Order
Product Diffuse detection sensor with double triangulation
Reference PS2 - ( ) - 945 S
( ) output by cable 2m
(C0) output M8 plug without cable

Cable for M8 plug CM 82 - cable 2m


if necessary, please order
together with the sensor CM 85 - cable 5m

TYPES OF APPLICATIONS
Example 1
Level detection in a bowl feeder (empty or full) using
mode two independent triangulation sensors (A, B).

Example 2
Black and white pads detection on a conveyor using
mode contrasted objects (A or B).
MINIATURE SENSOR PS 989 S
WITH BACK-GROUND SUPPRESSION

PS 989 S
Adjustable sensing distance : 1,5 to 8 cm
Supply : 10 to 30 VDC
Output : PNP or NPN
Set-up by precision screw

Description :
Dimensions
Miniaturised

Integrated amplifier Control indicator


20 13
Set-up
Detection indication by
LED
Indication of short-circuit
Optical axis
on the output by blinking
32

LED

16
Lateral beam
5,5

Back-ground suppression
2,8

Direct / inverse output 1,6


14,5
Red pulsed visible light

2 m cable or M8 plug

Wiring Connections
Applications :
Diffuse reflection detection
Control of position or
presence of parts with P output type
back-ground suppression. Brown Brown
10/30 VDC 10/30 VDC
Detection of object hight Black Black
on a conveyor. White White

Detection of solid granu- 0V 0V


Blue Blue
lates level.
in Lo in Do

N output type
Brown Brown
10/30 VDC 10/30 VDC

White White

Black Black
0V 0V
Blue Blue
in Lo in Do
MINIATURE SENSOR PS 989 S
WITH BACK-GROUND SUPPRESSION

Technical Information
Supply voltage 10 / 30 VDC
ripple < 10% within specified limits
consumption < 25 mA
Response time ton or toff 1 mS
switching frequency 500 Hz
Output max. nominal frequency 100 mA
residual voltage at 100 mA <2V
residual voltage at 10 mA <1V
Emission LED red pulsed
modulation frequency 6 KHz
Temperature operating 0 to 50 C
storage - 20 to 80 C
External light immunity insensitive
Protections supply inverse polarity protection
output permanent short-circuit or over-load protection
degree IP 65 and IP 67
Directe / inverse function by cable, see Wiring Connections
Difference black/white 2 cm at maximum sensing distance

Pour Commander
Product Miniature sensor with back-ground suppression
Reference PS 989 SN - 2 m cable output (NPN)
PS 989 SP - 2m cable ouput (PNP)
PS (C0) 989 SN - plug output (NPN)
PS (C0) 989 SP - plug output (PNP)

TYPE OF APPLICATIONS

Example 1
Detection of biscuits on a conveyor.

Example 2
Detection of box covers on a conveyor.
FORK SENSOR F 95 S

F 95 S
Spread : 2 to 120 mm
Supply : 10 to 30 VDC
Output : PNP / NPN
High sensitivity
High speed
Built-in amplifier

Description :
Dimensions and Visualisation
Simple and accurate
5 15 B
adjustment by potentio-
4.2
metre (25 rotations)

A 12.25
D

Output indicator
C

Optical
Direct / inverse output axis

22.75*
Output : PNP / NPN (*25.75 for F 95 3002 S)

M8 plug 6

Painted aluminium strong


20 + B
housing

12

Applications :
Sensitivity adjustment Visualisation

Lateral shift control of a


belt. Fork A (mm) B (mm) C (mm) D (mm)
F 95 3002 S (Continuous emission) 2 40 14 6.25
Detection on a labelling
F 95 4002 S (Modulated emission) 2 40 14 6.25
machine.
F 95 4015 S (Modulated emission) 15 40 27 6.25
Handling : control of tools F 95 4030 S (Modulated emission) 30 40 42 6.25
travel. F 95 4050 S (Modulated emission) 50 57 40 17.25
F 95 4080 S (Modulated emission) 80 57 70 17.25
Detection of sheets over-
F 95 4120 S (Modulated emission) 120 57 110 17.25
lapping.

Detection of marks on a
translucent film. Wiring Connections
DIRECT INVERSE
Lift cage position control.
Brown Blue
10 / 30 VDC 10 / 30 VDC
N N
Black Black

P P
Blue Brown
0 VDC 0 VDC
White White
Not used Not used
FORK SENSOR F 95 S

Technical information Modulated emission Continuous emission


Supply voltage 10 / 30 VDC
ripple < 10% within specified limits
consumption 30 mA 40 mA
Response time ton or toff 1 ms 30 s
switching frequency 500 Hz 10 KHz
Output max. nominal intensity 100 mA
residual voltage at 100 mA <2V
residual voltage at 10 mA <1V
Emission LED infra-red
modulation frequency 7.7 KHz continuous
Temperature operating -20 to 60 C
storage -20 to 80 C
External light immunity incandescent light 3 000 lux 3 000 lux
sunlight 10 000 lux 3 000 lux
Protections supply inverse polarity protection
output permanent short-circuit or over-load protection
degree of protection IP 65

To Place Order
Product Fork sensor
Reference F 95 - _ _ _ _ - ( ) - S - 10 / 30 VDC
}

Type Cf. Dimensions table


(C0) output M8 plug without cable
(C2) output M8 plug with cable 2m
(C5) output M8 plug with cable 5m

TYPES OF APPLICATIONS

Example 1
Detection of sheets position on a conveyor.

EL
DIN
EL
DIN
EL
L DIN
D INE
EL
DIN

Example 2
Detection of labels on a strip.
TEACH-IN FORK SENSOR FA 98 S

FA 98 S
Spread : 3 mm
Supply : 10 to 30 VDC
Output : PNP / NPN
Teach-in automatic set-up
High speed of detection
Integrated amplifier

Description :
Dimensions
Simple and quick teach-in
5 15 60
set-up
1 Optical axis
Set-up on the fork or
14 6

12
by external input

3
8

37,5
22,5
Set-up lock
4.2
Output indicator
6
Direct/inverse output
80
Output : PNP / NPN

12
M8 plug

Anodised aluminium Teach-in Visualisation LED

strong housing

Wiring Connections
Applications : Object detected
White White
Position control on a 10 / 30 VDC 10 / 30 VDC
moving belt. Brown Blue

Black Black
Detection of tags on a 0 VDC 0 VDC
Blue Brown
conveyor.
In Lo In Do
If the external teach-in (White) is not used, link it to 0V.
Detection of double
sheet.
Display and Keyboard
Mark detection on a trans-
Teach-in made on the tag support :
lucid film. - standard mode for any usual tag
- thin mode for any translucid tag

1 hit = standard teach-in Red LED : keyboard lock


2 hits = thin teach-in Green LED : ON indicator
1 long hit = keyboard lock Red LED blinking 2s : standard teach-in
Green LED blinking 2s : thin teach-in
Red and green LED blink : short-circuit or too
opaque object
TEACH-IN FORK SENSOR FA 98 S

Technical Information
Supply voltage 10 / 30 VDC
ripple < 10% within specified limits
consumption 40 mA
Response time ton or toff 50 s
switching frequency 10 KHz
Output max. nominal intensity 100 mA
residual voltage at 100 mA <2V
residual voltage at 10 mA <1V
Emission LED continued infra-red
Temperature operating -20 60 C
External light immunity incandescent light 3 000 lux
sunlight 3 000 lux
Protections supply inverse polarity protection
output permanent short-circuit or over-load protection
degree of protection IP 65

To Place Order
Product Teach-in fork sensor
Reference FA (C0) 98 3003 S

Cable with M8 plug CM 82 - cable 2 m


if required, please order CM 85 - cable 5 m
together with the sensor
CM 82C - cable 2 m coud

TYPES OF APPLICATIONS

Example 1
Detection of envelops superposition.

EL
L DIN
E
DIN
EL
L DIN
E
DIN
EL
DIN

Example 2
Detection of tags on a belt.
FRAME SENSOR CAD

CAD 120 / CAD 180 / CAD 250

Spread : 120 to 250 mm


Supply : 24 VDC
Outputs : PNP / NPN
Adjustable timer
Built-in amplifier

Description :
Dimensions and Visualisation
Simple and quick adjust-
85 50
ment by potentiometre 4 x 5 25
Sensitivity
Adjustable timer
Timer
Dirty optic indicator B
Visualisation :
Output indicator

222.5
signal (green)
230

200

dirty optic indicator (red)


Faulty supply indicator

22
Mechanical protection of
the optics
60 25
Direct or inverse output A

Static output M12 plug Mechanical protection


of the optics

M12 plug In case of a faulty supply, the red LED flashes.


In case of a short-circuit on an output, the red and green LEDs flash.

Painted aluminium strong


housing TYPE A (mm) B (mm) : spread
CAD 250 335 250
CAD 180 265 180
Applications : CAD 120 205 120

Dynamic detection of
parts of various material
(plastic or metal), various
Wiring Connections
shape and colour. DIRECT INVERSE

Count of parts. Brown Blue


24 VDC 24 VDC
N N
Tools protection by ejec- Black signal Black signal
tion control of parts from P P

a press.
N N
White dirty optic White dirty optic

P P
Blue Brown
0 0
FRAME SENSOR CAD

Technical Information
Supply voltage 18 to 30 VDC
ripple < 10% within specified limits
consumption 400 mA
Response time ton or toff 1 ms
switching frequency 500 Hz
Outputs max. nominal intensity 100 mA
residual voltage at 100 mA <2V
residual voltage at 10 mA <1V
Emission LED infra-red
Timer retriggerable OFF-delay max. 5 s
Temperature operating 0 to 60 C
storage -20 to 80 C
External light immunity incandescent light 400 lux
sunlight 4 000 lux
Protections output permanent short-circuit or over-load protection
degree of protection IP 65
Minimum size of detection 4 mm
Object speed minimum 10 cm/s 4 mm
maximum 15 m/s 4 mm

To Place Order
Product Frame sensor
Reference CAD - ( ) - S - 24 VDC
Type
spread 120 x 200 mm (120)
spread 180 x 200 mm (180)
spread 250 x 200 mm (250)

TYPES OF APPLICATIONS

Example 1
Detection of parts at the output of a bowl feeder.

Example 2
Ejection control at the output of a press.
FRAME SENSOR CAD

CAD 30 / CAD 60

Spread : 30 x 30 or 60 x 60 mm
Supply : 24 VDC
Outputs : PNP / NPN
Adjustable timer
Built-in amplifier

Description :
Dimension and Visualisation
Simple and quick adjust- CAD 30
22 4.2

3.5
ment by potentiometre M8 plug
Visualisation :

Adjustable timer signal (green)


dirty optic (red)

11.6
50

Timer
Dirty optic indicator 30
Sensitivity

Output indicator 16 15
108
Faulty supply indicator CAD 60

Direct or inverse output M8 plug 22 4.2


3.5

Static output 11.6 Visualisation:


signal (green)
dirty optic (red)
M8 plug
86

Painted aluminium strong


housing 60 Timer
Sensitivity

16 15
131
Applications :
In case of faulty supply, the red LED flashes.
In case of short-circuit on an output, the red and green LEDs flash.
Dynamic detection of
parts of various material
(plastic or metal), various Wiring Connections
shape and colour.
DIRECT INVERSE

Count of parts. Brown


24 VDC
Blue
24 VDC
N N

Tools protection by ejec- Black signal Black signal

tion control of parts from P P

press.
N N
White dirty optic White dirty optic

P P
Blue Brown
0 0
FRAME SENSOR CAD

Technical Information
Supply voltage 18 to 30 VDC
ripple < 10% within specified limits
consumption 120 mA
Response time ton or toff 1 ms
switching frequency 500 Hz
Outputs max. nominal intensity 100 mA
residual voltage at 100 mA <2V
residual voltage at 10 mA <1V
Emission LED infra-red
Timer retriggerable OFF-delay max. 5 s
Temperature operating 0 to 60 C
storage -20 to 80 C
External light immunity incandescent light 400 lux
sunlight 4 000 lux
Protections output permanent short-circuit or over-load protection
degree of protection IP 65
Minimum size of detection 2 mm
Object speed minimum 10 cm/s 2 mm
maximum 15 m/s 2 mm

To Place Order
Product Frame sensor
Reference CAD - ( ) - S - 24 VDC
Type
spread 30 x 30 mm (30)
spread 60 x 60 mm (60)

TYPES OF APPLICATIONS

Example 1
Detection of parts at the output of a bowl feeder.

Example 2
Counting and packaging application.
FRAME SENSOR FRS

FRS 120 / FRS 180 / FRS 250

Spread : 120 to 250 mm


Supply : 24 VDC
Outputs : PNP / NPN
Minimum object size detected : 10 mm

Description :
Dimensions and Visualisation
Cheap product designed to
85 50
detect any part in a spread 4 x 5 25
from 120 x 200 mm to Sensitivity
250 x 200 mm
Timer
B
Minimum object size
Visualisation :
detected : 10 mm

222.5
signal (green)
230

200

dirty optic indicator (red)


Output :
PNP / NPN / LO / DO

22
Painted aluminium strong
housing 60 25
A

M12 plug Mechanical protection


of the optics
Applications : In case of a faulty supply, the red LED flashes.
In case of a short-circuit on an output, the red and green LEDs flash.
Count of parts.

Ejection safety control TYPE A (mm) B (mm) : spread


from a plastic press. FRS 250 335 250

Parts detection through a FRS 180 265 180


transluscent pipe. FRS 120 205 120

Detection of parts by
gravity. Wiring Connections
DIRECT INVERSE

Brown Blue
24 VDC 24 VDC
N N
Black signal Black signal
P P

N N
White dirty optic White dirty optic

P P
Blue Brown
0 0
FRAME SENSOR FRS

Technical Information
Supply voltage 18 to 30 VDC
ripple < 10% within specified limits
consumption 400 mA
Response time ton or toff 1 ms
switching frequency 500 Hz
Outputs max. nominal intensity 100 mA
residual voltage at 100 mA <2V
residual voltage at 10 mA <1V
Emission LED infra-red
Timer retriggerable OFF-delay max. 5 s
Temperature operating 0 to 60 C
storage -20 to 80 C
External light immunity incandescent light 400 lux
sunlight 4 000 lux
Protections output permanent short-circuit or over-load protection
degree of protection IP 65
Minimum size of detection 10 mm
Object speed minimum 10 cm/s 10 mm
maximum 15 m/s 10 mm

To Place Order
Product Frame sensor
Reference FRS - ( ) - S - 24 VDC
Type
spread 120 x 200 mm (120)
spread 180 x 200 mm (180)
spread 250 x 200 mm (250)

TYPES OF APPLICATIONS

Example 1
Ejection control at the output of a press.

Example 2
Break detection of a string or a rope.
MARKS AND CONTRASTS SENSOR L 618

L 618
Sensing distance
With focal FL 12 : 12 mm
With focal FL 25 : 25 mm
With focal FL 50 : 50 mm
Supply : 10 to 30 VDC
Output : PNP

Description : Dimensions
Function indicator LED 1 Trimmer
80 LED 2
Direct / inverse output Focal

M18x1
21.4

PNP output

10
23
Cable at 90
21
Polyamid housing 4 58 12 6
24

Applications :
Wiring Connections
Electrical connection - Output cable 90, 4 wires, length 2 m
Detection of printed marks Brown Brown
in packaging and White
+ White
+
PNP PNP
conditionning. Black Black
NC NO
Detection of small parts. Blue
- Blue
-
Detection of contrasts.
NC = Normaly Closed NO = Normaly Opened

Technical Information
Supply voltage 10 / 30 VDC
ripple < 10% within specified limits
consumption 20 mA
Response time ton or toff 0.5 ms
switching frequency 1 KHz
Output nominal intensity 100 mA
residual voltage at 100 mA 1.2 V max.
Emission LED red modulated
modulation frequency 8 KHz
Temperature operating -25 to 70 C
External light immunity incandescent light 3 000 lux
sunlight 10 000 lux
Protections supply inverse polarity
output permanent short-circuit
degree of protection IP 65

To Place Order
Product Marks and contrasts Type of focal FL (12) - sensing dist.12 mm
sensor FL (25) - sensing dist.25 mm
Reference L 618 (C) - FL ( ) FL (50) - sensing dist.50 mm
MULTISENSORS LOGICAL MODULE MC 97

MC 97
1 to 6 sensors connections
Supply : 12 to 30 VDC
Output : PNP or NPN
Use in mode AND or OR
Dimensions : 79 x 25 x 100 mm

Description :
Dimensions
Compatible connections for :
Mounting
- any PNP sensor
- any DINEL sensor
- any dry contact

25.8
Usable output in P or in N

79.2
Programmable logical
AND or OR, LO/DO
function by wiring
26
Visualisation of inputs and
the output by LEDs 100.5
25
105.5
Socket terminal
108
DIN rail mounting

Plastic housing
Wiring Connections
Function AND : the clamp n 7 and unused inputs are connected to +
Function OR : the clamp n 7 and unused inputs are connected to 0 V
Function LO : the clamp n 8 is connected to +
Applications : Function DO : the clamp n 8 is connected to 0 V

Remote control. + 12/30 VDC


1
Wiring saving money. +
2 +
9
PLC connection simplifi- 3 10
cation. 4
P
5
6 0V
-
AND +
7 OR -
+ +
LO
8 DO -

9 OUT + N

10 OUT - 9
10
0V
0V
-
MULTISENSORS LOGICAL MODULE MC 97

Technical Information
Supply voltage 12 / 30 VDC
ripple < 10% within specified limits
consumption 100 mA
Response time input to output < 50 s
switching frequency 330 Hz
Entrance low level 0 to 3 V or not connected
high level 6 to 30 V
Output maximum voltage 30 V
Out characteristics maximum amperage 20 mA
residual voltage at 20 mA 2,4 V
residual voltage at 10 mA 2V
Temperature operating 0 50 C
stockage -20 80 C
Protections supply inverse polarity protection
entrance negative voltage
output permanent short-circuit or over-load protection

To Place Order
Product multisensors logical module
Reference MC 97

WIRING ANG PROGRAMMING FUNCTIONS

LO/DO And/Or Input clamps Output


(see Wiring Connect.)
clamp 8 clamp 7 1 2 3 4 5 6

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 ON

1 1 Any other combination OFF

0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 OFF
0 1 Any other combination ON

1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 OFF

1 0 Any other combination ON

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 ON

0 0 Any other combination OFF


Retro Ref. Photoelectric Sensors
PHOTOELECTRIC SENSORS IN STANDARD PLASTIC HOUSING 12 30 V DC NPN OR PNP OUTPUT
Miniature 18 mm tubular 18 Series
Operation LED aids installation
Models w/o pots for simple installation
Quick connect or integral cable
9-turn pot models

Identification code Wiring diagrams

18 09 P K R M BROWN
SERIES 18
BLACK
NPN NO output
09 NPN
NPN NC output BLUE
10
PNP NO output
12
PNP NC output
13 BROWN

POLARIZED OPTIC
BLACK

CONNECTOR OUTPUT M12


PNP
BLUE
SENSITIVITY ADJUSTMENT

METAL HOUSING
K and R are not available in the same model

AVAILABLE POLARIZED STANDARAD Connection with connector M12 (K)


SWITCHING DISTANCE 1 m (1) 3 m (1)
HYSTERESIS 10% View of quadripole male connector.
EMISSION Red (660 m) Infrared (875 m) 1

NOMINAL VOLTAGE 12 30VDC (-15 /+10%)


RESIDUAL RIPPLE 10% CONTACTS CONFIGURATION
2 4
MAX. OUTPUT CURRENT 200 mA Contacts numbers
Available
1 2 3 4
ABSORPTION AT 30 VDC 30 mA (NO or NC) + - NO/NC
VOLTAGE DROP (Sensor ON) 1.5V (I = 200 mA) 3 Emitter + -

OPERATION LED Yellow


Note: the K plug is compatible with the following connectors:
SWITCHING FREQUENCY 200 Hz VAUDEHA, BINDER, HIRSCHMANN, LUMBERG, AMPHENOL-TUCHEL.
RESPONSE TIME 5 mS
START UP DELAY 100 mS
SHORT CIRCUIT PROTECTION Present (self-resetting) Accessories
ELECTRIC PROTECTIONS Againts polarity reversal - inductive loads
TEMPERATURE LIMITS -10 +60 C DEV90 Mirror 90

LIGHT IMMUNITY 5000 Lux (2)


PROTECTION DEGREE IP 67 (IP 65 for models with sensitivity adjustment)
CABLE LENGTH 2m 35 Object
to be
CABLE SECTION 3 x 0.25 mm2 detected
HOUSING MATERIAL Housing: nylon loaded with fiberglass - Lenses: methacrylate
WEIGHT - cable output - (connector output) - 110 g - (55 g)
(1)
Determined with CT04S reflector. 23
Determined with halogen tungsten lamp 3000 K.
(2)

Note: for a proper use see norms at pages 6, 7 and 8.

Dimensions (mm) Characteristic curves


RETRO REFLECTIVE POLARIZED RETRO REFLECTIVE
Configuration with cable Configuration with cable - Back view Distance X (cm) Distance X (cm)

55 15
LED visible through 260 130
transparence
120
LED visible through Cable output
M18 x 1

transparence 220 110


100
70 12 180 90
80
140 70

Configuration with connector K Configuration with sensitivity adjustment Y Y 60

Reflector 100 Reflector 50


55 15 LED visible through CT04 CT04
40
transparence
LED visible through Sensitivity adjustment trimmer X 60 X 30
M18 x 1

M12 x 1

transparence (9 turns)
20
Cable output Sensor 20 Sensor 10
70 12
40 30 20 10 0 10 20 30 40 -25 -20 -15 -10 -5 0 -5 -10 -15 -20 -25
Y (mm) Y (mm)

EMX INDUSTRIES INC.


Retro Ref. Photoelectric Sensors
PHOTOELECTRIC SENSORS IN LONG HOUSING 24 230 V AC TRIAC NO AND NC OUTPUT
Short AC housing, only 80 mm 18 Series
Leakage <1.5 mA @ 220 V DC
Models w/o pots for simple installation
Models with 9-turn pot

Identification code Wiring diagrams

18 29 P R BROWN
L1

AC WHITE 24 230 Vac


SERIES 18
BLUE
N
TRIAC NO output
29
TRIAC NC output
30
WARNING: Short circuit in the output is not possible. Wrong supply cables
POLARIZED OPTIC connections can irreparably damage the detector. Therefore sensors whose
output status is short-circuited will not be substituted under warranty.

SENSITIVITY ADJUSTMENT

AVAILABLE POLARIZED STANDARD


SWITCHING DISTANCE 1 m (1) 3 m (1)
CONNECTIONS IN PARALLEL
HYSTERESIS 10% In parallel connections with multiple outputs, the maximum leakage
EMISSION Red (660 m) Infrared (875 m) current (<1,5 mA at 220 VAC) referring to the load and the supply
should be taken into account when calculating the max. quantity
NOMINAL VOLTAGE 24 230VAC (-15 /+10%) of connectable sensors.
MAINS FREQUENCY 50 60 Hz It is important in this connection that the sensors are connected
at the same phase.
MAX. OUTPUT CURRENT 150 mA
LEAKAGE CURRENT 1.5mA (at 220VAC)
ABSORPTION 1W Accessories
VOLTAGE DROP (Sensor ON) < 2.5 V
OPERATION LED Yellow
SWITCHING FREQUENCY 10 Hz
RESPONSE TIME 100 mS
START UP DELAY 300 mS DEV90 Mirror 90

ELECTRIC PROTECTIONS Againts inductive loads


TEMPERATURE LIMITS -10 +60 C
LIGHT IMMUNITY 5000 Lux (2) 35 Object
to be
PROTECTION DEGREE IP 67 (IP 65 for models with sensitivity adjustment) detected

CABLE LENGTH 2m
CABLE SECTION 3 x 0.35 mm2
HOUSING MATERIAL Housing: nylon loaded with fiberglass - Lenses: methacrylate
23
WEIGHT - cable output - 120 g
(1)
Determined with CT04S reflector.
Determined with halogen tungsten lamp 3000 K.
(2)

Note: for a proper use see norms at pages 6, 7 and 8.

Dimensions (mm) Characteristic curves


RETRO REFLECTIVE POLARIZED RETRO REFLECTIVE
Configuration with cable Distance X (cm) Distance X (cm)

65 15
LED visible through 260 130
transparence 120
M18 x 1

220 110
100
180 90
80 12 80
140 70
Y Y 60

Reflector 100 Reflector 50


Configuration with cable - Back view Configuration with sensitivity adjustment CT04 CT04
40
X 60 X 30
LED visible through Cable output LED visible through Sensitivity adjustment 20
transparence transparence trimmer (9 turns)
Sensor 20 Sensor 10
Cable output
40 30 20 10 0 10 20 30 40 -25 -20 -15 -10 -5 0 -5 -10 -15 -20 -25
Y (mm) Y (mm)
Retro Ref. Photoelectric Sensors
PHOTOELECTRIC SENSORS IN STANDARD HOUSING 12 30 V DC PROGRAMMABLE OUTPUT
Programmable outputs, NPN or PNP, N.C. or N.O. MF Series
Simpke one-turn sensitivity
M12 quick connect or integral cable
2 msec ON/OFF

Identification code Wiring diagrams


BROWN BROWN

MF 02 P K NPN WHITE
BLACK
PNP WHITE
BLACK
NO BLUE NO BLUE

SERIES MF
BLUE BLUE

PROGRAMMABLE OUTPUT NPN WHITE


BLACK
PNP WHITE
BLACK
NC BROWN NC BROWN

POLARIZED OPTIC
Note: For series or parallel connections see notes at page 6.

CONNECTOR OUTPUT M12


Connection with connector M12 (K)
AVAILABLE POLARIZED STANDARD 1
SWITCHING DISTANCE 1 m (1) 3 m (1)
HYSTERESIS 10%
View of quadripole
EMISSION Red (660 m) Infrared (875 m) 2 4
male connector.
NOMINAL VOLTAGE 12 30VDC (-15 /+10%)
RESIDUAL RIPPLE 10%
3
OUTPUT NPN or PNP (may be selected)
CONTACT NO or NC (may be selected) CONTACTS CONFIGURATION
MAX. OUTPUT CURRENT 200 mA Output
Contacts numbers
1 2 3 4
ABSORPTION AT 30 VDC 30 mA 40 mA NPN NO NO

2 V (l = 100 mA)
NPN NC NC
VOLTAGE DROP (Sensor ON) PNP NO NO
PNP NC NC
STATUS LED Yellow
SENSITIVITY ADJUSTEMENT Trimmer 1 turn Note: the K plug is compatible with the following connectors:
SWITCHING FREQUENCY 500 Hz VAUDEHA, BINDER, HIRSCHMANN, LUMBERG, AMPHENOL-TUCHEL.
RESPONSE TIME 2 mS
START UP DELAY 100 mS Accessories
SHORT CIRCUIT PROTECTION Present (self-resetting)
ELECTRIC PROTECTIONS Againts polarity reversal - inductive loads
TEMPERATURE LIMITS -10 +60 C DEV90 Mirror 90

LIGHT IMMUNITY > 10.000 Lux (2)


PROTECTION DEGREE IP 65
CABLE LENGTH 2m 35 Object
to be
CABLE SECTION 4 x 0.25 mm2 detected

HOUSING MATERIAL Housing: ABS - Lenses: methacrylate


WEIGHT - cable output - (connector output) - 130 g - (70 g)
(1)
Determined with CT04S reflector. 23
(2)
Determined with halogen tungsten lamp 3000 K.
Note: for a proper use see norms at pages 6, 7 and 8.

Dimensions (mm) Characteristic curves


RETRO REFLECTIVE POLARIZED RETRO REFLECTIVE
Configuration with cable Configuration with connector K Distance X (cm) Distance X (cm)

47 30 47 30
LED visible LED visible 260 130
through transparence through transparence
120
M18 x 1

M18 x 1
+

M12 x 1
REG.

REG.

220 110

100
Sensitivity adjustment Sensitivity adjustment
trimmer trimmer
77 14 77 12 180 90
80
140 70
Sensitivity adjustment Y Y 60

Reflector 100 Reflector 50


CT04 CT04
1) SENSITIVITY INCREASE 40
LED visible
Screw the trimmer towards right towards position + through transparence X 60 X 30
+
REG.

20
2) SENSITIVITY DECREASE
20 10

Sensor Sensor
Screw the trimmer towards left towards position
Sensitivity adjustment trimmer 40 30 20 10 0 10 20 30 40 -25 -20 -15 -10 -5 0 -5 -10 -15 -20 -25
Note: the trimmer just needs one turn. Y (mm) Y (mm)

EMX INDUSTRIES INC.


Retro Ref. Photoelectric Sensors
PHOTOELECTRIC SENSORS IN SQUARE HOUSING 12 30 V DC PROGRAMMABLE OUTPUT
Compact size, output and stability indicators FQ Series
Cost effective
M12 quick connect or integral cable
5 msec ON/OFF

Identification code Wiring diagrams


BROWN BROWN

FQ 02 P K NPN WHITE
BLACK
PNP WHITE
BLACK
NO BLUE NO BLUE
SERIES FQ
BLUE BLUE

PROGRAMMABLE OUTPUT NPN WHITE


BLACK
PNP WHITE
BLACK
NC BROWN NC BROWN

POLARIZED OPTIC

Note: For series or parallel connections see notes at page 6.


CONNECTOR OUTPUT M12
Connection with connector M12 (K)
AVAILABLE POLARIZED STANDARD
1
SWITCHING DISTANCE 4 m (1) 9 m (1) CONTACTS CONFIGURATION
Contacts numbers
HYSTERESIS 10% 2 4
Output
1 2 3 4

EMISSION Red (660 m) Infrared (875 m) NPN NO


NPN NC
NO
NC
NOMINAL VOLTAGE 12 30VDC (-15 /+10%) PNP NO NO
3 PNP NC NC
RESIDUAL RIPPLE 10% Emitter
View of quadripole
OUTPUT NPN or PNP (programmable) male connector. Note: the K plug is compatible with the following
CONTACT NO or NC (programmable) connectors: VAUDEHA, BINDER, HIRSCHMANN,
LUMBERG, AMPHENOL-TUCHEL.
MAX. OUTPUT CURRENT 200 mA
ABSORPTION AT 30 VDC 30 mA Sensitivity adjustment
VOLTAGE DROP (Sensor ON) 1.8 V (l = 100 mA) Green LED Yellow LED
YELLOW LED Output indicator 1) SENSITIVITY INCREASE
Screw the trimmer towards
GREEN LED Stability indicator right towards position +

.N
.XIM

.WOP
TUO
AM
SENSITIVITY ADJUSTEMENT Trimmer 1 turn 2) SENSITIVITY DECREASE Sensitivity adjustment trimmer
SWITCHING FREQUENCY 200 Hz Screw the trimmer towards
left towards position Note: the trimmer just needs one turn.
RESPONSE TIME 5 mS
START UP DELAY 100 mS Stability signal led
SHORT CIRCUIT PROTECTION Present (self-resetting)
Range of
ELECTRIC PROTECTIONS Againts polarity reversal - inductive loads received
signal

TEMPERATURE LIMITS -20 +60 C 110% Switch limit of stability green LED

100% Switch limit of output yellow LED

LIGHT IMMUNITY > 10.000 Lux (2)


Time
PROTECTION DEGREE IP 65 Yellow LED

ON
CABLE LENGTH 2m
OFF Time
CABLE SECTION 4 x 0.25 mm2 Green LED

HOUSING MATERIAL Housing: ABS - Lenses: methacrylate ON

WEIGHT - cable output - (connector output) - 160 g - (120 g) OFF Time

(1) The stability signal LED shows the range of received signal and helps the
Determined with CT04S reflector. photoelectric sensor to line up.
(2)
Determined with halogen tungsten lamp 3000 K. A photoelectric sensor works in stability condition when the received light
Note: for a proper use see norms at pages 6, 7 and 8. signal range is 10% ahead the switching limit of output.

Dimensions (mm) Characteristic curves


40
50 18 18 30,5 POLARIZED RETRO REFLECTIVE RETRO REFLECTIVE
5 Mounting 21
4,5

Distance X (m) Distance X (m)


bracket 3 6
5

(supplied
accessory)
24,5

4,5

5
50

53

2.5
15,5

R 2,25 4
5

5 4.5 2
DIFFUSE
20

POLARIZED
REFLECTIVE RETRO
3
Configuration with cable RETRO
REFLECTIVE
REFLECTIVE
10
Y Y
56 1.5
Reflector Reflector
CT04 CT04 2
Configuration with
1,5

25 15,25 2,5
connector K
X X
1
1
13,5
20

6,5
11
M12 x 1

Sensor Sensor
4,5

6,5 25 12 9 2

56
40 20 0 20 40 50 30 10 0 10 30 50
14
Rotating connector - coming soon - Y (mm) Y (mm)

EMX INDUSTRIES INC.


Retro Ref. Photoelectric Sensors
PHOTOELECTRIC SENSORS IN SQUARE HOUSING 18 230 V AC - DC RELAY OUTPUT
Wide input voltage FQ Series
3A relay SPDT
M12 quick connect or integral cable
Output and Supply indicators

Identification code Wiring diagrams

FQ 06 P K R
BROWN
L
SERIES FQ WHITE
E RED
L
BLACK
A
Relay output normal OFF
06 Y BLUE
N
Relay output normal ON
06A
POLARIZED OPTIC

Note: in case of inductive loads it is necessary to connect one diode


CONNECTOR OUTPUT M12 in antiparallel at the edges of the load.

AVAILABLE POLARIZED STANDARD Connection with connector M12 (K)


SWITCHING DISTANCE 4 m (1) 9 m (1) 1
HYSTERESIS 10%
EMISSION Red (660 m) Infrared (875 m) View of quadripole
2 4
NOMINAL VOLTAGE 18 230V AC - DC (-15 /+10%) male connector.
MAINS FREQUENCY 50 60 Hz
OUTPUT Relay (10 x 106 ops. min.) 3

MAX. OUTPUT CURRENT 3A 30 V AC - 1A 220 V AC (90W, 360 VA) CONTACTS CONFIGURATION


ABSORPTION 2.5 VA Output
Contacts numbers
1 2 3 4
YELLOW LED Output indicator Relay L COM N NO
Emitter L N
GREEN LED Supply indicator
SENSITIVITY ADJUSTEMENT Trimmer 1 turn Note: the K plug is compatible with the following connectors: VAUDEHA,
BINDER, HIRSCHMANN, LUMBERG, AMPHENOL-TUCHEL.
SWITCHING FREQUENCY 10 Hz
RESPONSE TIME 100 mS Sensitivity adjustment
START UP DELAY 300 mS
TEMPERATURE LIMITS - 20 +60 C 1) SENSITIVITY INCREASE
LIGHT IMMUNITY > 10.000 Lux (2) Screw the trimmer towards right towards position +
PROTECTION DEGREE IP 65
2) SENSITIVITY DECREASE
CABLE LENGTH 2m Screw the trimmer towards left towards position
CABLE SECTION 5 x 0.30 mm2
Green LED = supply
HOUSING MATERIAL Housing: ABS - Lenses: methacrylate
WEIGHT - cable output - (connector output) - 180 g - (125 g)
MIN.
MAX.

POW.
OUT

(1)
Determined with CT04S reflector. Sensitivity adjustment
(2) Yellow LED = output
Determined with halogen tungsten lamp 3000 K. trimmer
Note: for a proper use see norms at pages 6, 7 and 8.
Note: the trimmer just needs one turn.

Dimensions (mm) Characteristic curves


40
50 18 18 30,5 POLARIZED RETRO REFLECTIVE RETRO REFLECTIVE
5 Mounting 21 Distance X (m) Distance X (m)
4,5

3
bracket 6
5

(supplied
accessory)
24,5

4,5

5
50

53

2.5
15,5

4
R 2,25
5

5 4.5
2
DIFFUSE
20

POLARIZED
REFLECTIVE RETRO 3
Y Y
Configuration with cable RETRO
REFLECTIVE
REFLECTIVE
10
56 1.5
Reflector Reflector
CT04 CT04 2
Configuration with
1,5

25 15,25 2,5
connector K X X
1
1
13,5
20

6,5
11
M12 x 1

Sensor Sensor
4,5

6,5 25 12 9 2
40 20 0 20 40 50 30 10 0 10 30 50
14 56
Y (mm) Y (mm)
Rotating connector - coming soon -

EMX INDUSTRIES INC.


Retro Ref. Photoelectric Sensors
PHOTOELECTRIC SENSORS IN RECTANGULAR HOUSING 12 30 V DC WITH TIMER NPN OR PNP OUTPUT
Rectangle compact size
Multi-function timer FW Series
ON/OFF delay
One shot-four functions
NPN or PNP outputs
Conduit wiring terminal block
Identification code Wiring diagrams

FW 03 P T
Time regulation
SERIES FW
(on request)
LED

NPN NO or NC output
03 Sensitivity adjustment

2 3
DIP switches

O1
N
PNP NO or NC output
04 1 Not connected

POLARIZED OPTIC 2 NC

3 NO
TIME DELAY 1 7 SEC. 4 +
5 -
AVAILABLE POLARIZED STANDARD
SWITCHING DISTANCE 6 m (1) 10 m (1)
HYSTERESIS 10%
EMISSION Red (660 m) Infrared (875 m)
Timing diagrams
NOMINAL VOLTAGE 12 30VDC (-15 /+10%)
RESIDUAL RIPPLE 10% MODELS WITHOUT TIMER
N. DIP. SWITCHES POSITION OBJECT OUTPUT DIAGRAM
OUTPUT NPN or PNP Light
impulse
MAX OUTPUT CURRENT 200 mA Output ON Outoput
1 (2=NO; 3=NC) status
ABSORPTION 40 mA Output OFF Outoput
2
VOLTAGE DECREASE 2.5 VDC (2=NC; 3=NO) status

YELLOW LED Present MODELS WITH TIMER


N. DIP. SWITCHES POSITION OBJECT OUTPUT DIAGRAM
SENSITIVITY ADJUSTEMENT -
Light
TIME REGULATION 0.1 7 s 2 s (only models with timer) impulse

On operate Outoput
1
SWITCHING FREQUENCY 100 Hz output ON status

On operate Outoput
RESPONSE TIME 10 mS 2
output OFF status

START UP DELAY 300 ms 3 On release


output ON
Outoput
status

PROTECTION AGAINTS SHORT-CIRCUIT Present (self-resetting) 4 On release


output OFF
Outoput
status
TEMPERATURE LIMITS -25 +55C 5 One shot trailing edge Outoput
output ON status
LIGHT IMMUNITY 5.000 Lux (2) 6 One shot trailing edge Outoput
output OFF status
PROTECTION DEGREE IP 67 One shot leading edge Outoput
7 output ON status
CONNECTIONS Screw
One shot leading edge Outoput
8
output OFF status
CABLE GUIDE PG 13.5
T = Fixed delay
HOUSING MATERIAL Polycarbonate
WEIGHT (Approximately) 110 g
(1)
Determined with CT04 reflector.
(2)
Determined with halogen tungsten lamp 3000 K.
Note: for a proper use see norms at pages 6, 7 and 8.

Dimensions (mm) Characteristic curves


2,5

81 25

ON
PHOTOELECTRIC

I
Pg. 13.5

I S
SENSOR
4,3

67,5
65

E V POLARIZED RETRO REFLECTIVE RETRO REFLECTIVE

R
5

Distance X (m) Distance X (m)


7 40 19,5 Pg. 13.5 8 12

IN
11
7
10

3 6 12,5 6 9
4,4

R 3,25 8
5
7

4,4 Y
4
Y
6

0 5
R4 Reflector 3 Reflector
59,5

52
40

CT04 CT04 4
4,4
30

X
2 X
3
MOUNTING BRACKET
18

4,4 2
1
(SUPPLIED ACCESSORY) 1
6

Sensor Sensor

6
6,5

10 6 4 2 0 2 4 6 20 15 10 5 0 5 10 15 20
52 Y (cm) Y (cm)

EMX INDUSTRIES INC.


Retro Ref. Photoelectric Sensors
PH. SENSORS IN RECTANGULAR HOUSING 12 240 V DC 24 240 V AC WITH TIMER RELAY OUTPUT
Wide range World Wide Power Supply
Rectangular compact size
FW Series
Multi-function timer:
- ON/OFF delay - One shot-four functions
- 3A relay SPDT - Terminal block wiring

Identification code Wiring diagrams

Time regulation
FW 06 P T (on request)
LED
Sensitivity adjustment DIP switches
SERIES FW
12 - 240 VDC
24 - 240 VAC
RELAY OUTPUT 50/60 Hz

30 VDC
POLARIZED OPTIC 250 VAC
Max. 3A

TIME DELAY 1 7 SEC.


Relay OFF

AVAILABLE POLARIZED STANDARD Timing diagrams


SWITCHING DISTANCE 6 m (1) 10 m (1)
HYSTERESIS 10% MODELS WITHOUT TIMER
OUTPUT DIAGRAM
Red (660 m) Infrared (875 m)
N. DIP. SWITCHES POSITION OBJECT
EMISSION Light
impulse
NOMINAL VOLTAGE 12 240VDC / 24 240 VAC (-15 /+10%) 1
Output ON Outoput
(2=NO; 3=NC) status
NET FREQUENCY 45 60 Hz Output OFF Outoput
2 (2=NC; 3=NO) status
OUTPUT Relay (40 x 106 mec. op. -5 x 106 elect. op.)
MAX OUTPUT CURRENT 3A 250VAC - 3A 30VDC MODELS WITH TIMER
DIP. SWITCHES POSITION OBJECT OUTPUT DIAGRAM
2W (2.5 VA)
N.
ABSORPTION Light
impulse
YELLOW LED Present
On operate Outoput
1
GREEN LED - output ON status

On operate Outoput
SENSITIVITY ADJUSTEMENT - 2
output OFF status

TIME REGULATION 0.1 7 s 2 s (only models with timer) 3 On release


output ON
Outoput
status

SWITCHING FREQUENCY 20 Hz 4 On release


output OFF
Outoput
status

RESPONSE TIME 50 ms 5 One shot trailing edge Outoput


output ON status
START UP DELAY 300 ms 6 One shot trailing edge Outoput
output OFF status
TEMPERATURE LIMITS -25 +55C One shot leading edge Outoput
7 output ON status
LIGHT IMMUNITY 5.000 Lux (2) One shot leading edge Outoput
8
output OFF status
PROTECTION DEGREE IP 67
T = Fixed delay
CONNECTIONS Screw
CABLE GUIDE PG 13.5
HOUSING MATERIAL Polycarbonate
WEIGHT (Approximately) 110 g

(1)
Determined with CT04 reflector.
(2)
Determined with halogen tungsten lamp 3000 K.
Note: for a proper use see norms at pages 6, 7 and 8.

Dimensions (mm) Characteristic curves


2,5

81 25

ON
PHOTOELECTRIC

I
Pg. 13.5

I S
SENSOR
4,3

67,5
65

E V POLARIZED RETRO REFLECTIVE RETRO REFLECTIVE

R
5

Distance X (m) Distance X (m)


7 40 19,5 Pg. 13.5 8 12

IN
11
7
10
3 6 12,5 6 9
4,4

R 3,25 8
5
7

4,4 Y
4
Y
6

0
R4
5
3
59,5

Reflector Reflector
52
40

CT04 CT04 4
4,4
30

2 3
MOUNTING BRACKET X X
18

4,4 2
(SUPPLIED ACCESSORY) 1
1
6

Sensor Sensor

6
6,5

10 6 4 2 0 2 4 6 20 15 10 5 0 5 10 15 20
52 Y (cm) Y (cm)

16 EMX INDUSTRIES INC.


RETRO-REFLEX POLARISED SENSOR B 952

B 952 S / R

Sensing distance on reflector 84 : 10 m


Supply :10 to 30 VDC or 20 to 250 V AC/DC
Output : PNP / NPN or relay
ON-delay + OFF-delay timer

Description :
Dimensions
Simple and quick set-up
for self-teach (standard 29 60
5.5
and sensitive mode)
Double adjustable timer Optical axis

Alignment indicator 2xM4 4

Dirty optics indicator

80

30
Keyboard lock
30

Remote test input (S type)


simulate the beam cut-off 3
4.5

10.8
Direct or inverse output 18
cable seal 4 to 10 mm
Output : static or relay

Connection on screw Wiring Connections


terminal
STATIC (S) RELAY (R)
Polycarbonate strong
housing Output 0V NC C NO
N P Remote test

10/30 VDC
Supply
Applications : 0V
Terminal 250 V - 1,5 mm2
Parcels jam control.

Detection of shiny parts Visualisation and Keyboard


on material handling.
- Sensitivity decrease - Sensitivity increase
- On delay - Off delay - Light on - Dark on
Admittance control. - Decrease timer adjustment - Increase timer adjustment
- Automatic threshold set-up
- Special functions key
LO-DO

SET
+

t
t

Terminal cover
- Detection

In case of a short-circuit on the - Dirty optics


output, both red and green LEDs - Detection limit
flash - Alignment indicator
- Key depressed
- Keyboard locked - Timer ON
- Timer indicator
RETRO-REFLEX POLARISED SENSOR B 952

Technical Information S R
Supply voltage 10 / 30 VDC 20 / 250 V AC/DC
ripple < 10%
within specified limits
consumption 50 mA 2 VA
Response time ton or toff 8 ms 20 ms
switching frequency 60 Hz 25 Hz
Output max. nominal intensity 100 mA change over type relay
residual voltage at 100 mA <2V U nominal : 250 V AC
residual voltage at 10 mA <1V permanent max. I : 3 A
Emission LED red
modulation frequency 400 Hz 400 Hz
Timer type retriggerable - ON-delay / OFF-delay
range - increment duration o to 11s in 23 steps of 50ms, then 0.5s steps
Temperature operating 0 to 60 C
storage -20 to 80 C
External light immunity incandescent light 10 000 lux 5 from optical axis
sunlight 20 000 lux 5 from optical axis
Protections supply inverse polarity protection
output short-circuit or over-load
degree of protection IP 65 and IP 67
Remote input on voltage < 1,4 V
off voltage > 3 V

To Place Order
Product Retro-reflex polarised sensor
Reference B - 952 ( )
Type (S) : static - 10 / 30 VDC
(R) : relay - 20 / 250 V AC/DC

TYPES OF APPLICATIONS

Example 1
Control of palettes height.

Example 2
Flow control, sorting or other incident control on a
conveyor.
RETRO-REFLEX POLARISED SENSOR B 955 R

B 955 R

Sensing distance on reflector 50x50 : 3,5 m


Dead zone : 4 cm
Supply : 18 / 250 V AC/DC
Cable 2 m or plug M12

Description :
Dimensions
Simple set-up by one Cable version
50
round potentiometer 3 5
18

Output relay 53
50

Power ON indicator
5

5 4.5

Signal indicator
MINI
MAX
POW
OUT

Cable 2m or M12 connector

1.5
25 15.25 2.5
Plug version

(NO contact only)

13.5
20

4.5
6.5 25 12 9
M12x

56

ABS housing

Wiring connections
Applications :
Version cable Version plug output
Shiny objects detection output 1
1 +/L Brown
on a conveyor Brown +/L 2 COM White
White NF 3 -/N Blue
2 4 4 NO Black
Red COM
Handling conveyor Black NO
Blue -/N
3
Admittance control

Visualisation and set-up


Sensitivity increase : turnthe trimmer towards max
Sensitivity decrease : turn the trimmer towards min.
POW
OUT
MAX
MINI

Led yellow Off : beam through


contact NO open

Led green : power ON


RETRO-REFLEX POLARISED SENSOR B 955 R

Technical information Cable 2 m Plug M12


Supply voltage 18 /250 V AC/DC
consumption 2,5 VA
Response time Ton, Toff 25 ms
Switching frequency 20 Hz
Relay output Type NO /NC NO
Coilstatus At ease when beam is cut
(inversely on request)
Voltage 125 VDC 250 VAC
Max.nominal intensity 3A
Cut offpower 90 W 360 VA
Detection On reflector 84 3m
distance 42 1,8 m
50x50 3,5 m
With scotchlite polarised 1,6 m
50x50
Dead zone 4 cm
Emission Led rouge
Modulation frequency 55 Hz
Temperature operating - 20 + 60
storage - 20 + 80
External light Incandescent light 10 000 Lux
immunity
Protection Degree ofprotection IP 65

To place order
Product Reference
Retro-reflex polarised, cable output 2 m B 955 R
Retro-reflex polarised, plug output M12 B CO 955 R
Delivered with 1 reflector 50x50, ref. 1111 and bracket
Cable M12 length 2 m CM 122
Cable M12 length 5 m CM 125

TYPES OF APPLICATIONS
Exemple 1
Retro-reflex detection.

Exemple 2
Dtection of metallic shiny parts
MINIATURE RETRO-REFLEX POLARISED SENSOR B 989 S

B 989 S
Sensing distance :
On reflector 50 x 50 : 1 m
On reflector 84 : 1,5 m
Supply : 10 to 30 VDC
Output : PNP or NPN
Trimmer sensibility set-up

Description :
Dimensions
Miniaturised Control indicator
Set-up
Integrated amplifier

Detection indication by
LED Optical axis
40
3,1
Lateral beam

23
Reflector inclus 50 x 50

9,5
(rf.1111)

Direct / inverse output


2,5

3
Polarised visible light
10 13,5
2 m cable or M8 plug Including
reflector 1111
Strong housing

Cheap product Wiring Connections

Through-beam detection
Applications :
Control of position or P output type
presence of parts on Brown Brown
10/30 VDC 10/30 VDC
machine, small conveyor, Black Black
robot. White White

Detection of small parts, Blue


0V
Blue
0V

even shiny. in Lo in Do
Small space positionning
N output type
sensor.
Brown Brown
10/30 VDC 10/30 VDC

White White
Black Black
0V 0V
Blue Blue
in Lo in Do
MINIATURE RETRO-REFLEX POLARISED SENSOR B 989 S

Tecnical Information
Supply voltage 10 / 30 VDC
ripple < 10% within specified limits
consumption < 25 mA
Response time ton or toff 1 mS
switching frequency 500 Hz
Output max. nominal frequency 100 mA
residual voltage at 100 mA <2V
residual voltage at 10 mA <1V
Emission LED red pulsed
modulation frequency 6 KHz
Temperature operating 0 to 50 C
storage - 20 to 80 C
External light immunity incandescent light 5 000 lux
sunlight 10 000 lux
Protections supply inverse polarity protection
output permanent short-circuit or over-load protection
degree IP 65 and IP 67
Directe / inverse function by cable, see Wiring Connections

To Place Order
Product Miniature retro-reflex polarised sensor
Reference B 989 SN - 2 m cable output (NPN)
B 989 SP - 2m cable ouput (PNP)
B (C0) 989 SN - plug output (NPN)
B (C0) 989 SP - plug output (PNP)

TYPE OF APPLICATIONS

Example 1
Detection of breack in a metallic strip.

Example 2
Detection of metallic cans on a conveyor.
RETRO-REFLEX POLARISED AXIAL SENSOR BA 598

BA 598
Sensing distance on reflector 84 : 3 m
Supply : 10 to 30 V
Output : PNP

Description : Dimensions
42.5 18,8
Function indicator

M18x1
Mounting
Direct or inverse output screw for Cable
plastic
housing 2,3
Output : PNP 8 22 63,6 3
24
M12 plug or cable
42.5 18,8 15,6
Polyamid or short cylindric

M18x1
Mounting
metallic M18 housing screw for Plug
metallic

M12x1
16,4
housing 4 22 2,3
78
Applications :
Detection of opaque parts
on a conveyor.
Wiring Connections
Control of position or pre-
DIRECT INVERSE
sence of parts on assem- Brown Brown
bly or conditionning Blacl
+ Black
+
PNP PNP
machine. Blue Blue
White - White -
+ -

Technical Information
Supply voltage 10 / 30 VDC
ripple < 10% within specified limits
consumption 30 mA
Response time switching frequency 250 Hz
Output nominal intensity 100 mA
residual voltage at 100 mA 1,2 V max.
Emission LED red
Temperature operating -25 to 70 C
storage -20 to 70 C
External light immunity incandescent light 3 000 lux
sunlight 10 000 lux
Protections output short-circuit, inverse polarity protection
degree of protection IP 67

To Place Order
Product Retro-reflex polarised Type BAP 598 (S) - cable - plastic
(Please, enquire for other types) axial sensor BAP C0 598 (S) - M12 plug - plastic
Reference BA 598 BAM C0 598 (S) - M12 plug - metal
RETRO-REFLEX POLARISED LATERAL SENSOR BL 598

BL 598
Sensing distance on reflector 84 : 3 m
Supply : 10 to 30 V
Output : PNP

Description : Dimensions
Right angle optic
75
Function indicator 23,8 27,6 9,2 15,6

Direct or inverse output Mounting


screw for

25,3
Plug
metallic
Output : PNP housing

M12x1

M18x1
16,4
4 22

2,3
M12 plug or cable 18

Polyamid or short cylindric


metallic M18 housing

Wiring Connections
Applications :
Detection of reflecting or DIRECT INVERSE

shiny parts. Brown Brown


Black
+ Black
+
PNP PNP
Detection of parts on a Blue Blue
White - White -
conveyor. + -

Technical Information
Supply voltage 10 / 30 VDC
ripple < 10% within specified limits
consumption 30 mA
Response time switching frequency 250 Hz
Output nominal intensity 100 mA
residual voltage at 100 mA 1,2 V max.
Emission LED red
Temperature operating -25 to 70 C
storage -20 to 70 C
External light immunity incandescent light 3 000 lux
sunlight 10 000 lux
Protections output short-circuit, inverse polarity protection
degree of protection IP 67

To Place Order
Product Retro-reflex polarised Type BLM C0 598 (S) - PNP output - M12 plug -
(Please, enquire for other types) lateral sensor metal
Reference BLM 598
RETRO-REFLEX POLARISED AXIAL SENSOR BA 946 S

BA 946 S
Sensing distance
On reflector 46 : 1m
On reflector 84 : 2m
Supply : 10 / 30 VDC
Output : PNP / NPN
On-delay or off-delay timer standard

Description :
Dimensions
Insensitivity to reflections
Cable or M8 plug - 4 points
interferences

Simple and quick set-up


Optical axis
30

for self-teach (standard


and sensitive mode)

11
Release clip
Adjustable timer 4.1
DIN Rail Mounting
25.4 20
Alignment indicator

Dirty optics indicator


LO-DO

SET
13

t
t

Keyboard lock 60
Remote input for self-
teach (sensitive mode)
Wiring Connections
Direct or inverse output
Brown
Output : PNP / NPN 10 - 30 VDC
N
Black Output 100 mA max.
Cable or M8 plug Microprocessor
P

Polycarbonate strong Blue


0V
Remote input
housing White

Applications : Visualisation and Keyboard


Position or presence
control of parts on condi- - Sensitivity decrease - Sensitivity increase
- On delay - Off delay - Light on - Dark on
tioning machine. - Decrease timer adjustment - Increase timer adjustment
- Automatic threshold set-up
- Special functions key
Through-beam on a
conveyor.
LO-DO

SET
+

t
t

Detection of shiny parts.


- Detection
- Key depressed
- Keyboard locked - Dirty optics
- Detection limit
- Alignment indicator
- Timer ON
RETRO-REFLEX POLARISED AXIAL SENSOR BA 946 S

Technical Information
Supply voltage 10 / 30 VDC
ripple < 10% within specified limits
consumption < 40 mA
Response time ton or toff < 500 s
switching frequency < 1 KHz
Output max. nominal intensity 100 mA
residual voltage at 100 mA <2V
residual voltage at 10 mA <1V
Emission LED red
modulation frequency 8 KHz
Timer range 0 to 5 s with 11 increments
increment duration first increment : 40 ms, following increments : 500 ms
Temperature operating 0 to 60 C
storage -20 to 80 C
External light immunity incandescent light 10 000 lux
sunlight 20 000 lux
Protections supply inverse polarity protection
output permanent short-circuit or over-load protection
degree of protection IP 65
Remote input on voltage < 1,4 V
off voltage > 3 V

To Place Order
Product Retro-reflex polarised axial sensor
Reference BA - ( ) - 946 S
( ) output with cable 2m
(C0) output M8 plug without cable

Cable for M8 plug CM 82 - cordon 2m


if necessary, please order
together with the amplifier CM 85 - cordon 5m

TYPES OF APPLICATIONS
Example 1
Pieces count at a conveyor output.

OIL
OIL
OIL
OIL

Example 2
Detection of shiny metallic cans.
RETRO-REFLEX POLARISED AXIAL SENSOR BA 966 S

BA 966 S
Sensing distance
On reflector 46 : 10 cm to 1m
On reflector 84 : 10 cm to 2m
Supply : 10 / 30 VDC
Output : PNP / NPN
Friendly adjustment by key + / -
Bargraph

Description :
Dimensions
Immunity to reflection
Cable or M8 socket - 4 points
Simple adjustment
Sensitivity bargraph
Optical axis
30

Maximum and minimum

11
sensitivity indication Release clip

Keyboard lock 4.1


DIN Rail Mounting
25.4 20
Direct or inverse output

Output : PNP / NPN


13

Cable or M8 socket 60
Polycarbonate strong
housing
Wiring Diagram

Brown
10 - 30 VDC
N

Applications : Microprocessor
Black Output 100 mA max.
P

Position or presence Blue


0V
control of parts on condi- White
Connected to + : light-on mode
tioning machine. Connected to - : dark-on mode

Through-beam on a
conveyor. Display and Keyboard
Detection of shiny parts.
- Sensitivity decrease - Sensitivity increase

- Keyboard lock
+

In case of a short-circuit, - Detection


both red and green
LEDs flash
- Sensitivity display
RETRO-REFLEX POLARISED AXIAL SENSOR BA 966 S

Technical Information
Supply voltage 10 / 30 VDC
ripple < 10% within specified limits
consumption < 40 mA
Response time ton or toff < 500 s
switching frequency < 1 KHz
Output max. nominal intensity 100 mA
residual voltage at 100 mA <2V
residual voltage at 10 mA <1V
Emission LED red
modulation frequency 8 KHz
Temperature operating 0 to 60 C
storage -20 to 80 C
External light immunity incandescent light 10 000 lux
sunlight 20 000 lux
Protections supply inverse polarity protection
output permanent short-circuit or over-load protection
degree of protection IP 65
Light-on / dark-on function see wiring diagram

To Place Order
Product Retro-reflex polarised axial sensor
Reference BA - ( ) - 966 S
( ) output with cable 2m
(C0) output M8 socket without cable

Cable with M8 plug CM 82 - cable 2m


if required, please order CM 82 C - cable 2m with right angle connector
together with the sensor CM 85 - cable 5m

TYPES OF APPLICATIONS

Example 1
Pieces count at a conveyor output.

OIL
OIL
OIL
OIL

Example 2
Detection of shiny metallic cans.
RETRO-REFLEX POLARISED LATERAL SENSOR BL 946 S

BL 946 S
Sensing distance
On reflector 46 : 1m
On reflector 84 : 2m
Supply : 10 to 30 VDC
Output : PNP / NPN
On-delay or off-delay timer standard

Description :
Dimensions
Thickness reduced to
Cable or M8 plug - 4 points
13 mm

Reflections immunity
30

Simple and quick set-up


for self-teach (standard Release clip
and sensitive mode)
4.1
DIN Rail Mounting
15 25.4 9
Adjustable timer

Alignment indicator
LO-DO

SET
13

t
t

Dirty optics indicator 78 Optical axis

Keyboard lock

Remote input for self- Wiring Connections


teach (sensitive mode)
Brown
Direct or inverse output 10 - 30 VDC
N
Black Output 100 mA max.
Output : PNP / NPN Microprocessor
P
Blue
Cable or M8 plug 0V
White Remote input
Polycarbonate strong
housing

Visualisation and Keyboard


Applications :
- Sensitivity decrease - Sensitivity increase
- On delay - Off delay - Light on - Dark on
Position or presence - Decrease timer adjustment - Increase timer adjustment
control of parts on condi- - Automatic threshold set-up
- Special functions key
tioning machine.
LO-DO

Through-beam on a
SET
+

t
t

conveyor.
- Detection
- Key depressed
Detection of shiny parts. - Keyboard locked - Dirty optics
- Detection limit
- Alignment indicator
- Timer ON
RETRO-REFLEX POLARISED LATERAL SENSOR BL 946 S

Technical Information
Supply voltage 10 / 30 VDC
ripple < 10% within specified limits
consumption < 40 mA
Response time ton or toff < 500 s
switching frequency < 1 KHz
Output max. nominal intensity 100 mA
residual voltage at 100 mA <2V
residual voltage at 10 mA <1V
Emission LED red
modulation frequency 8 KHz
Timer range 0 to 5 s with 11 increments
increment duration first increment : 40 ms, following increments : 500 ms
Temperature operating 0 to 60 C
storage -20 to 80 C
External light immunity incandescent light 10 000 lux
sunlight 20 000 lux
Protections supply inverse polarity protection
output permanent short-circuit or over-load protection
degree of protection IP 65
Remote input on voltage < 1,4 V
off voltage > 3 V

To Place Order
Product Retro-reflex polarised lateral sensor
Reference BL - ( ) - 946 S
( ) output with cable 2m
(C0) output M8 plug without cable

Cable for M8 plug CM 82 - cordon 2m


if necessary, please order
together with the amplifier CM 85 - cordon 5m

TYPES OF APPLICATIONS
Example 1
Pieces count at a conveyor output.

OIL
OIL
OIL
OIL

Example 2
Detection of shiny metallic cans.
RETRO-REFLEX POLARISED LATERAL SENSOR BL 966 S

BL 966 S
Sensing distance
On reflector 46 : 2 cm to 1m
On reflector 84 : 2 cm to 2m
Supply : 10 / 30 VDC
Output : PNP / NPN
Friendly adjustment by key + / -
Bargraph

Description :
Dimensions
Thickness reduced to
Cable or M8 socket - 4 points
13 mm

Immunity to reflections
30

Simple adjustment
Sensitivity bargraph Release clip

Maximum and minimum 4.1


DIN Rail Mounting
15 25.4 9
sensitivity indication
Keyboard lock
13

Direct or inverse output


78 Optical axis
Output : PNP / NPN

Cable or M8 socket Wiring Diagram


Polycarbonate strong
housing Brown
10 - 30 VDC
N
Black Output 100 mA max.
Microprocessor
P
Blue
0V
Applications : White
Connected to + : light-on mode
Connected to - : dark-on mode
Position or presence
control of parts on condi-
tioning machine. Display and Keyboard
Through-beam on a
conveyor. - Sensitivity decrease - Sensitivity increase

Detection of shiny parts. - Keyboard lock


+

In case of a short-circuit, - Detection


both red and green
LEDs flash
- Sensitivity display
RETRO-REFLEX POLARISED LATERAL SENSOR BL 966 S

Technical Information
Supply voltage 10 / 30 VDC
ripple < 10% within specified limits
consumption < 40 mA
Response time ton or toff < 500 s
switching frequency < 1 KHz
Output max. nominal intensity 100 mA
residual voltage at 100 mA <2V
residual voltage at 10 mA <1V
Emission LED red
modulation frequency 8 KHz
Temperature operating 0 to 60 C
storage -20 to 80 C
External light immunity incandescent light 10 000 lux
sunlight 20 000 lux
Protections supply inverse polarity protection
output permanent short-circuit or over-load protection
degree of protection IP 65
Light-on / dark-on function see wiring diagram

To Place Order
Product Retro-reflex polarised lateral sensor
Reference BL - ( ) - 966 S
( ) output with cable 2m
(C0) output M8 socket without cable

Cable with M8 plug CM 82 - cable 2m


if required, please order CM 82 C - cable 2m with right angle connector
together with the sensor CM 85 - cable 5m

TYPES OF APPLICATIONS

Example 1
Pieces count at a conveyor output.

OIL
OIL
OIL
OIL

Example 2
Detection of shiny metallic cans.
Thru Beam Photoelectric Sensors
PHOTOELECTRIC SENSORS IN STANDARD HOUSING 12 30 V DC NPN O PNP OUTPUT
Miniature 18 mm tubular 18 Series
Operation LED aids installation
Models w/o pots for simple installation
Quick connect or integral cable
9-turn pot models

Identification code Wiring diagrams

BROWN
18 22 K M
SERIES 18 NPN BLACK

BLUE

NPN NO output
22 BROWN

NPN NC output
23 PNP BLACK

PNP NO output
24 BLUE

PNP NC output
25 BROWN

Emitter EMITTER 12 30 Vcc


21 DC BLUE
CONNECTOR OUTPUT M12

METAL HOUSING Connection with connector M12 (K)

AVAILABLE RECEVEIR EMITTER View of quadripole male connector.


1
SWITCHING DISTANCE 25 m
HYSTERESIS 10%
EMISSION - Infrared (875 m) 2 4
CONTACTS CONFIGURATION
NOMINAL VOLTAGE 12 30VDC (-15 /+10%) Available
Contacts numbers
1 2 3 4
RESIDUAL RIPPLE 10% (NO or NC) + - NO/NC
MAX. OUTPUT CURRENT 200 mA - 3 Emitter + -

ABSORPTION AT 30 VDC 15 mA
Note: the K plug is compatible with the following connectors:
VOLTAGE DROP (Sensor ON) 1.5V (I = 200 mA) - VAUDEHA, BINDER, HIRSCHMANN, LUMBERG, AMPHENOL-TUCHEL.
OPERATION LED Yellow
SWITCHING FREQUENCY 200 Hz
Accessories
RESPONSE TIME 5 mS
START UP DELAY 100 mS 90
Mirror
DEV90
SHORT CIRCUIT PROTECTION Present (self-resetting)
ELECTRIC PROTECTIONS Againts polarity reversal - inductive loads
TEMPERATURE LIMITS -10 +60 C 35 Object
to be
LIGHT IMMUNITY detected
10000 Lux (2)
PROTECTION DEGREE IP 67 (IP 65 for models with sensitivity adjustment)
CABLE LENGTH 2m
CABLE SECTION 3 x 0.25 mm2 2x 0.25 mm2 23

HOUSING MATERIAL Housing: nylon loaded with fiberglass - Lenses: methacrylate 13,5
8 4 2
WEIGHT - cable output - (connector output) - 110 g - (55 g) P18OTT

Note: for a proper use see norms at pages 6, 7 and 8. 23

Dimensions (mm) Characteristic curves


THRU BEAM
Distance X (m)
Configuration with cable Configuration with cable - Back view
55 15
LED visible through
transparence
16
LED visible through Cable output
M18 x 1

transparence 15
14
13
70 12 12
11
10
9
8
Configuration with connector K Configuration with sensitivity adjustment Y 7
6
55 15 LED visible through 5
transparence Receiver 4
LED visible through Sensitivity adjustment trimmer
M18 x 1

X
M12 x 1

3
transparence (9 turns)
2
Cable output
Emitter 1
70 12
40 30 20 10 0 10 20 30 40
Y (cm)

EMX INDUSTRIES INC.


Thru Beam Photoelectric Sensors
PHOTOELECTRIC SENSORS IN LONG HOUSING 24 230 V AC TRIAC NO AND NC OUTPUT
Short AC housing, only 80 mm 18 Series
Leakage <1.5 mA @ 220 V DC
Models w/o pots for simple installation
Models with 9-turn pot

Identification code Wiring diagrams

BROWN
18 27 R L1
WHITE 24 230 Vac
AC
SERIES 18 BLUE
N

TRIAC NO output
27 BROWN
L1

TRIAC NC output EMITTER 24 230 Vac


28 AC
Emitter BLUE
26 N

WARNING: Short circuit in the output is not possible. Wrong supply cables
SENSITIVITY ADJUSTMENT connections can irreparably damage the detector. Therefore sensors whose
output status is short-circuited will not be substituted under warranty.

AVAILABLE RECEIVER EMITTER CONNECTIONS IN PARALLEL


In parallel connections with multiple outputs, the maximum leakage
SWITCHING DISTANCE 5m current (<1,5 mA at 220 VAC) referring to the load and the supply
HYSTERESIS 10% should be taken into account when calculating the max. quantity
of connectable sensors.
EMISSION - Infrared (875 m) It is important in this connection that the sensors are connected
NOMINAL VOLTAGE 24 230VAC (-15 /+10%) at the same phase.
MAINS FREQUENCY 50 60 Hz
MAX. OUTPUT CURRENT 150 mA - Accessories
LEAKAGE CURRENT 1.5mA (at 220VAC) -
ABSORPTION 1W -
90
VOLTAGE DROP (Sensor ON) < 2.5 V DEV90 Mirror

OPERATION LED Yellow


SWITCHING FREQUENCY 10 Hz
35 Object
RESPONSE TIME 100 mS to be
START UP DELAY 300 mS detected

ELECTRIC PROTECTIONS Againts inductive loads


TEMPERATURE LIMITS -10 +60 C
LIGHT IMMUNITY 2000 Lux
23
PROTECTION DEGREE IP 67 (IP 65 for models with sensitivity adjustment)
CABLE LENGTH 2m 13,5
CABLE SECTION 3 x 0.35 mm2 2 x 0.25 mm2 8 4 2
P18OTT
HOUSING MATERIAL Housing: nylon loaded with fiberglass - Lenses: methacrylate
WEIGHT - cable output - 120 g 23

Note: for a proper use see norms at pages 6, 7 and 8.

Dimensions (mm) Characteristic curves


THRU BEAM
Configuration with cable Distance X (m)

65 15
LED visible through
transparence
16
M18 x 1

15
14
13
12
80 12 11
10
9
8
Y 7
Configuration with cable - Back view Configuration with sensitivity adjustment 6
5
Receiver 4
LED visible through Cable output LED visible through Sensitivity adjustment X 3
transparence transparence trimmer (9 turns) 2
Emitter 1
Cable output
40 30 20 10 0 10 20 30 40
Y (cm)

EMX INDUSTRIES INC.


Thru Beam Photoelectric Sensors
PHOTOELECTRIC SENSORS IN SQUARE HOUSING 12 30 V DC PROGRAMMABLE OUTPUT
Compact size, output and stability indicators FQ Series
Cost effective
M12 quick connect or integral cable
5 msec ON/OFF

Identification code Wiring diagrams


BROWN BROWN

NPN WHITE
PNP WHITE

FQ 03 K NO
BLACK
BLUE NO
BLACK
BLUE

BLUE BLUE
SERIES FQ
NPN WHITE
BLACK
PNP WHITE
BLACK
NC BROWN NC BROWN

Programmable output - Receiver


03 BROWN

Emitter
04 EMETTER
BLUE

CONNECTOR OUTPUT M12 Note: For series or parallel connections see notes at page 6.

Connection with connector M12 (K)


AVAILABLE RECEIVER EMITTER
1
SWITCHING DISTANCE 20 m CONTACTS CONFIGURATION
Contacts numbers
HYSTERESIS 10% 2 4
Output
1 2 3 4

EMISSION - Infrared (875 m) NPN NO


NPN NC
NO
NC
NOMINAL VOLTAGE 12 30VDC (-15 /+10%) PNP NO NO
3 PNP NC NC
RESIDUAL RIPPLE 10% Emitter
View of quadripole
OUTPUT NPN or PNP (programmable) - male connector. Note: the K plug is compatible with the following
CONTACT NO or NC (programmable) - connectors: VAUDEHA, BINDER, HIRSCHMANN,
LUMBERG, AMPHENOL-TUCHEL.
MAX. OUTPUT CURRENT 200 mA -
ABSORPTION AT 30 VDC 25 mA Sensitivity adjustment
VOLTAGE DROP (Sensor ON) 1.8 V (l = 100 mA) - Green LED Yellow LED
YELLOW LED Output indicator - 1) SENSITIVITY INCREASE
Screw the trimmer towards

MIN.
GREEN LED Stability indicator Supply indicator right towards position +

MAX.

OUT
POW.
SENSITIVITY ADJUSTEMENT Trimmer 1 turn - 2) SENSITIVITY DECREASE Sensitivity adjustment trimmer
SWITCHING FREQUENCY 200 Hz Screw the trimmer towards
left towards position Note: the trimmer just needs one turn.
RESPONSE TIME 5 mS
START UP DELAY 100 mS Stability signal led
SHORT CIRCUIT PROTECTION Present (self-resetting)
Range of
ELECTRIC PROTECTIONS Againts polarity reversal - inductive loads received
signal

TEMPERATURE LIMITS -20 +60 C 110% Switch limit of stability green LED

100% Switch limit of output yellow LED

LIGHT IMMUNITY > 10.000 Lux (1)


Time
PROTECTION DEGREE IP 65 Yellow LED

ON
CABLE LENGTH 2m
OFF Time
CABLE SECTION 4 x 0.25 mm2 2 x 0.25 mm2 Green LED

HOUSING MATERIAL Housing: ABS - Lenses: methacrylate ON

WEIGHT - cable output - (connector output) - 160 g - (120 g) OFF Time

The stability signal LED shows the range of received signal and helps the
(1)
Determined with halogen tungsten lamp 3000 K. photoelectric sensor to line up.
Note: for a proper use see norms at pages 6, 7 and 8. A photoelectric sensor works in stability condition when the received light
signal range is 10% ahead the switching limit of output.

Dimensions (mm) Characteristic curves


40
50 18 18 30,5 EMITTER RECEIVER THRU BEAM
5 Mounting 21
4,5

Distance X (m)
bracket 17
5

(supplied 16
accessory) 15
24,5

4,5
50

53

14
13
15,5

12
R 2,25
5

11
5 4.5 10
DIFFUSE
20

POLARIZED
REFLECTIVE RETRO 9
Y
Configuration with cable RETRO
REFLECTIVE
REFLECTIVE
10
8
56 Receiver
7
6
Configuration with
1,5

25 15,25 2,5 5
connector K X 4
3
13,5
20

6,5
11

Emitter
2
M12 x 1

1
4,5

6,5 25 12 9 2

56
60 40 20 0 20 40 60
14
Rotating connector - coming soon - Y (cm)

EMX INDUSTRIES INC.


Thru Beam Photoelectric Sensors
PHOTOELECTRIC SENSORS IN SQUARE HOUSING 18 230 V AC - DC RELAY OUTPUT
Wide input voltage FQ Series
3A relay SPDT
M12 quick connect or integral cable
Output and Stability indicators

Identification code Wiring diagrams


BROWN
R
L
FQ 07 K E
L
WHITE
RED
A BLACK
SERIES FQ Y BLUE
N
Relay output Normal OFF - Receiver
07 BROWN

Relay output Normal ON - Receiver


07A EMETTER
Emitter BLUE
08
CONNECTOR OUTPUT M12 Note: in case of inductive loads it is necessary to connect one diode
in antiparallel at the edges of the load.

AVAILABLE RECEIVER EMITTER Connection with connector M12 (K)


SWITCHING DISTANCE 15 m
HYSTERESIS 10% 1

EMISSION - Infrared (875 m)


NOMINAL VOLTAGE 18 230V AC - DC (-15 /+10%) 2 4 View of quadripole
MAINS FREQUENCY 50 60 Hz male connector.

OUTPUT Relay (10 x 106 ops. min.) -


MAX. OUTPUT CURRENT 3A 30 V AC - 1A 220 V AC (90W, 360 VA) - 3

ABSORPTION 2.5 VA
CONTACTS CONFIGURATION
YELLOW LED Output indicator - Output
Contacts numbers
1 2 3 4
GREEN LED Supply indicator Relay L COM N NO
Emitter L N
SENSITIVITY ADJUSTEMENT Trimmer 1 turn -
SWITCHING FREQUENCY 10 Hz Note: the K plug is compatible with the following connectors: VAUDEHA,
RESPONSE TIME 100 mS BINDER, HIRSCHMANN, LUMBERG, AMPHENOL-TUCHEL.
START UP DELAY 300 mS
TEMPERATURE LIMITS - 20 +60 C Sensitivity adjustment
LIGHT IMMUNITY > 10.000 Lux (1)
PROTECTION DEGREE IP 65 1) SENSITIVITY INCREASE
CABLE LENGTH Screw the trimmer towards right towards position +
2m
CABLE SECTION 5 x 0.30 mm2 2 x 0.25 mm2 2) SENSITIVITY DECREASE
HOUSING MATERIAL Housing: ABS - Lenses: methacrylate Screw the trimmer towards left towards position

WEIGHT - cable output - (connector output) - 180 g - (125 g) Green LED = supply

(1)
MIN.

Determined with halogen tungsten lamp 3000 K.


MAX.

Note: for a proper use see norms at pages 6, 7 and 8.


POW.
OUT

Sensitivity adjustment Yellow LED = output


trimmer
Note: the trimmer just needs one turn.

Dimensions (mm) Characteristic curves


40
50 18 18 30,5 EMITTER RECEIVER THRU BEAM
5 Mounting 21
4,5

Distance X (m)
bracket 17
5

(supplied 16
accessory) 15
24,5

4,5
50

53

14
13
12
15,5

R 2,25
5

11
5 4.5 10
DIFFUSE
20

POLARIZED
REFLECTIVE RETRO
9
Y
Configuration with cable RETRO REFLECTIVE 8
REFLECTIVE 10
56 Receiver
7
6
Configuration with
1,5

25 15,25 2,5 5
connector K X 4
3
13,5
20

6,5
11

Emitter
2
M12 x 1

1
4,5

6,5 25 12 9 2
60 40 20 0 20 40 60
14 56
Y (cm)
Rotating connector - coming soon -

EMX INDUSTRIES INC.


Thru Beam Photoelectric Sensors
PH. SENSORS IN RECTANGULAR HOUSING 12 240 V DC 24 240 V AC WITH TIMER RELAY OUTPUT
Wide range World Wide Power Supply
Rectangular compact size
FW Series
Multi-function timer:
- ON/OFF delay - One shot-four functions
- 3A relay SPDT - Terminal block wiring

Identification code Wiring diagrams

Time regulation
FW 07 T (on request)
LED
Sensitivity adjustment DIP switches
SERIES FW
12 - 240 VDC
24 - 240 VAC
Relay output - Receiver
07 50/60 Hz

Emitter 30 VDC
08 250 VAC
Max. 3A
TIME DELAY 1 7 sec.
Relay OFF

AVAILABLE RECEIVER EMITTER


SWITCHING DISTANCE 20 m (1)
HYSTERESIS 10%
EMISSION - Infrared (875 m)
NOMINAL VOLTAGE 12 240VDC / 24 240 VAC (-15 /+10%)
Timing diagrams
NET FREQUENCY 45 60 Hz
MODELS WITHOUT TIMER
OUTPUT Relay (40 x 106 mec. op. -5 x 106 elect. op.) - OUTPUT DIAGRAM
N. DIP. SWITCHES POSITION OBJECT
MAX OUTPUT CURRENT 3A 250VAC - 3A 30VDC - Light
impulse

ABSORPTION 2W (2.5 VA) 1


Output ON
(2=NO; 3=NC)
Outoput
status

YELLOW LED Present - 2


Output OFF Outoput
(2=NC; 3=NO) status
GREEN LED - Present
MODELS WITH TIMER
SENSITIVITY ADJUSTEMENT Present - DIP. SWITCHES POSITION OBJECT OUTPUT DIAGRAM
N.
TIME REGULATION 0.1 7 s 2 s (only models with timer) - Light
impulse
SWITCHING FREQUENCY 20 Hz On operate Outoput
1
output ON status
RESPONSE TIME 50 ms -
On operate Outoput
2
START UP DELAY 300 ms - output OFF status

On release Outoput
-25 +55C
3
TEMPERATURE LIMITS output ON status

On release Outoput
4
LIGHT IMMUNITY 5.000 Lux (2) output OFF status

One shot trailing edge Outoput


PROTECTION DEGREE IP 67 5
output ON status

CONNECTIONS Screw 6 One shot trailing edge


output OFF
Outoput
status

CABLE GUIDE PG 13.5 7


One shot leading edge
output ON
Outoput
status

HOUSING MATERIAL Polycarbonate 8 One shot leading edge Outoput


output OFF status
WEIGHT (Approximately) 110 g T = Fixed delay

(1)
Determined with a white mat paper cm 20 x 20.
(2)
Determined with halogen tungsten lamp 3000 K.
Note: for a proper use see norms at pages 6, 7 and 8.

Dimensions (mm) Characteristic curves


2,5

81 25

ON
PHOTOELECTRIC EMITTER-RECEIVER THRU BEAM

I
Pg. 13.5

I S
SENSOR Distance X (m)
20
4,3

67,5
65

V
18

R E 16
5

14
7 40 19,5 Pg. 13.5

IN
12

Y 10
3 6 12,5
4,4

R 3,25 8
Receiver

4,4 6
X
0
R4 4
59,5

52
40
4,4
30

Emitter 2
MOUNTING BRACKET
18

4,4
(SUPPLIED ACCESSORY)
6

40 30 20 10 0 10 20 30 40
6
6,5

10 Y (cm)
52

28 EMX INDUSTRIES INC.


SENSOR FOR TRANSPARENT PRODUCTS BAT 956 S

BAT 1 956 S - BAT 2 956 S


Sensing distance on reflector 50x50 mm :
BAT 1 : 0-80 cm - Reflector at 80 cm max.
BAT 2 : 0-140 cm - Reflector between
40 cm and 140 cm
Supply : 10 / 30 VDC
Output : PNP / NPN
On-delay or off-delay timer

Description :
Dimensions
Simple and quick set-up
M8 plug - 4 points
for self-teach

Coaxial emitter-receiver
Optical axis
30

Immunity to reflections

18
interferences

Adjustable timer 4.1


DIN Rail Mounting
25.4 20
Alignment indicator
LO-DO

SET
13

Dirty optics indicator


t
t

Keyboard lock 60

Remote input for self-


teach Wiring Connections
Direct or inverse output
Brown
10 - 30 VDC
Output : PNP / NPN N
Black Output 100 mA max.
Microprocessor
M8 plug P
Blue
0V
Polycarbonate strong White Remote input

housing

Applications : Visualisation and Keyboard

Through-beam on a - Sensitivity decrease - Sensitivity increase


- On delay - Off delay - Light on - Dark on
conveyor : glass - Decrease timer adjustment - Increase timer adjustment
- Automatic threshold set-up
Detection of transparent - Special functions key

parts (glass, PET,).


LO-DO

SET
+

t
t

Bottle detection on blow


moulding machinery (PET, - Detection
- Key depressed
glass, ). - Keyboard locked - Dirty optics
- Detection limit
- Alignment indicator
- Timer ON
SENSOR FOR TRANSPARENT PRODUCTS BAT 956 S

Technical Information
Supply voltage 10 / 30 VDC
ripple < 10% within specified limits
consumption < 45 mA
Response time ton or toff < 500 s
switching frequency < 1 KHz
Output max. nominal intensity 100 mA
residual voltage at 100 mA <2V
residual voltage at 10 mA <1V
Emission LED red
modulation frequency 8 KHz
Timer range 0 to 5 s with 11 increments
increment duration first increment : 40 ms, following increments : 500 ms
Temperature operating 0 to 50 C
storage -20 to 80 C
External light immunity incandescent light 10 000 lux
sunlight 20 000 lux
Protections supply inverse polarity protection
output permanent short-circuit or over-load protection
degree of protection IP 67 (connector on place)
Remote input on voltage < 1.4 V
off voltage > 3 V

To Place Order
Product Sensor for transparent products
Reference BAT 1 - ( ) - 956 S
BAT 2 - ( ) - 956 S
Type (C0) output M8 plug without cable
(cable on request) (C2) output M8 plug with cable 2m
(C5) output M8 plug with cable 5m

TYPES OF APPLICATIONS
Example 1
Detection of a plastic film.

Example 2
Detection of transparent bottles (glass, PET,).
Optical Bracket Photoelectric Sensors
OPTICAL BRACKETS 12 30 V DC NPN OR PNP NO - NC OUTPUT
5 mm wide X 29 mm deep slot
9-turn sensitivity adjuster FF Series
Operation LED indicator
2 m integral cable
Plastic housing
Infrared emitter
Identification code Wiring diagrams

FF 01 BROWN NO NC

BLACK
SERIES FW
NPN
WHITE
NO - NC
BLUE
NPN NO - NC output
01
PNP NO - NC output
02 BROWN
BLACK
PNP
WHITE
NO - NC
BLUE
CLEF 5 mm
NC NO
EMISSION Infrared (875 m)
NOMINAL VOLTAGE 12 30V DC (-15 /+10%)
RESIDUAL RIPPLE 10%
MAX. OUTPUT CURRENT 200 mA Adjustment
ABSORPTION AT 30 V DC 30 mA
VOLTAGE DROP (Sensor ON) < 1.5 V (l = 100 A) I MAX
1) NO SENSING OBJECT LED OFF
OPERATION LED Present Turn the trimmer clockwise (9
full turns) to confirm the status
SENSITIVITY ADJUSTEMENT Trimmer 9 turns (YELLOW LED is off).

SWITCHING FREQUENCY 200 Hz


2) SENSING OBJECT
RESPONSE TIME 5 mS Position the object to be detected LED ON
A MAX
and check the YELLOW LED is on.
START UP DELAY 200 mS If the YELLOW LED is off, turn the
trimmer anti-clockwise and find point
SHORT CIRCUIT PROTECTION Present (self-resetting) A where the YELLOW LED is on.

ELECTRIC PROTECTIONS Againts polarity reversal - inductive loads


3) NO SENSING OBJECT LED ON MAX
A
TEMPERATURE LIMITS - 10 +60 C Remove the object and turn the
trimmer anti-clockwise and find point
LIGHT IMMUNITY 2.000 Lux B where the YELLOW LED is on. B

PROTECTION DEGREE IP 65
MAX
CABLE LENGTH 2m 4) OPTIMUM A
Set the trimmer to half way OPTIMUM
CABLE SECTION 4 x 0.25 mm2 between ponts A and B for
B
the adjustment is completed.
HOUSING MATERIAL Housing: nylon loaded with fiberglass - Lenses: methacrylate
WEIGHT (Approximatevy) 110 g Note: for proper use see norms at pages 6, 7 and 8.

Dimensions (mm) Sensitivity adjustment

1) SENSITIVITY INCREASE
4 LED Screw the trimmer towards right toward position +
4

2) SENSITIVITY DECREASE
Sensing axis

LED

Screw the trimmer towards left toward position


19

INFRA
Sensitivity adjustment

OUT
32

40

55

6 LED
5
16

INFRA

+
REG.

REG.
OUT

29

6 55
Sensitivity adjustment trimmer
15
Side view
View from above Note: the trimmer needs 9 turns.

EMX INDUSTRIES INC.


Optical Bracket Photoelectric Sensors
TEACH-IN OPTICAL BRACKETS 12 30 V DC PROGRAMMABLE OUTPUT
3 mm gap X 60 mm deep for flexible installation FF Series
Teach-in standard or sensitive calibration automatically sets sensitivity values
Fast response time: 10 K Hz switching frequency
Remote Teach-in allows fast target changeover by the host
Applications include: Translucent material - Double detection - Edge detection

Identification code Wiring diagrams

WHITE

WHITE
*
FF 10 K2 BROWN BLUE

NPN BLACK NPN BLACK

SERIES FF NO BLUE NC BROWN

WHITE

WHITE
PROGRAMMABLE OUTPUT
BROWN BLUE

PNP BLACK PNP BLACK

CONNECTOR OUTPUT M8 4 WIRES NO BLUE NC BROWN

Note: If the white wire is not used for external teach-in, connect it to ground.
* Available only with K2 connector output
CLEF 3 mm Wiring diagrams with M8 connector (K)
EMISSION Infrared (875 m)
2 4
NOMINAL VOLTAGE 12 30V DC (-15 /+10%) View of
RESIDUAL RIPPLE 10% quadripole
1 3 male connector.
OUTPUT Programmable NPN or PNP
MAX OUTPUT CURRENT 100 mA
CONTACTS CONFIGURATION
ABSORPTION AT 30 V DC 40 mA Contacts numbers
Output
VOLTAGE DROP (Sensor ON) 2 V (l = 100 mA) 1 2 3 4

RED LED Memorization - Standard teach-in


NPN/PNP NO White + Out
NPN/PNP NC + White Out
GREEN LED Object presence/absence - Thin teach-in Note: Use only the female connector type K2FDV. If the contact n. 3
SWITCHING FREQUENCY 10.000 Hz (white wire) is not used for external teach-in, connect it to ground.
RESPONSE TIME 100 S
START UP DELAY 100 mS Dimensions (mm)
80
SHORT CIRCUIT PROTECTION Present (self-resetting)
5 15 60
ELECTRIC PROTECTIONS Againts polarity reversal 4,2

TEMPERATURE LIMITS -20 +60C


8 15

12
6
LIGHT IMMUNITY 3.000 Lux 3

37,5
6

Optical axis

PROTECTION DEGREE IP 65
22,5

CABLE SECTION M8 4 wires connector


HOUSING MATERIAL Anodised aluminium 80

WEIGHT (Approximatevy) 85 g
12

Adjustment
STANDARD TEACH-IN (TO DETECT STANDARD TAGS) LED DI STATO
PHOTOELECTRIC SENSOR POSITION 1) Set the optical bracket on the tag support. RED LED BLINKING THROUGH 2 SECONDS

2) Push once the button: the red led light will be blinking through 2 seconds.

RED LED ON
3) Push again the adjustment button and keep it pushed till the definitive
switching of the red led (memorization achieved).

WARNING: The photoelectric sensor teach-in must be executed Warning: if during the adjustment the red led and the green led are blinking RED AND GREEN LEDS BLINKING
by placing the photoelectric sensor on the tag traslucid support at the same moment, it means that a short-circuit occurs at the output or that
(no directly on the tag which has to be detected). the tag support is too opaque.

THIN TEACH-IN (TO DETECT TRASLUCIDE TAGS) LED DI STATO


PHOTOELECTRIC SENSOR POSITION 1) Set the optical bracket on the tag support. GREEN LED BLINKING THROUGH 2 SECONDS

2) Push twice the button: the green led light will be blinking through 2 seconds.

RED LED ON
3) Push again the adjustment button and keep it pushed till the definitive
switching of the red led (memorization achieved).

Warning: if during the adjustment the red led and the green led are blinking RED AND GREEN LEDS BLINKING
WARNING: The photoelectric sensor teach-in must be executed
by placing the photoelectric sensor on the tag traslucid support at the same moment, it means that a short-circuit occurs at the output or that
(no directly on the tag which has to be detected). the tag support is too opaque.

The same teach-in mode achieved by pushing the button can be also obtained by connecting the white wire to the positive (external teach-in), following the same steps envisaged
for teach-in through the button. For a correct installation see norms at pages 6, 7 and 8.

EMX INDUSTRIES INC.


Optical Fibers Photoelectric Sensors
OPTICAL FIBERS PHOTOELECTRIC SENSORS 1230 VDC 3 WIRES PROGRAMMABLE OUTPUT
Hight sensing distance
Supply 1030 VDC AF Series
Programmable output NPN-PNP
Friendly adjustment by KEY +/-

Identification code Wiring diagrams

WHITE Connect to +: light on mode


Connect to -: dark off mode
BROWN
+
AF 10 K2 NPN BLACK

BLUE
-
SERIES AF
WHITE Connect to +: light on mode
Connect to -: dark off mode
Programmable output NPN-PNP
BROWN
+
Connector output M8 4 poles BLACK
PNP
BLUE
-

Product description Connection with connector M8 (K2)

2 3
EMISSION Red
View of
NOMINAL VOLTAGE 1230VDC quadripole
1 4 male connector.
RESIDUAL RIPPLE < 10%
OUTPUT NPN - PNP (PROGRAMMABLE)
MAX OUTPUT CURRENT 100 mA CONTACTS CONFIGURATION
ABSORPTION AT 30 VDC < 40 mA Output
Contacts numbers
1 2 3 4
VOLTAGE DROP (Sensor ON) < 2 V (I= 100 mA)
NPN/PNP light NO - + + Out
YELLOW LED present NPN/PNP dark OFF - - + Out
SENSITIVITY ADJUSTMENT by key +/-
SWITCHING FREQUENCY 1000 Hz
RESPONSE TIME 500 S
Visualisation and keyboard
START UP DELAY 300 ms
SHORT CIRCUIT PROTECTION present (self resetting)
ELECTRIC PROTECTION Againts polarity reversal - inductive loads
TEMPERATURE LIMITS 0 +60 C
LIGHT IMMUNITY 10000 Lux (1)
PROTECTION DEGREE IP 65 Detection led
CABLE LENGTH 2m Sensitivity display
CABLE SECTION 3 x 0.25 mm2
Keyboard lock
HOUSING MATERIAL ABS
Sensitivity increase
WEIGHT 100 g
Sensitivity decrease
(1)
Determined with halogen tungsten lamp 3000 K.

Dimensions

Cable or M8 plug - 4 points


13
30

63
4.1

DIN Rall mounting 25.4 20

EMX INDUSTRIES INC.


GLASS FIBRE OPTIC SENSOR AFV 946 S

AFV 946 S
Sensing distance with glass fibre
See technical informations
on sheet Glass Fibre Optics
Supply : 10 / 30 VDC
Output : PNP / NPN
On-delay or off-delay timer standard

Description :
Dimensions
Simple and quick set-up
Cable or M8 plug - 4 points
for self-teach (standard
and sensitive mode)
Adjustable timer
30

Alignment indicator
Release clip
Dirty optics indicator
4.1
Keyboard lock DIN Rail Mounting
25.4 20

Remote input for self-


LO-DO

SET
13

teach (sensitive mode)


+

t
t

Direct or inverse output 60


Output : PNP / NPN
Cable or M8 plug Wiring Connections
Polycarbonate strong
housing Brown
10 - 30 VDC
N
Black Output 100 mA max.
Microprocessor

Applications : Blue
P

0V
Remote input
Position or presence White

control of parts on assem-


bling or conditionning
machine.
Visualisation and Keyboard
Detection of presence of
parts in a plastic mould. - Sensitivity decrease - Sensitivity increase
- On delay - Off delay - Light on - Dark on
Detection under extreme - Decrease timer adjustment - Increase timer adjustment

conditions. - Automatic threshold set-up


- Special functions key

Glass fibre use in high-


LO-DO

SET

temperatured surroun-
+

t
t

dings (output of furnace).


- Detection
- Key depressed
- Keyboard locked - Dirty optics
- Detection limit
- Alignment indicator
- Timer ON
GLASS FIBRE OPTIC SENSOR AFV 946 S

Technical Information
Supply voltage 10 / 30 VDC
ripple < 10% within specified limits
consumption < 40 mA
Response time ton or toff < 500 s
switching frequency < 1 KHz
Output max. nominal intensity 100 mA
residual voltage at 100 mA <2V
residual voltage at 10 mA <1V
Emission LED red
modulation frequency 8 KHz
Timer range 0 to 5 s with 11 increments
increment duration first increment : 40 ms, following increments : 500 ms
Temperature operating 0 to 60 C
storage -20 to 80 C
External light immunity incandescent light 10 000 lux
sunlight 20 000 lux
Protections supply inverse polarity protection
output permanent short-circuit or over-load protection
degree of protection IP 65
Remote input on voltage < 1,4 V
off voltage > 3 V

To Place Order
Product Glass fibre optic sensor
Reference AFV 946 S : cable 2m
AFV CO 946 S : output M8 plug

Cable with M8 plug CM 82 - cable 2m


if required, please order CM 82 C - cable 2m with right angle connector
together with the sensor CM 85 - cable 5m
CM 85 C - cable 2m with right angle connector

TYPES OF APPLICATIONS

Example 1
Detection of presence of parts (here, lids) on a conveyor.

Example 2
Detection by glass fibre of small parts.
GLASS FIBRE OPTIC SENSOR AFV 954 R

AFV 954 R
Sensing distance with glass fibre
See technical information
on sheet Glass Fibre Optics
Supply : 20 to 250 V AC/DC
Output : relay
ON-delay + OFF-delay timer

Description :
Dimensions
Simple and quick set-up
for self-teach (standard
29 80
and sensitive mode)
Double adjustable timer

18
Alignment indicator

60
Dirty optics indicator
3
Keyboard lock

5.5
Direct or inverse output
10.8 30
Output : relay Fibres
connectors DIN Rail Mounting
Connection on screw cable seal 4 to 10 mm
terminal
Polycarbonate strong Wiring Connections
housing
RELAY (R)

Applications : NF C NO

Position or presence Supply


control of parts on assem-
bling or conditionning Terminal 250 V - 1.5 mm2
machine.
Detection of presence of
parts in a plastic mould.
Visualisation and Keyboard
Detection under extreme - Sensitivity decrease
- On delay - Off delay
- Sensitivity increase
- Light on - Dark on
conditions. - Decrease timer adjustment - Increase timer adjustment
- Automatic threshold set-up
Glass fibre use in high- - Special functions key

temperatured surroun-
LO-DO

SET
+

dings (furnace output).


t
t

Terminal cover
- Detection

In case of a short-circuit on the - Dirty optics


output, both red and green LEDs - Detection limit
flash - Alignment indicator
- Key depressed
- Keyboard locked - Timer ON
- Timer indicator
GLASS FIBRE OPTIC SENSOR AFV 954 R

Technical Information
Supply voltage 20 / 250 V AC/DC
consumption 2 VA
Response time ton or toff 20 ms
switching frequency 25 Hz
Output relay change over type
U nominal : 250 V
permanent max. I : 3 A
Emission LED red
modulation frequency 400 Hz
Timer type rettriggerable - ON-delay / OFF-delay
range - increment duration 0 to11s in 23 steps of 50ms, then 0.5s steps
Temperature operating 0 to 60 C
storage -20 to 80 C
External light immunity incandescent light 10 000 lux
sunlight 10 000 lux
Protections supply
output
degree of protection IP 65 and IP 67
Remote input on
off

To Place Order
Product Glass fibre optic sensor
Reference AFV - 954 R - 20 / 250 V AC/DC

TYPE OF APPLICATIONS

Example 1
Detection of presence of parts (here, lids) on a
conveyor.

Example 2
Detection by glass fibre of small parts.
GLASS FIBRE OPTIC SENSOR AFV 966 S

AFV 966 S
Sensing distance with glass fibre
See technical information
on sheet Glass Fibre Optics
Supply : 10 / 30 VDC
Output : PNP / NPN
Friendly adjustment by key + / -
Bargraph

Description :
Dimensions
Simple adjustment
Cable or M8 socket - 4 points
Sensitivity bargraph
Maximum and minimum
30

sensitivity indication
Keyboard lock
Release clip
Direct or inverse output 4.1
DIN Rail Mounting
25.4 20
Output : PNP / NPN

Cable or M8 socket
13

Polycarbonate strong 60
housing

Wiring Diagram

Applications : Brown
10 - 30 VDC
N
Position or presence Black
Microprocessor Output 100 mA max.
control of parts on assem- P

bling or conditionning Blue


0V
machine. White
Connected to + : light-on mode
Connected to - : dark-on mode
Detection of presence of
parts in a plastic mould.
Detection under extreme Display and Keyboard
conditions.
Glass fibre use in high- - Sensitivity decrease - Sensitivity increase

temperatured surroun-
- Keyboard lock
dings (output of furnace).
+

- Detection
In case of a short-circuit,
both red and green
LEDs flash
- Sensitivity display
GLASS FIBRE OPTIC SENSOR AFV 966 S

Technical Information
Supply voltage 10 / 30 VDC
ripple < 10% within specified limits
consumption < 40 mA
Response time ton or toff < 500 s
switching frequency < 1 KHz
Output max. nominal intensity 100 mA
residual voltage at 100 mA <2V
residual voltage at 10 mA <1V
Emission LED red
modulation frequency 8 KHz
Temperature operating 0 to 60 C
storage -20 to 80 C
External light immunity incandescent light 10 000 lux
sunlight 20 000 lux
Protections supply inverse polarity protection
output permanent short-circuit or over-load protection
degree of protection IP 65
Light-on / dark-on function see wiring diagram

To Place Order
Product Glass fibre optic sensor
Reference AFV - ( ) - 966 S
( ) output by cable 2m
(C0) output M8 socket without cable

Cable with M8 plug CM 82 - cable 2m


if required, please order CM 82 C - cable 2m with right angle connector
together with the sensor CM 85 - cable 5m

TYPES OF APPLICATIONS

Example 1
Detection of presence of parts (here, lids) on a
conveyor.

Example 2
Detection by glass fibre of small parts.
GLASS FIBRE OPTIC FV

FV
Sensing distance : 80 mm in reflective mode
Sensing distance : 200 mm in through-beam mode

Usable amplifiers : AFV 954 R


AFV 946 S
AFV 966 S

Description :
Detection Chart
Glass fibre 400 strands
per mm2

Useful diametre of the


REFLECTIVE 100% D THROUGH-BEAM 100% D
fibre 1,2 mm MODE MODE

Sensing distances given On screen


30x30 mm 50 50
for a fibre length up to White
1 metre

mm mm mm mm
15 10 5 5 10 15 45 30 15 15 30 45

Applications :

Detection in a high-tem-
peratured environment Permissible Bending Radius
(up to 250).

S Type M Type T Type


Detection in corrosive
environment.

Application requiring high


10 mm 20 mm 30 mm
performances.

Technical Informations
Fibre FV 400 strands 50 glass
Sheath standard (S) PVC + thermo polyolefine
reinforced metal (M) metallic spiral+ polyolefine
high-temperature (T) flexible INOX
Detection tips nickel brass
Operating temperature S Type -25 to + 60
M Type -25 to +120
T Type -25 to +250
GLASS FIBRE OPTIC FV

Reflective Mode - P

SENSING
REFERENCE DISTANCE
(mm)

M4 6,5
Sheath Head Long.
Head D

{
61
PSD
101
FV - P MD 80
151
9 10 Useful fibre1 mm PTD
201
(D = straight)
M4
Head L
6

11
20

6,5

{
61
PSL
101
FV - P ML 80
151
Useful fibre1 mm PTL
201
(L = lateral)

Head A

2,5 M4 6,5

{
61
PSA
101 80
FV - P MA
20 9
151
10 Useful fibre1 mm PTA
201
(A = long)

Head C
2,5 M4 6,5

{
61
PSC
101
FV - P MC 80
151
89 9 10 Useful fibre1 mm PTC
201
(C = appliable)

25 10
ACCESSORIES
Ref. 1120 10
Optics for punctual
reading of marks, 6,5
contrasts, faults,
35 30
(Usable on fibre
head D only)
Ref. 1125 30
8,5

Material : Anodized aluminium


Glass lens
GLASS FIBRE OPTIC FV

Through-Beam Mode - ER

SENSING
REFERENCE DISTANCE
(mm)
Sheath Head Long.
M4 5
Head D

{
61
ER S D
101
FV - ER M D 200
151
9 10 Useful fibre1 mm ER T D
201
(D = straight)
M4
Head L
6
14

11
4

20

6,5
3,5

{
61
ER S L
101
FV - ER M L 200
151
Useful fibre1 mm ER T L
201
(L = lateral)

2,5 M4 5
Head A

{
61
ER S A
101
FV - ER M A 200
20
151
9 10 Useful fibre1 mm ER T A
201
(A = long)

2,5 M4 5
Head C

{
61
ER S C
101
FV - ER M C 200
151
89 9 10 Useful fibre1 mm ER T C
201
(C = appliable)

ACCESSORIES 18

Optics sold by pair. Ref. 1121 800


To be screwed in the end of the 5
(70 max.)
fibres (head D) in order to increa-
se the sensing distance. 20

Ref. 1124 3000


(250 max.)
8,5
17 11

Ref. 1122 800


6,5 (70 max.)
13

Ref. 1123 3000


8 (70 max.)
15
GLASS FIBRE OPTIC FV

Attenuation Curves

0 0

10
(%)

(%)
ATTENUATION

ATTENUATION
20 -25
30
40 -50

0 1 2 3 4 m 0 1 2 3 4 m
FIBRES LENGTH FIBRES LENGTH

Attenuation vs Length Attenuation vs Length


THOUGH-BEAM MODE REFLECTIVE MODE

0 1
FACTEUR DE CORRECTION
(%)

-10
ATTENUATION

Wood, Beige Pasteboard

Black Paper

0.5
Raw Aluminium
White Paper

Raw Steel

-50

0 10 20 mm 0
RAYON DE COURBURE

Influence of the Bending Radius Influence of the Material

To Place Order
FV - ER S L - 101

TYPE LENGTH
Glass SHEATH HEAD
Fibre P - Reflective 61 - 60 cm
S - Standard D - Straight
Mode 101 - 1 m
M - Reinforced Metal L - Lateral
ER - Through-
T - High-Temperature A - Long 151 - 1,5 m
Beam
Mode C - Appliable 201 - 2 m
Plastic Optical Fibers
Sensing distance: 80 mm Diffuse Reflective
Sensing distance: 200 mm Thru Beam
FP Series
Use with amplifier AF10
Identification code Optical fibers adjustment procedures
1) SENSITIVITY ADJUSTMENT
Even after the tuning, sensitivity may be slightly changed by
FP FTL 000 the object to be sensed and by environmental factors.
Since the reflectivity changes according to the object, adjustment
must be carried out using the object to be detected.
SERIES FP Once the adjustment is completed, do not change the fixing
or the bending radius.
Make sure adjustment has been carried out correctly.
THRU BEAM
FTL 2) OPTICAL FIBERS
DIFFUSE REFLECTIVE Plastic fibers can be cut with the proper fiber cutter in the
FDL desired length.
MODEL IDENTIFICATION Cut the fiber before connecting them, and be sure that the cut
is perfect in order to avoid decrease of sensitivity.
Do not use the same cutting hole for more than one cut.
3) FIBER FIXING
Use the supplied nuts and washers. When screwing pay
Diffuse reflective selection table attention not to damage the fiber with excessive forcing.

CABLE SWITCHING TYPE OF FIXING TORQUE


CODE LENGTH DIMENSIONS DISTANCE FIBER M3
M4 6 Kgf - cm MAX.

4 M6 2 x 2,2
M5 10 Kgf - cm MAX.

FPFDL010 2000 80 mm
When fixing the smooth (not threaded) type of fiber, use a M3
Lenght 2 m
max. screw and do not exceed torque force of kg/cm 2 max.
4 13 Useful fibre 1 mm Screw

4) BENDING RADIUS
M 2,5 M3 2x1 Bending radius must not be less than
25 mm in order to avoid a reduction of sensibility.
FPFDL110 2000 30 mm
Lenght 2 m Fibers must not bear excessive mechanical, tension or
3 11 Useful fibre 0,5 mm compression loads. Do not let them be dirty or scratched,
should it happen, clean them with a clean tissue to prevent
defects in the functioning do not set photoelectric sensors and
fibers in the following locations:
- dusty locations
1,5
1 - corrosive atmosphere
FPFDL100 2000 10 mm - locations where oil, water or chemicals are present
Lenght 2 m - where sunlight or foreign light may directly reach the receiver.
12 Useful fibre 0,25 mm

Caracteristic curves
1,8 M3 2x1 Diffuse Reflective
FPFDL310 2000 30 mm Plastic fibre 1 mm Plastic fibre 0.5 mm
Lenght 2 m
90 11 Useful fibre 0,5 mm
100% D 100% D

50 50

Thru Beam selection table


mm mm mm mm

CODE CABLE DIMENSIONS SWITCHING TYPE OF 9 6 3 3 6 9 10 5 5 10

LENGTH DISTANCE FIBER

M 2,5 M4 2,2 Thru Beam


Plastic fibre 1 mm Plastic fibre 0.5 mm
FPFTL000 2000 200 mm
Lenght 2 m
3 11 Useful fibre 1 mm
100% D 100% D

1,5 50 50
1

FPFTL200 2000 100 mm


Lenght 2 m mm mm mm mm
60 40 20 20 40 60 12 8 4 4 8 12
12 Useful fibre 0,5 mm

Accessory (lens for Thru Beam fibres)


1,8 M4 2,2 8

FPFTL301 2000 200 mm


Lenght 2 m Code: FPFTLLEN
90 11 Useful fibre 1 mm
Used with FP FTL 000
increase range up to 1200 mm 4

EMX INDUSTRIES INC.


PLASTIC FIBRE OPTIC SENSOR AF 400

AF 400
Sensing distance with plastic fibre
See technical information
on sheet Plastic Fibre Optics
Supply : 115 / 230 VAC
Output : relay

Description :
Dimensions and visualisation
Plastic fiber : you cut it to
53
your needs Sensitivity adjustment
Indicator

Economical device

Quick assembly of
70

building blocks modules

Choice of six optics

12
Plastic fibre sold by the 80 DIN Rail Mounting

metre
6
Output : relay
30

Connecting block terminal 2 x 5.2

ABS strong housing Fibres Sensitivity

Wiring Connections
Applications : 1.5 mm2 cross section terminals
(to be mounted in a cabinet)
Control of objects in small 230V
and medium handling 115V
NO
0V
NC
(conveyor, lift,...). Common

Detection of parts with AF 400 A NO close at light on

remote amplifier.

Packaging, conditionning.
Non contractual document, Edition 06 / 95

Ecofibre System
Fibre lead cutter Connection to the amplifier Termination to lead

Cutter supplied with


every amplifier
PLASTIC FIBRE OPTIC SENSOR AF 400

Technical Information
Supply voltage 115 / 230 V AC
consumption 4 VA
Response time ton or toff 20 ms
switching frequency 25 Hz
Output relay change over type
U nominal : 250 V
permanent max. I : 3 A
Emission LED red
modulation frequency 3 Kz
Temperature operating 0 to 60 C
storage -20 to 80 C
External light immunity incandescent lamp 10 000 lux
sunlight 10 000 lux
Protections supply
output
degree of protection
Remote input on
off

To Place Order
Product Plastic fibre optic sensor
Reference AF 400 - A - 115 / 230 VAC

TYPES OF APPLICATIONS

Example 1
Through-beam application with a bowl feeder and optics.
with optic A 110

with optics A 210

with optics A 212

Example 2
Through-beam application in a pharmaceutical plant
with optics.
PLASTIC FIBRE OPTIC BRIGHTNESS SENSOR AFL 966 S

AFL 966 S

Supply : 10 / 30 VDC
Output : PNP / NPN
On-delay or off-delay timer

Description :
Dimensions
Simple and quick set-up
M8 plug - 4 points
for self-teach (standard
and sensitive mode)
Adjustable timer
30

Positioning indicator
Detection limit indicator
4.1
Keyboard lock DIN Rail Mounting
25.4 20

Remote input for self-


LO-DO

SET
13

teach (sensitive mode)


+

t
t

Direct or inverse output 60


Output : PNP / NPN
M8 plug Wiring Connections
Polycarbonate strong
housing Brown
10 - 30 VDC

Black Output 100 mA max.


Microprocessor

Applications : Blue
0V
Functionnal test of signal White Remote input

lamps on domestic
appliances.
Head-lights tests on Visualisation and Keyboard
assembly line.
- Sensitivity decrease - Sensitivity increase
- On delay - Off delay - Light on - Dark on
- Decrease timer adjustment - Increase timer adjustment
- Automatic threshold set-up
- Special functions key
LO-DO

SET
+

t
t

- Detection
- Key depressed
- Keyboard locked - Detection limit
- Positioning indicator

- Timer ON
PLASTIC FIBRE OPTIC BRIGHTNESS SENSOR AFL 966 S

Technical Information
Supply voltage 10 / 30 VDC
ripple < 10% within specified limits
consumption < 40 mA
Response time ton or toff < 100 ms
switching frequency < 5 Hz
Output max. nominal intensity 100 mA
residual voltage at 100 mA <2V
residual voltage at 10 mA <1V
Timer range 0 to 5 s with 11 increments
increment duration first increment : 40 ms, following increments : 500 ms
Temperature operating 0 to 60 C
storage -20 to 80 C
Protections supply inverse polarity protection
output permanent short-circuit or over-load protection
degree of protection IP 65
Remote input on voltage < 1,4 V
off voltage > 3 V

To Place Order
Product Plastic fibre optic brightness sensor Plastic fibre Tips
optic
Reference AFL - ( ) - 966 S A 005 See doc.
Plastic Fibre
(C0) output M8 plug without cable

Cable for M8 plug CM 82 - cable 2m


if necessary, please order
together with the sensor CM 85 - cable 5m

TYPES OF APPLICATIONS

Example 1
Fonctionnal test on domestic appliances.

Example 2
Car head-light test on an assembly line.
PLASTIC FIBRE OPTIC SENSOR AFP 946 S

AFP 946 S
Sensing distance with plastic fibre
See technical informations
on sheet Plastic Fibre Optics
Supply : 10 / 30 VDC
Output : PNP / NPN
On-delay or off-delay timer standard

Description :
Dimensions
Simple and quick set-up
Cable or M8 plug - 4 points
for self-teach (standard
and sensitive mode)
Adjustable timer
30

Alignment indicator
Release clip
Dirty optics indicator
4.1
Keyboard lock DIN Rail Mounting
25.4 20

Remote input for self-


LO-DO

SET
13

teach (sensitive mode)


+

t
t

Direct or inverse output 60


Output : PNP / NPN
Cable or M8 plug Wiring Connections
Polycarbonate strong
housing Brown
10 - 30 VDC
N
Black Output 100 mA max.
Microprocessor

Applications : Blue
P

0V
Remote input
Position or presence White

control of parts on assem-


bling or conditionning
machine.
Visualisation and Keyboard
Marks and contrasts sen-
sors for packaging. - Sensitivity decrease - Sensitivity increase
- On delay - Off delay - Light on - Dark on
Detection of translucent - Decrease timer adjustment - Increase timer adjustment

parts on little conveyor. - Automatic threshold set-up


- Special functions key

Plastic fibre use in vibra-


LO-DO

SET

ting surroundings.
+

t
t

- Detection
- Key depressed
- Keyboard locked - Dirty optics
- Detection limit
- Alignment indicator
- Timer ON
PLASTIC FIBRE OPTIC SENSOR AFP 946 S

Technical Information
Supply voltage 10 / 30 VDC
ripple < 10% within specified limits
consumption < 40 mA
Response time ton or toff < 500 s
switching frequency < 1 KHz
Output max. nominal intensity 100 mA
residual voltage at 100 mA <2V
residual voltage at 10 mA <1V
Emission LED red
modulation frequency 8 KHz
Timer range 0 to 5 s with 11 increments
increment duration first increment : 40 ms, following increments : 500 ms
Temperature operating 0 to 60 C
storage -20 to 80 C
External light immunity incandescent light 10 000 lux
sunlight 20 000 lux
Protections supply inverse polarity protection
output permanent short-circuit or over-load protection
degree of protection IP 65
Remote input on voltage < 1,4 V
off voltage > 3 V

To Place Order
Product Plastic fibre optic sensor
Reference AFP 946 S : cable 2m
AFP CO 946 S : output M8 plug
Cable with M8 plug CM 82 - cable 2m
if required, please order CM 82 C - cable 2m with right angle connector
together with the sensor CM 85 - cable 5m
CM 85 C - cable 2m with right angle connector

TYPES OF APPLICATIONS

Example 1
Through-beam application with self-teach, STANDARD MODE.

Example 2
Through-beam application with self-teach, SENSITIVE
MODE (weak alleviation).
PLASTIC FIBRE OPTIC SENSOR AFP 954 R

AFP 954 R
Sensing distance with plastic fibre
See technical information
on sheet Plastic Fibre Optics
Supply : 20 to 250 V AC/DC
Output : relay
ON-delay + OFF-delay timer

Description :
Dimensions
Simple and quick set-up
for self-teach (standard
29 80
and sensitive mode)
Double adjustable timer

18
Alignment indicator

60
Dirty optics indicator
3
Keyboard lock

5.5
Direct or inverse output
10.8 30
Output : relay Fibres
connectors DIN Rail Mounting
Connection on screw cable seal 4 to 10 mm
terminal
Polycarbonate strong Wiring Connections
housing
RELAY (R)

Applications : NC C NO

Position or presence Supply


control of parts on assem-
bling or conditionning Terminal 250 V - 1.5 mm2
machine.
Marks and contrasts sen-
sing for packaging.
Visualisation and Keyboard
Detection of translucent - Sensitivity decrease
- On delay - Off delay
- Sensitivity increase
- Light on - Dark on
parts on little conveyor. - Decrease timer adjustment - Increase timer adjustment
- Automatic threshold set-up
Plastic fibre use in vibra- - Special functions key

ting surroundings.
LO-DO

SET
+

t
t

Terminal cover
- Detection

In case of a short-circuit on the - Dirty optics


output, both red and green LEDs - Detection limit
flash - Alignment indicator
- Key depressed
- Keyboard locked - Timer ON
- Timer indicator
PLASTIC FIBRE OPTIC SENSOR AFP 954 R

Technical Information
Supply voltage 20 / 250 V AC/DC
consumption 2 VA
Response time ton or toff 20 ms
switching frequency 25 Hz
Output relay change over type
U nominal : 250 V
permanent max. I : 3 A
Emission LED red
modulation frequency 400 Hz
Timer type rettriggerable - ON-delay / OFF-delay
range - increment duration 0 to11s in 23 steps of 50ms, then 0.5s steps
Temperature operating 0 to 60 C
storage -20 to 80 C
External light immunity incandescent light 10 000 lux
sunlight 10 000 lux
Protections supply
output
degree of protection IP 65 and IP 67
Remote input on
off

To Place Order
Product Plastic fibre optic sensor
Reference AFP - 954 R - 20 / 250 V AC/DC

TYPES OF APPLICATIONS

Example 1
Through-beam application with self-teach.

Example 2
Through-beam and direct sensing application with
self-teach.
PLASTIC FIBRE OPTIC SENSOR AFP 966 S

AFP 966 S
Sensing distance with plastic fibre
See technical information
on sheet Plastic Fibre Optics
Supply : 10 / 30 VDC
Output : PNP / NPN
Friendly adjustment by key + / -
Bargraph

Description :
Dimensions
Simple adjustment
Cable or M8 socket - 4 points
Sensitivity bargraph
Maximum and minimum
30

sensitivity indication
Keyboard lock
Release clip
Direct or inverse output 4.1
DIN Rail Mounting
25.4 20
Output : PNP / NPN

Cable or M8 socket
13

Polycarbonate strong 60
housing

Wiring Diagram

Applications : Brown
10 - 30 VDC
N
Position or presence Black
Microprocessor Output 100 mA max.
control of parts on assem- P

bling or conditionning Blue


0V
machine. White
Connected to + : light-on mode
Connected to - : dark-on mode
Marks and contrasts sen-
sors for packaging.
Detection of translucent Display and Keyboard
parts on little conveyor.
Plastic fibre use in vibra- - Sensitivity decrease - Sensitivity increase

ting surroundings.
- Keyboard lock
+

In case of a short-circuit, - Detection


both red and green
LEDs flash
- Sensitivity display
PLASTIC FIBRE OPTIC SENSOR AFP 966 S

Technical Information
Supply voltage 10 / 30 VDC
ripple < 10% within specified limits
consumption < 40 mA
Response time ton or toff < 500 s
switching frequency < 1 KHz
Output max. nominal intensity 100 mA
residual voltage at 100 mA <2V
residual voltage at 10 mA <1V
Emission LED red
modulation frequency 8 KHz
Temperature operating 0 to 60 C
storage -20 to 80 C
External light immunity incandescent light 10 000 lux
sunlight 20 000 lux
Protections supply inverse polarity protection
output permanent short-circuit or over-load protection
degree of protection IP 65
Light-on / dark-on function see wiring diagram

To Place Order
Product Plastic fibre optic sensor
Reference AFP - ( ) - 966 S
( ) output by cable 2m
(C0) output M8 socket without cable

Cable with M8 plug CM 82 - cable 2m


if required, please order CM 82 C - cable 2m with right angle connector
together with the sensor CM 85 - cable 5m

TYPES OF APPLICATIONS

Example 1
Through-beam application: detection of small parts

Example 2
Through-beam and diffuse detection application
PLASTIC FIBRE MINIATURE OPTIC SENSOR AFP 989 S

AFP 989 S
Sensing distance with glass fibre
See technical information
on sheet Plastic Fibre Optics
Supply : 10 to 30 VDC
Output : PNP or NPN
Trimmer sensibility set-up

Description :
Encombrement
Miniaturised
Control indicator

Integrated amplifier Set-up

Quick set-up of the plastic


fibre

Detection indication by 3,1


40

LED

Direct / inverse output

9,5
Red pulsed visible light

3
2,5
2 m cable or M8 plug

Cheap product 10 13,5

Applications : Wiring Connections


Detection of parts in a
difficult access. Diffuse reflection sensor
Through-beam detection
Plastic fibre use in
P output type
vibrating surroundings.
Brown Brown
10/30 VDC 10/30 VDC
Small spaces condition- Black Black
ning sensors. White White

0V 0V
Blue Blue
in Lo in Do

N output type
Brown Brown
10/30 VDC 10/30 VDC

White White
Black Black
0V 0V
Blue Blue
in Lo in Do
PLASTIC FIBRE MINIATURE OPTIC SENSOR AFP 989 S

Tecnical Information
Supply voltage 10 / 30 VDC
ripple < 10% within specified limits
consumption < 25 mA
Response time ton or toff 1 mS
switching frequency 500 Hz
Output max. nominal frequency 100 mA
residual voltage at 100 mA <2V
residual voltage at 10 mA <1V
Emission LED red pulsed
modulation frequency 6 KHz
Temperature operating 0 to 50 C
storage - 20 to 80 C
External light immunity incandescent light 5 000 lux
sunlight 10 000 lux
Protections supply inverse polarity protection
output permanent short-circuit or over-load protection
degree IP 65
Directe / inverse function by cable, see Wiring Connections

To Place Order
Product Plastic fibre miniature optic sensor
Reference AFP 989 SN - 2 m cable output (NPN)
AFP 989 SP - 2m cable ouput (PNP)
AFP (C0) 989 SN - plug output (NPN)
AFP (C0) 989 SP - plug output (PNP)

TYPE OF APPLICATIONS

Example 1
Pins detection on electronic circuits.

Example 2
Integrated circuit pins detection.
PLASTIC FIBRE SENSOR DCF 966 S
FOR CONTRAST DETECTION

DCF 966 S
Marks detection sensor with teach-in
Supply: 10 to 30 VDC
Output: PNP / NPN
White light spot: 1,5 mm
Very high speed: 20 kHz

Description:
Dimensions
Set-up by learning back- M8 socket - 4 points

ground and mark

Detection by optic fibre


30

with coaxial lens


Release clip

Indicator of contrast 4.1


default DIN Rail Mounting 25.4 20

Short-circuit indicator
LO-DO

SET
13

Direct or inverse output


60
Output: PNP / NPN 18 40
The blue ring marks
M8 plug the transmitter fibre Scale 1/2

8 M18 x 1
Polycarbonate strong
housing
Wiring Connections
Brown
10 - 30 VDC
N

Applications: Microprocessor
Black High level
on 1st learned tint
P
Blue
Detection of marks: 0V
- on packagings White
Unused
- on labels
- in printing machinery
- detection on difficult Visualisation and Keyboard
access area Push 4s:
- 1st tint is learned => triangle lights on
Push 4s again:
- 2nd tint is learned => triangle lights off
LO-DO

SET
+

Insuffiscient contrast:
both green LED and
red key flash 2s. - Detection of the lightest tint
Short-circuit output: - Triangle LED
both green LED and
red key flash - Key LED, turns on when a key is hit
PLASTIC FIBRE SENSOR DCF 966 S
FOR CONTRAST DETECTION

Technical Information
Supply voltage 10 / 30 VDC
ripple < 10% within specified limits
consumption 50 mA
Response time stability ton / toff 25 s
switching frequency 20 KHz
Output max. nominal intensity 100 mA
residual voltage at 100 mA <2V
residual voltage at 10 mA <1V
Detection distance 18 mm (+/- 2 mm)
Emission LED white
Spot diametre 1,5 mm
modulation frequency 40 KHz
Temperature operating 0 to 40 C
storage -20 to 80 C
External light immunity incandescent light 10 000 lux
sunlight 20 000 lux
Protections supply inverse polarity protection
output permanent short-circuit or over-load protection
degree of protection IP 65

To Place Order
Product Plastic fibre sensor for contrast detection
Reference DCF (C0) 966 S
Cable with M8 plug CM 82 - ccable 2m
if required, please order CM 85 - cable 5m
together with the amplifier

Integrated optic fibre FPDC 61 - fibre 60 cm


if required, please order FPDC 101 - fibre 100 cm
together with the amplifier

TYPES OF APPLICATIONS

Example 1
Detection of marks in a packaging machine.

Example 2
Detection of marks on tubes.
Accessories
ACCESSORIES FOR PHOTOELECTRIC SENSORS M18

Accessory for reading at 90 (Art. DEV90) Shutter for emitter-receiver Thru Beam (Art. P18OTT)

35

23

13.5
23

Ray turner for 90 sensing of cylindrical photoelectric


sensors M 18. It can be used for DIFFUSE REFLECTIVE,
RETRO REFLECTIVE, POLARIZED RETRO REFLECTIVE, WARNING:
EMITTERS AND RECEIVERS THRU BEAM system. each package contains three shutter disks
Weight 7 g Weight 5 g

Accessory to detect small size objects with emitter-receiver


90 cylindrical thru beam M18.
Mirror

SHUTTING MIN. OBJECT DISTANCE


DIAM. TO BE DETECTED ATTENUATION

2 mm 2 mm 97 %
Object
to be detected
4 mm 4 mm 84 %

8 mm 8 mm 54%

EXAMPLE OF WARNING:
APPLICATION the datum "Minimum object to be sensed" refers to the
condition of shutter mounted on emitter receiver.

WARNING
The ray turner determines an attenuation of the switching EXAMPLE OF APPLICATION
distance that can be computed as follows:
Shutter 4 mm

Emitter Receiver
4

D-2
m

DR = _____ X 80
m

100

where "D" is the sensor switching distance indicated in cm


and "DR" is the real switching distance indicated in cm.
Accessories
REFLECTORS CODES AND DIMENSIONS

Rectangular type (Art. CT05) Round type (Art. CT01)

72,5
54

63
19

22
Thickness: 8,4 mm Thickness: 5 mm
Weight 1 g 26
Weight 10 g

Rectangular type (Art. CT07)


60
Round type (Art. CT02)
52
40,5
34

Thickness: 8 mm
Weight 10 g
32
Rectangular type (Art. CT100) Thickness: 5.5 mm
Weight 4 g 36
100

Round type (Art. CT03)


92

92
Thickness: 9 mm
Weight 40 g 100

Rectangular type (Art. CT150)


41
Thickness: 5 mm
47
42

Weight 1 g

150
Thickness: 7,4 mm
Weight 30 g 182 Round type with fixing holes type (Art. CT04S)

Adhesive type (Art. CT08B)


78

84
225


Thickness: 1 mm Thickness: 8 mm 8

244 Weight 25 g
Weight 32 g

The reflection distance for all models is referred to CT04S as 100%. When other models
or reflectors are used, the distance results different. See the picture. Round type with fixing holes type (Art. CT06)
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 150%
CT 01
CT 02
CT 03 12
CT 04S
CT 05
CT 06
CT 07 41,5
CT 08B (1) 50
CT 100 Thickness: 6,5 mm
60
CT 150 Weight 6 g
Note: (1) 80 x 80 mm

34 EMX INDUSTRIES INC.


Thru Beam Photoelectric Sensors
THRU BEAM PHOTOELECTRIC SENSORS P 41 FOR EXTERNAL WALL MOUNTING
Low voltage AC/DC thru beam sensors
35 m range P 41 Series
Wide beam diameter-easy to align
Output LED indicator
1A relay SPDT
Plastic housing
Identification code Wiring diagrams

EMITTER RECEIVER
P41 12
1 N.C.
SERIES P41 2 N.O.
1 V AC-DC
3 C
12 V AC-DC
12 2 V AC-DC
4 V AC-DC
24 V AC-DC
24 5 V AC-DC

Note: Each package includes emitter and receiver.

AVAILABLE RECEIVER EMITTER Detailed sight


SWITCHING DISTANCE 35 m
EMISSION Infrared (875 m)
NOMINAL VOLTAGE 12 VDC or 24 VAC-DC (see selection table)
FREQUENCY 50 60 Hz
OUTPUT 2 Relay UNI 8612 norms -
Mec.=5x106 ops min. Elect. 3x105 ops min.
N OF OPERATIONS
( 1A 28 VDC) 1x105 ops min. (0.5A 120 VAC)

MAX OUTPUT CURRENT 1A 28 VDC - 0.5A 120 VAC (28 W, 60 VA) -


ABSORPTION 70 mA
YELLOW LED Output indicator - Dimensions (mm)
GREEN LED Supply indicator - 38
70
SWITCHING FREQUENCY 5 Hz
START UP DELAY 300 mS
TEMPERATURE LIMITS -20 +60C
LIGHT IMMUNITY > 5000 Lux(1)
PROTECTION DEGREE IP 54
CONNECTIONS with connectors 79
HOUSING MATERIAL Housing: nylon loaded with fiberglass - Filter: methacrylate
WEIGHT (Approximately) 315 g
(1)
Determined with halogen tungsten lamp 3000 K. Use with accessories

C 410

S 410
Important warning

The thru beam photoelectric sensor can be used as a sensor to detect the presence
of an obstacle if the sensing beam gets interrupted.
SI 41
In no case this device can substituted the obbligatory safety devices that must be
applied on all dangerous equipments.

Characteristics curve

Y m
1.0
0.8
0.6
0.4
0.2 EMITTER
Optical axis
0 X
5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40
0.2 Meters X
Y

0.4
0.6 RECEIVER
0.8
1.0

EMX INDUSTRIES INC.


Thru Beam Photoelectric Sensors
THRU BEAM PHOTOELECTRIC SENSORS WITH BATTERY SUPPLY P 44 FOR EXTERNAL WALL MOUNTING
Low voltage 12 or 24 V AC/V DC receiver P 44 Series
Battery-operated 9V emitter - 150 day minimum
1 Hz switching frequency
Wall mounting
Solar cell power supply on request

Identification code Wiring diagrams


EMITTER RECEIVER
Black
Red
Green Led Solar cell Green led Yellow led
- +
wiring

P 44 1 2

VAC-DC INPUT

SERIES P 5 4 3 2 1
Battery

Open switch: 24V AC-DC.


Connect the connectors 1 and 2 to the Closed switch: 12V AC-DC.
FOR EXTERNAL WALL MOUNTING WITH BATTERY SUPPLY sensitive edge output contact to activate
the beam emission.
WARNING: Do not connect other supply Note: Connect to ground the connector 1.
sources to the connectors 1 and 2 or to
the battery plug. The device could be
Note: Each package includes emitter, receiver and the alkaline battery for the emitter. irreparably damaged.

AVAILABLE RECEIVER EMITTER Detailed sight


SWITCHING DISTANCE 15 m
EMISSION Infrared (875 m)
NOMINAL VOLTAGE 12-24 VAC-DC (selectable) 9V alkaline battery
FREQUENCY 50 60 Hz -
OUTPUT 2 Relay UNI 8612 norms -
N OF OPERATIONS (5x106 mec. op. - 100x103 elect. op.) -
MAX OUTPUT CURRENT 1A 24 VDC - 0.5A 120 VAC -
BATTERY LIFE 150 days (min.)
ABSORPTION 70 mA -
YELLOW LED Output indicator Dimensions (mm)
GREEN LED Supply indicator 38
70
SWITCHING FREQUENCY 1 Hz
RESPONSE TIME 900 mS
START UP DELAY 300 mS
TEMPERATURE LIMITS -20 +60C
LIGHT IMMUNITY > 5000 Lux(1)
PROTECTION DEGREE IP 54 79

CONNECTIONS with connectors C 410

HOUSING MATERIAL Housing: nylon loaded with fiberglass - Filter: methacrylate


WEIGHT (Approximately) 340 g Use with accessories
(1)
Determined with halogen tungsten lamp 3000 K.

Important warning
SI 41
The thru beam photoelectric sensor can be used as a sensor to detect the presence
of an obstacle if the sensing beam gets interrupted.
In no case this device can substituted the obbligatory safety devices that must be
applied on all dangerous equipments. S 410

Characteristics curve

Y cm
100

50

EMITTER
X Optical axis
0
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 Meters
X
Y

50
RECEIVER

100

38 EMX INDUSTRIES INC..


Thru Beam Photoelectric Sensors
THRU BEAM PHOTOELECTRIC SENSORS P 45 FOR EXTERNAL WALL MOUNTING
Low voltage 12-24 VAC-DC
15 m range
User friendly
1A relay SPDT
Plastic housing

Identification code Wiring diagrams

EMITTER
SERIES P RECEIVER
P 45
1 + 12-24 VAC-DC
2 - 12-24 VAC-DC
1 + V AC-DC
3 C
2 - V AC-DC
12-24 VAC-DC 4 N.O.
5 N.C.

Note: each package includes emitter and receiver

AVAILABLE RECEIVER EMITTER Detailed sight


SWITCHING DISTANCE 15 m
EMISSION Infrared (950m)
NOMINAL VOLTAGE 1224 VAC-DC
FREQUENCY 50 60 Hz
OUTPUT 2 Relay UNI 8612 norms -
Mec.=5x106 ops min. Elect. 100x103 ops min.
N OF OPERATIONS
( 1A 24 VDC) 1x105 ops min. (0.5A 120 VAC)

MAX OUTPUT CURRENT -


ABSORPTION 40 mA
YELLOW LED not present
GREEN LED not present
SWITCHING FREQUENCY 5 Hz
START UP DELAY 300 mS
TEMPERATURE LIMITS -10 +65C Dimensions (mm)
LIGHT IMMUNITY > 5000 Lux(1)
PROTECTION DEGREE IP 54
CONNECTIONS with connectors
HOUSING MATERIAL Housing: nylon - Filter: methacrylate
34

WEIGHT (Approximately) 160 g


(1) 91
Determined with halogen tungsten lamp 3000 K.

Important warning

The thru beam photoelectric sensor can be used as a sensor to detect the presence
57

of an obstacle if the sensing beam gets interrupted.


In no case this device can substituted the obbligatory safety devices that must be
applied on all dangerous equipments.

Characteristics curve

EMITTER
Optical axis

Y m X
Y

0.8
0.6
RECEIVER
0.4
0.2
0 X
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
0.2 Meters
0.4
0.6
0.8
39
MINIATURE SENSOR IN THROUGH-BEAM MODE E/R 989 S

E/R 989 S
Sensing distance : 4 m
Supply : 10 30 VDC
Output : PNP ou NPN
Trimmer sensibility set-up

Description :
Dimensions
Miniaturised
Emitter / Receiver Control indicator
Set-up on emitter on receiver
High sensing distance

Integrated amplifier

Detection indication by Optical axis


40

LED 3,1

Direct / inverse output


23

9,5
2 m cable or M8 plug

Strong housing 2,5

3
10 13,5
Applications :

Detection of opaque parts


Wiring Connections
on a conveyor.
Brown
Detection of opaque parts Black
10/30 V
not used
far away. Emitter not used
White
0V
Control of parts position Blue

on a robot.
Through-beam detection

Brown Brown
10/30 VDC 10/30 VDC
Black Black
P output type White
0V White 0V
Blue Blue
in Lo in Do

Brown Brown
10/30 VDC 10/30 VDC
White White
N output type Black Black
0V 0V
Blue Blue

in Lo in Do
MINIATURE SENSOR IN THROUGH-BEAM MODE E/R 989 S

Tecnical Information
Supply voltage 10 / 30 VDC
ripple < 10% within specified limits
consumption < 25 mA
Response time ton or toff 1 mS
switching frequency 500 Hz
Output max. nominal frequency 100 mA
residual voltage at 100 mA <2V
residual voltage at 10 mA <1V
Emission LED red pulsed
modulation frequency 6 KHz
Temperature operating 0 to 50 C
storage - 20 to 80 C
External light immunity incandescent light 5 000 lux
sunlight 10 000 lux
Protections supply inverse polarity protection
output permanent short-circuit or over-load protection
degree IP 65 and IP 67
Directe / inverse function by cable, see Wiring Connections

To Place Order
Product Miniature sensor in through-beam mode
Reference E 989 - cable output R 989 SN - 2 m cable output (NPN)
E (C0) 989 - plug output R 989 SP - 2 m cable output (PNP)
R (C0) SN - plug output (NPN)
R (C0) SP - plug outpout (PNP)

TYPE OF APPLICATIONS

Example 1
Detection of rubber parts.

Exemple 2
Control of bobine end.
Thru Beam Photoelectric Sensors
THRU BEAM PHOTOELECTRIC SENSORS P 40 FOR PANEL MOUNTING
Low voltage AC/DC thru beam sensors
Long range Sensor: 55 m range P 40 Series
User friendly, wide beam alignment
Output LED indicator
1A relay SPDT
Plastic housing
Identification code Wiring diagrams

EMITTER
P40 12 RECEIVER

SERIES P40 1 N.C.


2 N.O.
1 V AC-DC
3 C
2 V AC-DC
12 V AC-DC
12 4
5
V AC-DC
V AC-DC
24 V AC-DC
24
Note: Each package includes emitter and receiver.

AVAILABLE RECEIVER EMITTER Detailed sight


SWITCHING DISTANCE 55 m
EMISSION Infrared (875 m)
NOMINAL VOLTAGE 12 VDC or 24 VAC-DC (see selection table)
FREQUENCY 50 60 Hz
OUTPUT 2 Relay UNI 8612 norms -
Mec.=5x106 ops min. Elect. 3x105 ops min.
N OF OPERATIONS
(1A 28 VDC) 1x105 ops min. (0.5A 120 VAC)

MAX OUTPUT CURRENT 1A 28 VDC - 0.5A 120 VAC (28 W, 60 VA) -


ABSORPTION 70 mA
YELLOW LED Output indicator -
GREEN LED Supply indicator - Dimensions (mm)
SWITCHING FREQUENCY 5 Hz
55
START UP DELAY 300 mS
25
TEMPERATURE LIMITS -20 +60C
LIGHT IMMUNITY > 5000 Lux(1)
0
6

PROTECTION DEGREE IP 54

75
CONNECTIONS with connectors
HOUSING MATERIAL Housing: nylon loaded with fiberglass - Filter: methacrylate
WEIGHT (Approximately) 425 g
75
(1)
Determined with halogen tungsten lamp 3000 K.

Use with accessories


Important warning

The thru beam photoelectric sensor can be used as a sensor to detect the presence
of an obstacle if the sensing beam gets interrupted. C 340
In no case this device can substituted the obbligatory safety devices that must be S 340
applied on all dangerous equipments.

Characteristics curve

Y m
1.2
1.0
0.8
0.6
0.4
0.2 EMITTER
X Optical axis
0
5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60
0.2 Meters X
Y

0.4
0.6
0.8 RECEIVER
1.0
1.2

EMX INDUSTRIES INC.


Thru Beam Photoelectric Sensors
THRU BEAM PHOTOELECTRIC SENSORS BP 1012- BP 1024 FOR AUTOMATIC DOORS RELAY OUTPUT
Thrubeam door sensor with separate amplifier
12 or 24 V AC/V DC input BP Series
5 Hz switching frequency
1A relay SPDT
Sensitivity adjustment
6 m long integral cables
Identification code Wiring diagrams

BP 10 12
SERIES BP
RED 4 Sensitivity adjustment
5
ONE BEAM SELECTION 6 3 GND
7 2 VAC-DC INPUT
VAC-DC INPUT
12 V AC-DC supply voltage
12 RX TX
WHITE
8
9
10 AMPLIFIER
1

24 V AC-DC supply voltage


24
Note: Each package includes 1 pair of projectors.

AVAILABLE ONE BEAM SELECTION Amplifier dimensions (mm)


SWITCHING DISTANCE 10 m
EMISSION Infrared (875 m)
,5
NOMINAL VOLTAGE 12 or 24 VAC DC (-15 / +10%) 3 84
oles
FREQUENCY 50 60 Hz 6h
7
OUTPUT 2 Relay UNI 8612 norms
N OF OPERATIONS (5x106 mec. op. -3x105 elect. op.)
MAX OUTPUT CURRENT 1A 24 VDC - 0.5A 120 VAC
ABSORPTION 70 mA 2
3
4
27
1
4
3
YELLOW LED Output and activated thru beam indicator 12 1
2
30
5
GREEN LED Supply indicator 21
21
SENSITIVITY ADJUSTMENT Present 50
SWITCHING FREQUENCY 5 Hz
RESPONSE TIME 200 mS
START UP DELAY 300 mS
TEMPERATURE LIMITS -20 +60C
Projector dimensions (mm)
LIGHT IMMUNITY 5000 Lux(1)
PROTECTION DEGREE Amplifiers IP 54 18.85
PROTECTION DEGREE Projectors IP 65 16
CONNECTIONS with connectors
HOUSING MATERIAL Amplifiers ABS
HOUSING MATERIAL Projectors Body - Lenses: methacrylate
11.5
15

WEIGHT (Approximately) 300 g


(1)
Determined with halogen tungsten lamp 3000 K.

Important warning
0.5
The thru beam photoelectric sensor can be used as a sensor to detect the presence
of an obstacle if the sensing beam gets interrupted.
Cable lenght 6 m
In no case this device can substituted the obbligatory safety devices that must be
2 cables output positions
applied on all dangerous equipments.

Characteristics curve
Y cm
60

40

20
EMITTER
Optical axis
0 X
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Meters X
Y

20

40 RECEIVER

60

40 EMX INDUSTRIES INC.


Thru Beam Photoelectric Sensors
THRU BEAM PHOTOELECTRIC SENSORS BP 10220 FOR AUTOMATIC DOORS RELAY OUTPUT
Thrubeam door sensors with separate amplifier
230 V AC/V DC input BP Series
5 Hz frequency/response
8 A relay SPDT
Sensitivity adjustment
6 m long integral cables
Identification code Wiring diagrams

BP 10 220
TX RX Sensitivity
SERIES BP 7
adjustment
6 N.C.
RED 8 5 COM
9 4 N.O.
WHITE 10 3 GND
ONE BEAM SELECTION
AMPLIFIER 2 230 VAC
1 230 VAC
230 V AC SUPPLY VOLTAGE

Note: Each package includes 1 pair of projectors.

AVAILABLE ONE BEAM SELECTION Amplifier dimensions (mm)


SWITCHING DISTANCE 10 m
EMISSION Infrared (875 m)
NOMINAL VOLTAGE 230V AC DC (-15 / +10%) 3,5
s 84
FREQUENCY 50 60 Hz hole
6
OUTPUT Relay
7

N OF OPERATIONS Relay (5x107 mec. op. -1x105 elect. op.)


MAX OUTPUT CURRENT 8A 250 VAC
ABSORPTION 17 mA 2
3
4
27
1
4
3
YELLOW LED Output and activated thru beam indicator 12 1
2
30
5
GREEN LED Supply indicator 21
SENSITIVITY ADJUSTMENT 21
Present 50
SWITCHING FREQUENCY 5 Hz
RESPONSE TIME 200 mS
START UP DELAY 300 mS
TEMPERATURE LIMITS -20 +60C Projector dimensions (mm)
LIGHT IMMUNITY 5000 Lux(1)
PROTECTION DEGREE Amplifiers IP 54
18.85
PROTECTION DEGREE Projectors IP 65
16
CONNECTIONS with connectors
HOUSING MATERIAL Amplifiers ABS
HOUSING MATERIAL Projectors Body - Lenses: methacrylate
WEIGHT (Approximately) 350 g
11.5
15

(1)
Determined with halogen tungsten lamp 3000 K.

Important warning
The thru beam photoelectric sensor can be used as a sensor to detect the presence 0.5

of an obstacle if the sensing beam gets interrupted.


In no case this device can substituted the obbligatory safety devices that must be Cable lenght 6 m

applied on all dangerous equipments. 2 cables output positions

Characteristics curve
Y cm
60

40

20
EMITTER
Optical axis
0 X
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Meters X
Y

20

40 RECEIVER

60

41 EMX INDUSTRIES INC.


Thru Beam Photoelectric Sensors
THRU BEAM PH. SENSORS BP 20-30 FOR AUTOMATIC DOORS WITH TIMER RELAY OUTPUT DOUBLE BEAM
Double beam thrubeam sensors-single or dual channel


1A relay SPDT
Relay output: Single channel: 1A SPDT - Dual channel: 1A SPDT
BP Series
1 sec OFF delay timer, selectable
12-24 V AC/V DC input
Sensitivity adjustment
6 m long integral cables
Identification code Wiring diagrams
BP 20 CH 1

RX 1 TX 2
1

BP 20 RX 1 TX 1
RED

WHITE
2
3
4
DIP switches
6
5
CH 2 RELAYS TEST POINT
N.O.
COM.
5
4 N.C.
6

TX 1
WHITE
7 3 + VAC - DC
RX 2 TX 2 2
_ VAC - DC
8

RX 2
RED
AMPLIFIER GND
SERIES BP 9 1

BP 30 CH 1
Double beam common output
20

RX 1 TX 2
1
CH 2 RELAYS TEST POINT
RED 2 DIP switches 7 COM.
RX 1 TX 1 3
6 N.C.
Double beam separate outputs
30 WHITE 4
5
6
5
4
COM.
N.C.

TX 1
WHITE
7 3 + VAC - DC
RX 2 TX 2 8 2 _ VAC - DC

RX 2
RED
9
AMPLIFIER 1 GND
Note: Each package includes 1 pair of projectors.

AVAILABLE DOUBLE BEAM SELECTION One beam selection


SWITCHING DISTANCE 0.3 10 m DIP 3
EMISSION Infrared (875 m) ON In case the photoelectric thru beam is
used with just one emitter or one
NOMINAL VOLTAGE 12 24 V AC DC (-15 / +10%) receiver, chek that the selection DIP- 1
2
3
4

Switch 3 (DIP 3) is in position ON. 3


4

50 60 Hz
2
1

FREQUENCY OFF

OUTPUT 2 Relay UNI 8612 norms


N OF OPERATIONS Mec. = 5x106 ops min. - Elect. = 3x105 ops min; (1A 28 VDC) 1x105 ops min. (0.5A 120VAC)
Duoble beam selection
MAX OUTPUT CURRENT 1A 28 VDC - 0.5A 120 VAC (28W 60V A)
DIP 3
ABSORPTION 80 mA ON In case the photoelectric thru beam is
YELLOW LED Output and activated thru beam indicator used with two emitters and two
receivers, check that the selection 2
3
4

GREEN LED Supply indicator


1
DIP-Switch (DIP 3) is in position OFF. 1
2
3
4

OFF

SWITCHING FREQUENCY 5 Hz
START UP DELAY 300 mS
TEMPERATURE LIMITS -20 +60C
Reduced working distance (BP20 mod.)
LIGHT IMMUNITY > 5000 Lux(1)
DIP 4
PROTECTION DEGREE Amplifiers IP 50 ON
In order to reduce the working (switching) distance to 50% set the dip
PROTECTION DEGREE Projectors IP 65 switch "DIP 4" in position ON.

CONNECTIONS with connectors OFF

HOUSING MATERIAL Amplifiers ABS


HOUSING MATERIAL Projectors Body - Lenses: methacrylate Delay at sensor deactivation
WEIGHT (Approximately) 430 g Operating on the suitable DIP-Switches it is possible to select on each channel a
delay to the sensor deactivation, it permits to keep the sensor excited for abaut 1
second once the obstacle has passed the active area. Regulating the DIP-Switches
(1) (DIP 1 and DIP 2) in position ON, the delay is activated.
Determined with halogen tungsten lamp 3000 K.
DIP 1 DIP 2
ON ON
ON = Activated delay ON = Activated delay

OFF = Deactivated delay OFF = Deactivated delay

OFF OFF

Channel 1 Channel 2

Important warning Amplifier dimensions (mm)


3,5
The thru beam photoelectric sensor can be used as a sensor to detect the presence s 84
ole
6h
of an obstacle if the sensing beam gets interrupted. 7
In no case this device can substituted the obbligatory safety devices that must be
applied on all dangerous equipments.
2
3
4
27
1
4
3
12 1
2
30
5
21
Characteristics curve 21
50

Y cm
60 Projector dimensions (mm)
40 18.85
16
20
EMITTER
Optical axis
0 X
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Meters X
11.5
Y

15

20

40 RECEIVER

60
0.5

Cable lenght 6 m 2 cables output positions

42 EMX INDUSTRIES INC.


Thru Beam Photoelectric Sensors Accessories

Box for P 40 (Art. S 340) Post for P 40 (Art. C 340)

75 85

75

65 530

Metal box for wall mounting of model P40.


Epossidic painted. Colour grey.
Material: zinc-coated iron.
Weight 270 g

Anti-vandalism box for P 41 (Art. S 410) 60

5
10
Metal post to support the model P40.
Epossidic painted.
Colour grey.
Material: zinc-coated iron.
88 Weight 1600 g
15
Post for P 41 (Art. C 410)
77
42
4,5 80

Anti-vandalic metal box for model P41.


Colour grey.
Material: zinc-coated iron.
Weight 240 g

Box for P 41 (Art. SI 41)


500
75

85

30

28

Metal post to support the model P41.


Metal box for wall mounting of model P41. Epossidic painted.
Epossidic painted. Colour grey. Colour grey.
Material: zinc-coated iron. Material: zinc-coated iron.
Weight 160 g Weight 1200 g

EMX INDUSTRIES INC.


Inductive And Capacitive Sensors
GENER AL SPECIFIC ATIONS

WORKING PRINCIPLES Repeatability (R) According to EN 60947-5-2


Inductive sensors It is the precision by which the sensor switching commutation distance is
repeated at the maximum supply voltage, at the temperature of 23 C 5 C with
Voltage to the device creates an alternate inductive field through an oscillator coil
a load current = 100 mA, during a 8 hours period.
before its active surface. If a metallic object (iron, alluminium, cooper, brass etc.)
The value expresses the percentage of the difference between the maximum and
enters this field, it damps the oscillator and reverses the trigger threshold and
the minimum measure related to the average value of the switching distance Sn.
causes a change in the output stage state.

Capacitive sensors Switching frequency


Capacitive sensors contain an oscillator by transistor in the frontal section. It is the maximum possible number of impulse repetition per second. This value is
The oscillating circuit R - C (Resistor - Capacitor) is influenced by variations in obtained by measurement with a cogged wheel in which cogs are of triggering
capacity, infact when any material, solid or liquid (water, wood, metal, caffee, material. The cogs are as large as the diameter of the sensor and the distance
ponders, etc) comes into contact with the active surface of the sensor the between two cogs is twice the diameter (according to the EN 60947-5-2).
capacitance increases putting into action the oscillator up until the threshold of
trigger inverts. By introducing a change in the condition of the final stage and Not magnetic and not
therefore in the command of the external load a potentiometer makes fine conductive material
adjustment to switching distance.
Rotation
Nominal switching distance (Sn) According to EN 60947-5-2
It is the conventional distance at which the diffuse sensor switches when
approching standard targets with axial movement. Such target (conform to the EN
500 10 regulation) shoud be of steel Fe37, square and 1mm thick. Targets should 2D Sn
be the same as the sensor diameter. D 2

m
Measuring 1m
D
plate

Direction of
movement

Sensitive surface Proximity


sensor

Usable operating distance (Su) According to EN 60947-5-2 ELECTRICAL PARAMETERS


It is the assured operating distance during the specified voltage,
functionning and temperature intervals it is included between 81% and 121% of RATED VOLTAGE
the nominal switching distance Sn (0,81Sn <_ Su <_ 1,21Sn) for inductive sensors, and It indicates the power supply where the sensor works perfectly.
between 72% and 132% of the nominal switching distance (0,72Sn <_ Su <_ 1,32Sn) RESIDUAL RIPPLE
for capacitive sensors. Maximum ripple allowed on supply DC voltage. It is shown in percentage referring
to the medium value.
Assured operating distance (Sa) According to EN 60947-5-2
It is the distance at which the proximity sensor works safely in all the MAXIMUM OUTPUT CURRENT
temperature and voltage intervals as specified for the same sensor. The assured The maximum output current of the sensor in continuous operation.
operating distance is included between and l'81% of Sn ( <_ Sa <_ 0,81Sn) for MINIMUM OUTPUT CURRENT
inductive sensors, and and 72% of Sn ( <_ Sa <_ 0,72Sn) for capacitive sensors. Minimum output current through the sensor to maintain normal operation.
Reducing factors MAXIMUM PEAK CURRENT
When the element to be detected is different from Fe37, reduction factors are: The maximum current the sensor can sustain in a limited period of time.

INDUCTIVE SENSORS CAPACITIVE SENSORS ABSORPTION


Current consumption of the sensor referred to the maximum value of the nominal
Fe37 1 x Sn* Metal 1 x Sn*
voltage and without load.
Stainless-steel 0,9 x Sn Water 1 x Sn
Brass-Bronze 0,5 x Sn P.V.C. 0,5 x Sn VOLTAGE DROP
Alluminium 0,4 x Sn Glass 0,5 x Sn Voltage drop measured on switching circuit when output transistor is activated.
Copper 0,4 x Sn Wood 0,4 x Sn
SHORT CIRCUIT PROTECTION
*Sn = Nominal switching distance
It takes place in presence of short circuit or overload to avoid any damage to inner
Hysteresis (H) circuits. When the short circuit is removed, the sensor is automatically reactivated.
It is the distance between the point of switching on and the point of switching off of
the trigger object. The value is a percentage of the nominal switching distance Sn. PROTECTION AGAINST REVERSAL OF POLARITY
All the sensor with DC supply are protected against reversal of polarity, this
prevents the internal components from being damaged by incorrect power
MEASURING supply connection.
PLATE
PROTECTION AGAINST INDUCTIVE LOADS
H It protects sensor output in presence of high inductive loads. This protection is
performed by a diode or zenner diod. If possible keep the power conductors
Sn

OFF ON separate.
H
PROTECTION DEGREE
The degree of protection of the housing and conform to the IEC 529 regulation.
SENSOR
START UP DELAY
Time interval between sensor supply connection and active output.

45 EMX INDUSTRIES INC.


Inductive And Capacitive Sensors
GENER AL SPECIFIC ATIONS

SERIES AND PARALLEL CONNECTIONS FOR NPN O PNP SENSORS


NPN CONFIGURATION
With this kind of connection take into account as follow:
1) voltage drop (C.D.T.) for each sensor (<1,8 V);
2) maximum load current of sensors reffering to self consumption of each

BROWN

BROWN

BROWN
sensor (< 10 mA) at output load.

BLUE

BLUE

BLUE
D
NPN NPN NPN PNP PNP PNP

BLACK

BLACK

BLACK
WHITE

WHITE

WHITE
BROWN

BROWN

BROWN

BROWN

BROWN

BROWN
BLACK

BLACK

BLACK

BLACK

BLACK

BLACK
BLUE

BLUE

BLUE

BLUE

BLUE

BLUE
N.C. CONNECTION N.O. CONNECTION
NOTE: In presence of inductive loads, when more sensors are connected
in series, diode D should be connected in antiparallel to the load.

Connection in parallel (OR)


When omitting the diodes shown in the chart, use sensors with output
stage, open collector type.
Connection in parallel (OR)
When connected in this way sensors can activate the common output
NPN NPN NPN PNP PNP PNP independently, when energized. Thank to the real low leaking current,
BLUE
BLACK
BROWN

BLUE
BLACK
BROWN

BLUE
BLACK
BROWN

BROWN
BLACK
BLUE

BROWN
BLACK
BLUE

BROWN
BLACK
BLUE

there is no actual limitation in the number of sensor that can be connected


in parallel, providing that the min. current of load energized is mA.

PNP CONFIGURATION

BROWN

BROWN

BROWN
BLUE

BLUE

BLUE
WHITE WHITE WHITE

BLACK BLACK BLACK

AMPLIFIED SENSORS 10-30 VDC 4 WIRES PROGRAMMABLE OUTPUT


Thanks to the output separated from the rest of circuit, sensors so
connected provide important advantages, such as the possibility of 4 N.C. CONNECTION N.O. CONNECTION
output configurations (NPN-NO, NPN-NC, PNP-NO, PNP-NC) on the same
model and the possibility of connection in series.
NPN CONFIGURATION
OUTPUT DIAGRAM
BROWN BROWN

NPN WHITE
NPN WHITE
BROWN

BROWN

BROWN
BLUE

BLUE

BLUE
BLACK BLACK
NO BLUE
NC BLUE
BLACK BLACK BLACK

WHITE WHITE WHITE

BROWN BLUE

PNP WHITE
PNP WHITE

BLACK BLACK
NO BLUE
NC BROWN
N.C. CONNECTION N.O. CONNECTION

Connection in series (AND) SERIES AND PARALLEL CONNECTIONS FOR AC SENSORS


Connected in this way sensors activate only output when they are Alternate current sensors can be connected in parallel, but voltage drop
energized simultaneously. The maximum number of connectable sensors (<6 V) at the sensor end must be taken into account.
in connections of this type is given by the following formula: When connecting in parallel, and current (without load) (<4 mA) of all
n = (V supply - V load) / V residual sensors. Be careful at the minimum load (high load impedence).
where: V supply = voltage V load = voltage for min. load energized These connections are not advisable as they may cause anomalities.
V residual = residual voltage in the commutative circuit in ON state.

PNP CONFIGURATION
NOTICE FOR 24 VAC SUPPLY
In sensor with 24VAC supply it is important to pay attention to the voltage
BROWN

BROWN

BROWN
BLUE

BLUE

BLUE

drop (<6 V) at the ends of the sensor and a possible drop in the
connection cables between sensor and load.
D
In order to have a proper voltage on the load, it is advisable to encrease
BLACK

BLACK

BLACK
WHITE

WHITE

WHITE

supply voltage by at least 6V.

N.C. CONNECTION N.O. CONNECTION


NOTE: In presence of inductive loads, when more sensors are connected
in series, diode D should be connected in antiparallel to the load.

EMX INDUSTRIES INC.


Inductive And Capacitive Sensors
GENER AL SPECIFIC ATIONS

INSTRUCTIONS FOR CORRECT INSTALLATION Not shielded types


THESE SENSORS ARE NOT MADE FOR SAFETY APPLICATIONS AND FOR SAFETY D
As these sensors are effected by metal, the
D
DEVICES. THEREFORE THEY CANNOT BE USED TO PREVENT INJURIES TO PERSONS, 2D

DAMAGES, INDUSTRIAL DAMAGES, ACCIDENT. D


D
area close to the active surface should be
free. This area can be of air, non-magnetic
Connections or non-conductive material. When sensors
1) Do not exceed the voltage limits printed on the product label. For DC are installed side by side, the distance
sensors, use stable tension. between two sensors should be 2D (D =
2) Do not connect the sensors power supply cables down-stream from other sensor diameter).
devices and make sure they are directly connected to the mains.
3) If the power supply source is a switching voltage regulator, connect the FG
Torque setting for fastening nuts
(Frame Ground) terminal to the ground.
4) Connect to the ground the FG (Frame Ground) terminal and all metallic parts Avoid over-tightening the fastening nuts in order not to damage the container
of every industrial machinery or not if a sensor is used in it. and to avoid breaking the internal circuit as a result.
5) Do not use the sensors near electromagnetic or high frequency fields. Take particular care with the models which have a diameter less than 12 mm.
6) The cables of sensors must be separate from the power supply cables, from
the engines cables, from the inverters cables, or from any other SENSITIVITY ADJUSTMENT FOR CAPACITIVE SENSORS
electromagnetic device because induction noise could cause malfunction or
Sensitivity adjustment should be carried out when the sensor is installed in a
damage to the inductive sensors. Separate the wires of the sensor from the
definitive and stable position. Adjustment should be carried out in an
above indicated lines and then insert the wires into an earthed metal conduit.
intermediate position between minimum and maximum because, since air is a
Earth terminal connection of metal conduit 7) After making all operations men-
dielectric, a strong variation in humidity could cause inappropriate energising
Sensor wire tioned in the above point 6, if
of the sensor (if adjustment is very fine).
inductive interference exists, an
The intervention range of the sensor depends on the type of material to be
adequate transient suppression filter
detected and its dimensions (see reduction factor table).
must be used on the power supply
The distance can vary depending on the temperature variation by about 10%
line in proximity to the sensor.
Power lines in a range of -20 to +70C.
Sensor 8) When a large distance by the
To increase sensitivity, turn the trimmer clockwise, to decrease sensitivity, turn
connection wires to the sensor has to be covered, use conductors with a cross-
it anti-clockwise.
section of at least 0.50 mm2 and do not exceed the maximum distance of 100 m.
To gain access to the trimmer, remove the plastic protection screw located at
9) The output signal of a sensor cannot be used during the start up delay (not
the back of the sensor.
more than 300 mS).
10) Several sensors should not be connected in series, whereas several sensors
can be connected in parallel. Capacitive sensors
Assembly
1) For correct assembly and alignment, all the accessories supplied with the Sensitivity LED Sensitivity LED
sensor must be used. adjust. --
+ adjust. - +
2) To regulate the sensitivity adjustment trimmer use a suitable screw-driver Cable Cable
without exerting excessive force.
3) Do not turn too much fixing screws or nuts to avoid electrical or mechanical damages.
18 30
4) Mounting sensors side by side, leave an appropriate place between them to
avoid mutual interference.
5) Do not pull the connection cable of the sensor. When the conditions of use
result to be too hard (in places not protected from shocks or subjected to Capacitive sensors with ON/OFF time delay
movements) use a protective sheath.
BACK VIEW LED
10 cm fastening
MOVING
DEVICE To carry out the sensitivity adjustment
of these models, first reset the timer
moving part Sensitivity Time adjust
trimmer.
adjust Cable

fixed part
Further information
6) Avoid continuous movements between the sensor and its cable and follow The manufacturer is not liable for the improper use of the product.
the instructions given in the drawing. Any use and/or application which are not provided for by this instructions sheet
7) Protect the sensitive surface of the sensor from shocks, mechanical pressures must be previously and directly authorized by the same manufacturer.
to avoid irreparable damages.
8) Install the sensor being careful that metallic (or of any other material) POWER SUPPLY FOR SENSORS IN DC CURRENT
shavings shall not settle on the sensitive part of the sensor.
9) Do not use the sensors in presence of organic or liquid solvents or of any kind of acid. A stabilised source of voltage can be obtained using the table indicated beside.
10) Do not use the sensors outdoors without an adequate protection. Use the following ways to dimension the components:
11) Do not exceed the indicated temperature limits. (V OUT + 4.5) x 1.1
12) Do not subject the appliance to strong vibrations or to shocks which can VAC = (V RMS transformer) =
1.41
damage the sensor or can harm its impermeability. (0.0053) x I OUT (value indicated in F )
13) Although some ranges of INFRA proximity sensors are protected to IP67, this does C1 =
2
not mean that our devices can be used to detect objects in water or in the rain.
VL1 = VAC x 1.41 x 1.2
Shielded types
If " " is bigger than 10 cm, add C4 beside the stabiliser
These sensors are not effected by the C4 = 100 F ; VL4 = VAC x 1.41 x 1.2
D
min
. 1/2
D
D
surrounding metal and therefore the unit C2 = 220 F ; VL2 = VOUT x 1.2
can be embedded in it. In order to avoid C3 = 0,1 F ; VL3 = 63 V
reciprocal interfe-rance when more Note: the regulator must provide adequate power dissipation as:
sensors are installed side by side, the (VAC x 1.41) - VOUT
minimum distance between two sensors P DISS. = Where IOUT max. is the maximum available (supplied) current
I OUT max
must be D/2 (D = sensor diameter).
Shielded types double switching distance
x For assembly in contact with the metal surface,
observe the following values: VAC REGULATOR IOUT
C1 C4 C2 C3
Sensore
6,5 8 12 18 30 VL1 VL4 VL2 VL3
VOUT
Metallo (mm) >
_1 >
_1 >
_2 >
_ 3,5 >
_5
X

47 EMX INDUSTRIES INC.


Amplified Capacitive Sensors 18
AMPLIFIED CAPACITIVE SENSORS IN METAL HOUSING 1230 VDC NPN OR PNP OUTPUT
Four wires, 12-30 VDC
NPN - NO and NC
PNP - NO and NC
CS Series
Adjustable range, 9-turn trimmer
Nickel-plated brass
Hight noise immunity
Hight temperature stability
Identification code Wiring diagrams

NO NC
BROWN

BLACK
NPN
CS 07 NO - NC
WHITE

BLUE

SERIES CS

BROWN
NOT SHIELDED

NPN NO-NC output


07 13
SHIELDED

BLACK
PNP NO-NC output
PNP
08 14 WHITE
NO - NC
BLUE

NC NO

SHIELDED NOT SHIELDED Sensitivity adjustment


NOMINAL SWITCHING DISTANCE (Sn) 15 mm 110 mm
NOMINAL VOLTAGE 12 30 VDC (-15/+10%) The sensitivity adjustment must be done when the sensor is
RESIDUAL RIPPLE 10% installed in a definite and steady position.
HYSTERESIS Depending on the sensing distance The regulation must be done in a position half way between
minimum and maximum, because, being air dielectric, a strong
MAX. CURRENT OUTPUT 200 mA
humidity variation could cause, if the regulation is very light,
ABSORPTION AT 24 VDC 20 mA nuisance tripping.
VOLTAGE DROP (Sensor ON) 1.8 V (I = 100 mA) The sensing distance of the sensor depends on the kind of
OPERATION LED Yellow material to detect and on its dimensions (see table about
SENSITIVITY ADJUSTMENT Trimmer 9 turns reduction factors).
The distance could change according to temperature variations.
SWITCHING FREQUENCY 10 Hz
To increase the sensitivity twist the trimmer clock-wise, to
START UP DELAY 100 mS decrease do it anti clock-wise.
REPEATABILITY (at even temperature) 5%
SHORT CIRCUIT PROTECTION Present
ELECTRIC PROTECTIONS Against polarity reversal - inductive loads
TEMPERATURE LIMITS - 25 +70 C
PROTECTION DEGREE IP 67
CABLE LENGTH 2m
CABLE SECTION 4 x 0.25 mm2
HOUSING MATERIAL Nickel-plated brass
WEIGHT (Approximately) 160 g

Models with cable output dimensions (mm)

SHIELDED MODELS NOT SHIELDED MODELS 18 BACK VIEW

65 15 65 15

LED LED LED visible through transparence


Sensitivity
Sensitivity
adjustment
adjustment
SENSITIVITY
ADJUSTMENT --
+
CABLE
6 6

86 7 86

83 EMX INDUSTRIES INC.


Amplified Capacitive Sensors 30
AMPLIFIED CAPACITIVE SENSORS IN METAL HOUSING 1230 VDC NPN OR PNP OUTPUT
Four wires, 12-30 VDC
NPN - NO and NC CS Series
PNP - NO and NC
Adjustable range, 9-turn trimmer
Nickel-plated brass
Hight noise immunity
Hight temperature stability
Identification code Wiring diagrams

NO NC
BROWN

BLACK
NPN
CS 09 NO - NC
WHITE

BLUE

SERIES CS

BROWN
NOT SHIELDED

NPN NO-NC output


09 15
SHIELDED

BLACK
PNP NO-NC output
PNP
10 16 WHITE
NO - NC
BLUE

NC NO

SHIELDED NOT SHIELDED Sensitivity adjustment


NOMINAL SWITCHING DISTANCE (Sn) 120 mm 125 mm
NOMINAL VOLTAGE 12 30 VDC (-15/+10%) The sensitivity adjustment must be done when the sensor is
RESIDUAL RIPPLE 10% installed in a definite and steady position.
The regulation must be done in a position half way between
HYSTERESIS Depending on the sensing distance
minimum and maximum, because, being air dielectric, a strong
MAX. CURRENT OUTPUT 200 mA humidity variation could cause, if the regulation is very light,
ABSORPTION AT 24 VDC 20 mA nuisance tripping.
VOLTAGE DROP (Sensor ON) 1.8 V (I = 100 mA) The sensing distance of the sensor depends on the kind of
OPERATION LED Yellow material to detect and on its dimensions (see table about
reduction factors).
SENSITIVITY ADJUSTMENT Trimmer 9 turns
The distance could change according to temperature variations.
SWITCHING FREQUENCY 10 Hz To increase the sensitivity twist the trimmer clock-wise, to
START UP DELAY 100 mS decrease do it anti clock-wise.
REPEATABILITY (at even temperature) 5%
SHORT CIRCUIT PROTECTION Present
ELECTRIC PROTECTIONS Against polarity reversal - inductive loads
TEMPERATURE LIMITS - 25 +70 C
PROTECTION DEGREE IP 67
CABLE LENGTH 2m
CABLE SECTION 4 x 0.25 mm2
HOUSING MATERIAL Nickel-plated brass
WEIGHT (Approximately) 250 g

Models with cable output dimensions (mm)

SHIELDED MODELS NOT SHIELDED MODELS 30 BACK VIEW

72 18 72 18 SENSITIVITY LED visible


Sensitivity Sensitivity ADJUST. through transparence
adjustment adjustment

LED LED
-- +

6 6
96 15 96
CABLE

84 EMX INDUSTRIES INC.


Amplified Capacitive Sensors 30
AMPLIFIED CAPACITIVE SENSORS IN METAL HOUSING 18230 VAC-DC WITH TIMER RELAY OUTPUT
Wide imput voltage, 18-230 VA/DC
Relay SPDT output: 3A@30VAC, 1A@220VAC CS Series
Timer, adjustable 1sec - 5 min
Adjustable range
Hight noise immunity
Hight temperature stability
Identification code Wiring diagrams
BROWN
R WHITE
L
E
CS 31 TE 5 L
RED
BLACK
A
BLUE
SERIES CS
Y N
RELAY OUTPUT - Shielded
31
RELAY OUTPUT - Not shielded Sensitivity adjustment
32 The sensitivity adjustment must be done when the sensor is
ACTIVATING DELAY
TE installed in a definite and steady position.
DEACTIVATING DELAY The regulation must be done in a position half way between
TD minimum and maximum, because, being air dielectric, a strong
TIME: 1 sec 5 min
humidity variation could cause, if the regulation is very light,
nuisance tripping.
The sensing distance of the sensor depends on the kind of
material to detect and on its dimensions (see table about
SHIELDED NOT SHIELDED reduction factors).
NOMINAL SWITCHING DISTANCE (Sn) 1 20 mm 2 30 mm The distance could change according to temperature variations.
NOMINAL VOLTAGE 18 230 VAC-DC (-15/+10%) To increase the sensitivity twist the trimmer clock-wise, to
decrease do it anti clock-wise.
NET FREQUENCY 50 60 Hz
HYSTERESIS Depending on the sensing distance
OUTPUT Relay (10 x106 ops. min.) Time delay
MAX. CURRENT OUTPUT 3A 30VAC - 1A 220VAC (90 W, 360 VA) To regulate the sensitivity of these models, reset the time delay
ABSORPTION 2.5 VA trimmer before.
OPERATION LED Yellow
SENSITIVITY ADJUSTMENT Trimmer 9 turns The available range of delay is :
START UP DELAY 300 mS
SWITCHING FREQUENCY 10 Hz 1 SEC. 5 MIN.
REPEATABILITY (at even temperature) 5%
TEMPERATURE LIMITS - 25 +70 C
PROTECTION DEGREE IP 65 BACK VIEW
CABLE LENGTH 2m SENSITIVITY ADJUST. LED TIME ADJUST.
CABLE SECTION 6 x 0.30 mm2
HOUSING MATERIAL Nickel-plated brass
WEIGHT (Approximately) 250 g

CABLE

Models with cable output dimensions (mm)

SHIELDED NOT SHIELDED

72 18
72 18
SENSITIVITY
SENSITIVITY
ADJUST.
ADJUST.
LED
LED

110 15 110

85 EMX INDUSTRIES INC.


Amplified Inductive Sensors 4
AMPLIFIED INDUCTIVE SENSORS 1030 V DC 3 WIRES NPN OR PNP OUTPUT
Three-wire, amplified, shielded sensors IS Series
10 to 30 VDC, NPN or PNP
NO select

Identification code Wiring diagrams

BROWN

IS 23 NPN BLACK

SERIES IS BLUE

BROWN
NPN NO output
23
PNP NO output
24 PNP BLACK

BLUE

SHIELDED
NOMINAL SWITCHING DISTANCE (Sn) 0,8 mm
NOMINAL VOLTAGE 10 30 VDC (-15 / +10%)
RESIDUAL RIPPLE 10%
HYSTERESIS < 10%
MAX. OUTPUT CURRENT 100 mA
RESIDUAL CURRENT 10 mA
VOLTAGE DROP < 1 V (l = 100 mA)
OPERATION LED Present
SWITCHING FREQUENCY 800 Hz
START UP DELAY 50 mS
REPEATABILITY 1%
SHORT CIRCUIT PROTECTION Present (self-resetting)
ELECTRIC PROTECTIONS Against polarity reversal - inductive loads
TEMPERATURE LIMITS - 25 +60 C
PROTECTION DEGREE IP 67
CABLE LENGTH 2m
CABLE SECTION 3 x 0.14 mm2
HOUSING MATERIAL Stainless-steel
WEIGHT - Cable output - 50 g
WEIGHT - K connector output - -

Dimensions (mm)

CONFIGURATION WITH CABLE

LED

28

48 EMX INDUSTRIES INC.


Amplified Inductive Sensors 5
AMPLIFIED INDUCTIVE SENSORS 1030 V DC 3 WIRES NPN OR PNP OUTPUT
Three-wire, amplified, shielded sensors IS Series
10 to 30 VDC, NPN or PNP
NO select
M8 quick connect models

Identification code Wiring diagrams

BROWN
IS 25 K1
BLACK
SERIES IS NPN
BLUE

NPN NO output
25
BROWN
PNP NO output
26
BLACK
PNP
CONNECTOR OUTPUT M8
BLUE

SHIELDED Connection with connector M8 (K1)


NOMINAL SWITCHING DISTANCE (Sn) 0,8 mm
NOMINAL VOLTAGE 10 30 VDC (-15 / +10%)
RESIDUAL RIPPLE 10% 4
HYSTERESIS < 10% View of
MAX. OUTPUT CURRENT 100 mA tripole
RESIDUAL CURRENT 10 mA 1 3 male
VOLTAGE DROP < 1 V (l = 100 mA) connector
OPERATION LED Present
SWITCHING FREQUENCY 800 Hz
START UP DELAY 50 mS
REPEATABILITY 1%
CONTACTS CONFIGURATION
SHORT CIRCUIT PROTECTION Present (self-resetting)
ELECTRIC PROTECTIONS Against polarity reversal - inductive loads Contacts numbers
Available
TEMPERATURE LIMITS - 25 +60 C 1 3 4
BROWN BLUE BLACK

PROTECTION DEGREE IP 67 NPN/PNP NO/NC


CABLE LENGTH 2m
CABLE SECTION 3 x 0.14 mm2
HOUSING MATERIAL Stainless-steel
WEIGHT - Cable output - 50 g
WEIGHT - K connector output - 40 g

Dimensions (mm)

CONFIGURATION WITH CABLE CONFIGURATION WITH CONNECTOR K1

23 20

LED LED

28 46

49 EMX INDUSTRIES INC.


Amplified Inductive Sensors 12
AMPLIFIED INDUCTIVE SENSORS 1230 VDC 4 WIRES PROGRAMMABLE OUTPUT

Four-wire, amplified sensors ISM Series


Programmable outputs: NPN/PNP, NO or NC
Cable or M12 quick-connect
Nickel plated brass
12-30 VDC

Identification code Wiring diagrams

BROWN BROWN

NPN WHITE
PNP WHITE

ISM 01 K NO
BLACK
BLUE
NO
BLACK
BLUE

SERIES ISM BLUE BLUE

NPN WHITE
BLACK
PNP WHITE
BLACK
NC BROWN
NC BROWN

PROGRAMMABLE OUTPUT - Shielded


01 Thanks to the output status which is not paired with the rest of the circuit,
PROGRAMMABLE OUTPUT - Not shielded
02 the sensors of this kind of availability give enormous advantages, such as
the possibility of obtaining the four output configurations (NPN-NO, NPN-NC,
PNP-NO, PNP-NC,) on the same model and the possibility of obtaining serial
or parallel connections without any practical numerical limit.
CONNECTOR OUTPUT M12

SHIELDED NOT SHIELDED Connection with connector M12 (K)


NOMINAL SWITCHING DISTANCE (Sn) 2 mm 4 mm
NOMINAL VOLTAGE 12 30 VDC (-15/+10%) 1
RESIDUAL RIPPLE 10%
HYSTERESIS < 10% View of
OUTPUT NPN or PNP (may be selected) 2 4 quadripole
CONTACT NO or NC (may be selected) male
connector.
MAX. CURRENT OUTPUT 200 mA
ABSORPTION AT 24 VDC < 1.2 mA
3
VOLTAGE DROP (Sensor ON) < 1,8 V (I = 100 mA)
OPERATION LED Yellow
CONTACTS CONFIGURATION
SWITCHING FREQUENCY 1000 Hz
START UP DELAY 50 mS Contacts numbers
Output
REPEATABILITY 3% 1 2 3 4
SHORT CIRCUIT PROTECTION Present (self-resetting) NPN NO NO
ELECTRIC PROTECTIONS Against polarity reversal - inductive loads NPN NC NC
TEMPERATURE LIMITS - 25 +70 C
PNP NO NO
PROTECTION DEGREE IP 67
PNP NC NC
CABLE LENGTH 2m
CABLE SECTION 4 x 0.25 mm2
Note: The K plug is compatible with the following connectors VAUDEHA,
HOUSING MATERIAL Nickel-plated brass BINDER, HIRSCHMANN, LUMBERG, AMPHENOL-TUCHEL.
WEIGHT - Cable output - 110 g
WEIGHT - K connector output - 60 g

Dimensions (mm)

CONFIGURATION WITH CABLE CONFIGURATION WITH CONNECTOR K

50 LED x 4
40 LED

9
12 16
4,5 68 4,5 65

Note: the front part in blue refers to not shielded models.

63 EMX INDUSTRIES INC.


Amplified Inductive Sensors 12
AMPLIFIED INDUCTIVE SENSORS INCREASED RANGE 1230 VDC 4 WIRES PROGRAMMABLE OUTPUT
Four-wire, shielded sensors


Increased range, shielded, not shielded
Range, 4 mm to 8 mm ISM Series
Programmable outputs: NPN/PNP, NO or NC
Cable or M12 quick-connect
Nickel plated brass
Operation LED
200 mA max output

Identification code Wiring diagrams

BROWN BROWN

NPN WHITE
PNP WHITE

ISM 01 D K NO
BLACK
BLUE
NO
BLACK
BLUE

BLUE BLUE
SERIES ISM
NPN WHITE
BLACK
PNP WHITE
BLACK
NC BROWN
NC BROWN
PROGRAMMABLE OUTPUT - Shielded
01
PROGRAMMABLE OUTPUT - Not shielded
02 Thanks to the output status which is not paired with the rest of the circuit,
the sensors of this kind of availability give enormous advantages, such as
the possibility of obtaining the four output configurations (NPN-NO, NPN-NC,
INCREASED RANGE
PNP-NO, PNP-NC,) on the same model and the possibility of obtaining serial
or parallel connections without any practical numerical limit.
CONNECTOR OUTPUT M12

SHIELDED NOT SHIELDED Connection with connector M12 (K)


NOMINAL SWITCHING DISTANCE (Sn) 4 mm 8 mm

INCREASED RANGE
NOMINAL VOLTAGE 12 30 VDC (-15/+10%) 1
RESIDUAL RIPPLE 10%
HYSTERESIS < 10% View of
OUTPUT NPN or PNP (may be selected) 2 4 quadripole
CONTACT NO or NC (may be selected) male
connector.
MAX. CURRENT OUTPUT 200 mA
ABSORPTION AT 24 VDC < 1.2 mA
3
VOLTAGE DROP (Sensor ON) < 1,8 V (I = 100 mA)
OPERATION LED Yellow
CONTACTS CONFIGURATION
SWITCHING FREQUENCY 500 Hz
START UP DELAY 50 mS Contacts numbers
Output
REPEATABILITY 3% 1 2 3 4
SHORT CIRCUIT PROTECTION Present (self-resetting) NPN NO NO
ELECTRIC PROTECTIONS Against polarity reversal - inductive loads NPN NC NC
TEMPERATURE LIMITS - 25 +70 C
PNP NO NO
PROTECTION DEGREE IP 67
PNP NC NC
CABLE LENGTH 2m
CABLE SECTION 4 x 0.25 mm2
Note: The K plug is compatible with the following connectors VAUDEHA,
HOUSING MATERIAL Nickel-plated brass BINDER, HIRSCHMANN, LUMBERG, AMPHENOL-TUCHEL.
WEIGHT - Cable output - 110 g
WEIGHT - K connector output - 60 g

Dimensions (mm)

CONFIGURATION WITH CABLE CONFIGURATION WITH CONNECTOR K

50 LED x 4
40 LED

9
12 16
4,5 68 4,5 65

Note: the front part in blue refers to not shielded models.

64 EMX INDUSTRIES INC.


Amplified Inductive Sensors 18
AMPLIFIED INDUCTIVE SENSORS 1230 VDC 4 WIRES PROGRAMMABLE OUTPUT
Four-wire, amplified sensors
Programmable outputs: NPN/PNP, NO or NC
ISM Series
Cable or M12 quick-connect
Nickel plated brass
12-30 VDC

Identification code Wiring diagrams

BROWN BROWN

ISM 03 K NPN WHITE


BLACK
PNP WHITE
BLACK
NO BLUE
NO BLUE
SERIES ISM
BLUE BLUE

NPN WHITE
BLACK
PNP WHITE
BLACK
NC BROWN
NC BROWN
PROGRAMMABLE OUTPUT - Shielded
03
Thanks to the output status which is not paired with the rest of the circuit,
PROGRAMMABLE OUTPUT - Not shielded
04 the sensors of this kind of availability give enormous advantages, such as
the possibility of obtaining the four output configurations (NPN-NO, NPN-NC,
PNP-NO, PNP-NC,) on the same model and the possibility of obtaining serial
or parallel connections without any practical numerical limit.
CONNECTOR OUTPUT M12

SHIELDED NOT SHIELDED Connection with connector M12 (K)


NOMINAL SWITCHING DISTANCE (Sn) 5 mm 8 mm
NOMINAL VOLTAGE 12 30 VDC (-15/+10%) 1
RESIDUAL RIPPLE 10%
HYSTERESIS < 10% View of
OUTPUT NPN or PNP (may be selected) 2 4 quadripole
CONTACT NO or NC (may be selected) male
connector.
MAX. CURRENT OUTPUT 200 mA
ABSORPTION AT 24 VDC < 1.2 mA
3
VOLTAGE DROP (Sensor ON) < 1,8 V (I = 100 mA)
OPERATION LED Yellow
CONTACTS CONFIGURATION
SWITCHING FREQUENCY 1000 Hz
START UP DELAY 50 mS Contacts numbers
Output
REPEATABILITY 3% 1 2 3 4
SHORT CIRCUIT PROTECTION Present (self-resetting) NPN NO NO
ELECTRIC PROTECTIONS Against polarity reversal - inductive loads NPN NC NC
TEMPERATURE LIMITS - 25 +70 C
PNP NO NO
PROTECTION DEGREE IP 67
PNP NC NC
CABLE LENGTH 2m
CABLE SECTION 4 x 0.25 mm2
Note: The K plug is compatible with the following connectors VAUDEHA,
HOUSING MATERIAL Nickel-plated brass BINDER, HIRSCHMANN, LUMBERG, AMPHENOL-TUCHEL.
WEIGHT - Cable output - 145 g
WEIGHT - K connector output - 95 g

Dimensions (mm)

CONFIGURATION WITH CABLE CONFIGURATION WITH CONNECTOR K

50
50 LED x 4
LED

12 16
12 16
7,5 78 7,5 78

Note: the front part in blue refers to not shielded models

72 EMX INDUSTRIES INC.


Amplified Inductive Sensors 18
AMPLIFIED INDUCTIVE SENSORS INCREASED RANGE 1230 VDC 4 WIRES PROGRAMMABLE OUTPUT
Four-wire


Increased range, shielded, not shielded
Range, 8 mm to 14 mm
ISM Series
Programmable outputs: NPN/PNP, NO or NC
Cable or M12 quick-connect
Nickel plated brass
Operation LED
200 mA max output

Identification code Wiring diagrams

BROWN BROWN

ISM 03 D K NPN WHITE


BLACK
PNP WHITE
BLACK
NO BLUE
NO BLUE
SERIES ISM BLUE BLUE

NPN WHITE
BLACK
PNP WHITE
BLACK
PROGRAMMABLE OUTPUT - Shielded
03 NC BROWN
NC BROWN

PROGRAMMABLE OUTPUT - Not shielded


04 Thanks to the output status which is not paired with the rest of the circuit,
the sensors of this kind of availability give enormous advantages, such as
INCREASED RANGE the possibility of obtaining the four output configurations (NPN-NO, NPN-NC,
PNP-NO, PNP-NC,) on the same model and the possibility of obtaining serial
or parallel connections without any practical numerical limit.
CONNECTOR OUTPUT M12

SHIELDED NOT SHIELDED Connection with connector M12 (K)


NOMINAL SWITCHING DISTANCE (Sn) 8 mm 14 mm

INCREASED RANGE
NOMINAL VOLTAGE 12 30 VDC (-15/+10%) 1
RESIDUAL RIPPLE 10%
HYSTERESIS < 10% View of
OUTPUT NPN or PNP (may be selected) 2 4 quadripole
CONTACT NO or NC (may be selected) male
connector.
MAX. CURRENT OUTPUT 200 mA
ABSORPTION AT 24 VDC < 1.2 mA
3
VOLTAGE DROP (Sensor ON) < 1,8 V (I = 100 mA)
OPERATION LED Yellow
CONTACTS CONFIGURATION
SWITCHING FREQUENCY 400 Hz
START UP DELAY 50 mS Contacts numbers
Output
REPEATABILITY 3% 1 2 3 4
SHORT CIRCUIT PROTECTION Present (self-resetting) NPN NO NO
ELECTRIC PROTECTIONS Against polarity reversal - inductive loads NPN NC NC
TEMPERATURE LIMITS - 25 +70 C
PNP NO NO
PROTECTION DEGREE IP 67
PNP NC NC
CABLE LENGTH 2m
CABLE SECTION 4 x 0.25 mm2
Note: The K plug is compatible with the following connectors VAUDEHA,
HOUSING MATERIAL Nickel-plated brass BINDER, HIRSCHMANN, LUMBERG, AMPHENOL-TUCHEL.
WEIGHT - Cable output - 145 g
WEIGHT - K connector output - 95 g

Dimensions (mm)

CONFIGURATION WITH CABLE CONFIGURATION WITH CONNECTOR K

50
50 LED x 4
LED

12 16
12 16
7,5 78 7,5 78

Note: the front part in blue refers to not shielded models

73
Amplified Inductive Sensors 30
AMPLIFIED INDUCTIVE SENSORS 1230 VDC 4 WIRES PROGRAMMABLE OUTPUT
Four-wire, amplified sensors ISM Series
Programmable outputs: NPN/PNP, NO or NC
Cable or M12 quick-connect
Nickel plated brass
12-30 VDC

Identification code Wiring diagrams

BROWN BROWN

NPN WHITE
PNP WHITE

ISM 05 K NO
BLACK
BLUE
NO
BLACK
BLUE

SERIES ISM BLUE BLUE

NPN WHITE
BLACK
PNP WHITE
BLACK
NC BROWN
NC BROWN

PROGRAMMABLE OUTPUT - Shielded


05 Thanks to the output status which is not paired with the rest of the circuit,
PROGRAMMABLE OUTPUT - Not shielded
06 the sensors of this kind of availability give enormous advantages, such as
the possibility of obtaining the four output configurations (NPN-NO, NPN-NC,
PNP-NO, PNP-NC,) on the same model and the possibility of obtaining serial
or parallel connections without any practical numerical limit.
CONNECTOR OUTPUT M12

SHIELDED NOT SHIELDED Connection with connector M12 (K)


NOMINAL SWITCHING DISTANCE (Sn) 10 mm 15 mm
NOMINAL VOLTAGE 12 30 VDC (-15/+10%) 1
RESIDUAL RIPPLE 10%
HYSTERESIS < 10% View of
OUTPUT NPN or PNP (may be selected) 2 4 quadripole
CONTACT NO or NC (may be selected) male
connector.
MAX. CURRENT OUTPUT 200 mA
ABSORPTION AT 24 VDC < 1.2 mA
3
VOLTAGE DROP (Sensor ON) < 1,8 V (I = 100 mA)
OPERATION LED Yellow
CONTACTS CONFIGURATION
SWITCHING FREQUENCY 300 Hz
START UP DELAY 50 mS Contacts numbers
Output
REPEATABILITY 3% 1 2 3 4
SHORT CIRCUIT PROTECTION Present (self-resetting) NPN NO NO
ELECTRIC PROTECTIONS Against polarity reversal - inductive loads NPN NC NC
TEMPERATURE LIMITS - 25 +70 C
PNP NO NO
PROTECTION DEGREE IP 67
PNP NC NC
CABLE LENGTH 2m
CABLE SECTION 4 x 0.25 mm2
Note: The K plug is compatible with the following connectors VAUDEHA,
HOUSING MATERIAL Nickel-plated brass BINDER, HIRSCHMANN, LUMBERG, AMPHENOL-TUCHEL.
WEIGHT - Cable output - 210 g
WEIGHT - K connector output - 170 g

Dimensions (mm)

CONFIGURATION WITH CABLE CONFIGURATION WITH CONNECTOR K

50 LED x 4
50 LED

12 16
12 16
9 78 9 78

Note: the front part in blue refers to not shielded models

81 EMX INDUSTRIES INC.


Amplified Inductive Sensors 30
AMPLIFIED INDUCTIVE SENSORS INCREASED RANGE 1230 VDC 4 WIRES PROGRAMMABLE OUTPUT
Four-wire


Increased range, shielded, not shielded
Range, 15 mm to 20 mm
ISM Series
Programmable outputs: NPN/PNP, NO or NC
Cable or M12 quick-connect
Nickel plated brass
Operation LED
200 mA max output

Identification code Wiring diagrams

BROWN BROWN
ISM 05 D K NPN WHITE
PNP WHITE
BLACK BLACK
NO BLUE
NO BLUE
SERIES ISM
BLUE BLUE

NPN WHITE
BLACK
PNP WHITE
BLACK
PROGRAMMABLE OUTPUT - Shielded
05 NC BROWN
NC BROWN

PROGRAMMABLE OUTPUT - Not shielded


06 Thanks to the output status which is not paired with the rest of the circuit,
the sensors of this kind of availability give enormous advantages, such as
INCREASED RANGE the possibility of obtaining the four output configurations (NPN-NO, NPN-NC,
PNP-NO, PNP-NC,) on the same model and the possibility of obtaining serial
or parallel connections without any practical numerical limit.
CONNECTOR OUTPUT M12

SHIELDED NOT SHIELDED Connection with connector M12 (K)


NOMINAL SWITCHING DISTANCE (Sn) 15 mm 20 mm

INCREASED RANGE
NOMINAL VOLTAGE 12 30 VDC (-15/+10%) 1
RESIDUAL RIPPLE 10%
HYSTERESIS < 10% View of
OUTPUT NPN or PNP (may be selected) 2 4 quadripole
CONTACT NO or NC (may be selected) male
connector.
MAX. CURRENT OUTPUT 200 mA
ABSORPTION AT 24 VDC < 1.2 mA
3
VOLTAGE DROP (Sensor ON) < 1,8 V (I = 100 mA)
OPERATION LED Yellow
CONTACTS CONFIGURATION
SWITCHING FREQUENCY 200 Hz
START UP DELAY 50 mS Contacts numbers
Output
REPEATABILITY 3% 1 2 3 4
SHORT CIRCUIT PROTECTION Present (self-resetting) NPN NO NO
ELECTRIC PROTECTIONS Against polarity reversal - inductive loads NPN NC NC
TEMPERATURE LIMITS - 25 +70 C
PNP NO NO
PROTECTION DEGREE IP 67
PNP NC NC
CABLE LENGTH 2m
CABLE SECTION 4 x 0.25 mm2
Note: The K plug is compatible with the following connectors VAUDEHA,
HOUSING MATERIAL Nickel-plated brass BINDER, HIRSCHMANN, LUMBERG, AMPHENOL-TUCHEL.
WEIGHT - Cable output - 210 g
WEIGHT - K connector output - 170 g

Dimensions (mm)

CONFIGURATION WITH CABLE CONFIGURATION WITH CONNECTOR K

50 LED x 4
50 LED

12 16
12 16
9 78 9 78

Note: the front part in blue refers to not shielded models

82
Inductive Sensors 6.5
INDUCTIVE SENSORS CONFORMING TO NAMUR RULES
Two-wire sensors IS Series
5-24 VAC/VDC input
Nickel plated brass
Shielded versions up to 1 mm
Not shielded versions up to 2 mm

Identification code Wiring diagrams

IS 01 K1 BROWN

SERIES IS NAMUR
SENSOR
ORDER CODES - Shielded BLUE
01
ORDER CODES -Not shielded
06
CONNECTOR OUTPUT M8

SHIELDED NOT SHIELDED Connection with connector M8 (K1)


NOMINAL SWITCHING DISTANCE (Sn) 1 mm 2 mm
NOMINAL VOLTAGE (Load resistence 1 K) 7.7 9 V DC
DC SUPPLY VOLTAGE 5 24 V DC 4
RESIDUAL RIPPLE 10%
HYSTERESIS 10%
OUTPUT CURRENT (Metal present) 1 mA View of
OUTPUT CURRENT (Metal absent) 3 mA 1 3 tripole
SWITCHING FREQUENCY 2000 Hz male
REPEATABILITY 3% connector
TEMPERATURE LIMITS -25 +60 C
PROTECTION DEGREE IP 67
CABLE LENGTH 2m
CABLE SECTION 2 x 0.25 mm2 CONTACTS CONFIGURATION
HOUSING MATERIAL Nickel-plated brass
Contacts numbers
WEIGHT - Cable output - 80 g Available
WEIGHT - K1 connector output - 35 g 1 3 4
WEIGHT - K connector output - - NAMUR

Dimensions (mm)

CONFIGURATION WITH CABLE CONFIGURATION WITH CONNECTOR K1

39

4 40 4 48

50 EMX INDUSTRIES INC.


Amplified Inductive Sensors 6.5
AMPLIFIED INDUCTIVE SENSORS 1030 V DC 3 WIRES NPN OR PNP OUTPUT
Three-wire, amplified, shielded sensors IS Series
10 to 30 VDC, NPN or PNP
NO or NC select
M8 quick connect models
6.5mm unshielded model 2mm Sn

Identification code Wiring diagrams

BROWN
IS 27 K1 S
BLACK
SERIES IS NPN
BLUE
NPN NO output
27 53
NOT SHIELDED
SHIELDED

NPN NC output
28 54
BROWN
PNP NO output
29 55
PNP NC output
30 56 PNP BLACK

CONNECTOR OUTPUT M8
BLUE

CONFIGURATION WITH SHORT HOUSING

SHIELDED NOT SHIELDED Connection with connector M8 (K1)


NOMINAL SWITCHING DISTANCE (Sn) 1,5 mm 2 mm
NOMINAL VOLTAGE 10 30 VDC (-15 / +10%)
RESIDUAL RIPPLE 10% 4
HYSTERESIS < 10% View of
MAX. OUTPUT CURRENT 200 mA tripole
RESIDUAL CURRENT < 10 mA 1 3 male
VOLTAGE DROP < 1.2 V (l = 100 mA) connector
OPERATION LED Present
SWITCHING FREQUENCY 1000 Hz
START UP DELAY 50 mS
REPEATABILITY 3%
CONTACTS CONFIGURATION
SHORT CIRCUIT PROTECTION Present (self-resetting)
ELECTRIC PROTECTIONS Against polarity reversal - inductive loads Contacts numbers
Available
TEMPERATURE LIMITS - 25 +70 C 1 3 4
BROWN BLUE BLACK

PROTECTION DEGREE IP 67 NPN/PNP NO/NC


CABLE LENGTH 2m
CABLE SECTION
HOUSING MATERIAL Stainless-steel
WEIGHT - Cable output - 80 g
WEIGHT - K connector output - 40 g

Dimensions (mm)

CONFIGURATION WITH CABLE CONFIGURATION WITH CONNECTOR K1 SHORT HOUSING S

50 (39)*

LED LED X 4 LED

4 51 4 60 (48)* 4 40

(*) The dimensions into brackets reter to short housing models

51 EMX INDUSTRIES INC.


Amplified Inductive Sensors 6.5
AMPLIFIED INDUCTIVE SENSORS INCREASED RANGE 1030 VDC 3 WIRES NPN OR PNP OUTPUT
Three-wire
Increased range, shielded, not shielded IS Series
Range, 2mm to 3mm
Short housing cable models
200mA NPN or PNP
Stainless steel
Operation LED
Identification code Wiring diagrams

BROWN
IS 27 D K1
SERIES IS
NPN BLACK

BLUE
NPN NO output
27 53
NOT SHIELDED
SHIELDED

NPN NC output
28 54 BROWN
PNP NO output
29 55
PNP NC output
30 56 PNP BLACK

INCREASED RANGE BLUE

CONNECTOR OUTPUT M8

SHIELDED NOTSHIELDED Connection with connector M8 (K1)

INCREASED RANGE
NOMINAL SWITCHING DISTANCE (Sn) 2 mm 3 mm
NOMINAL VOLTAGE 10 30 VDC (-15 / +10%)
RESIDUAL RIPPLE 10% 4
HYSTERESIS < 10% View of
MAX. OUTPUT CURRENT 200 mA tripole
RESIDUAL CURRENT < 10 mA 3 1 male
VOLTAGE DROP < 1.2 V (l = 100 mA) connector.
OPERATION LED Yellow
SWITCHING FREQUENCY 500 Hz
START UP DELAY 75 mS
REPEATABILITY 3% CONTACTS CONFIGURATION
SHORT CIRCUIT PROTECTION Present (self-resetting)
Contacts numbers
ELECTRIC PROTECTIONS Against polarity reversal - inductive loads Available
TEMPERATURE LIMITS - 25 +70 C
1 3 4
PROTECTION DEGREE IP 67 (NO or NC) NO/NC
CABLE LENGTH 2m
CABLE SECTION 3 x 0,14 mm2
HOUSING MATERIAL Stainless-steel
WEIGHT - Cable output - 80 g
WEIGHT - K1 connector output - 40 g
WEIGHT - K connector output - -

Dimensions (mm)

CONFIGURATION WITH CABLE CONNECTOR K1

LED 39 LED X 4

4 40 4 48

Note: the front part in blue refers to not shielded models

52
Inductive Sensors 8
INDUCTIVE SENSORS CONFORMING TO NAMUR RULES
Two-wire sensors IS Series
5-24 VAC/VDC input
Nickel plated brass
Shielded versions up to 1 mm
Not shielded versions up to 2 mm

Identification code Wiring diagrams

BROWN
IS 02 K
NAMUR
SERIES IS SENSOR
BLUE
ORDER CODES - Shielded
02
ORDER CODES - Not shielded
07
Connection with connector M12 (K)
CONNECTOR OUTPUT M12
K
CONNECTOR OUTPUT M8 1
K1
View of
2 4 quadripole
SHIELDED NOT SHIELDED male
NOMINAL SWITCHING DISTANCE (Sn) 1 mm 2 mm connector
NOMINAL VOLTAGE (Load resistence 1 K) 7.7 9 V DC
3
DC SUPPLY VOLTAGE 5 24 V DC
RESIDUAL RIPPLE 10% CONTACTS CONFIGURATION
HYSTERESIS 10% Contacts numbers
OUTPUT CURRENT (Metal present) 1 mA Available
1 2 3 4
OUTPUT CURRENT (Metal absent) 3 mA
NAMUR
SWITCHING FREQUENCY 2000 Hz
REPEATABILITY 3% NOTE: The K plug is compatible with the following connectors VAUDEHA,
TEMPERATURE LIMITS -25 +60 C BINDER, HIRSCHMANN, LUMBERG and AMPHENOL-TUCHEL.

PROTECTION DEGREE IP 67
CABLE LENGTH 2m Connection with connector M8 (K1)
CABLE SECTION 2 x 0.25 mm2 4
HOUSING MATERIAL Nickel-plated brass
View of
WEIGHT - Cable output - 80 g
tripole
WEIGHT - K1 connector output - 35 g 1 3 male
WEIGHT - K connector output - 55 g connector

CONTACTS CONFIGURATION
Contacts numbers
Available
1 3 4
NAMUR

Dimensions (mm)

CONFIGURATION WITH CABLE CONFIGURATION WITH CONNECTOR K CONFIGURATION WITH CONNECTOR K1

31 29 29 31

4 40 4 58 4 48

53 EMX INDUSTRIES INC.


Amplified Inductive Sensors 8
AMPLIFIED INDUCTIVE SENSORS 1030 V DC 3 WIRES NPN OR PNP OUTPUT
Three-wire, amplified, sensors IS Series
M8 stainless steel models
Short housing models
M8 and M12 quick connect models
Operation LED

Identification code Wiring diagrams


BROWN

IS 31 K S NPN BLACK

SERIES IS BLUE

NPN NO output
31 57 BROWN
NOT SHIELDED
SHIELDED

NPN NC output
32 58 PNP BLACK

PNP NO output
33 59 BLUE

PNP NC output
34 60
CONNECTOR OUTPUT M12 Connection with connector M12 (K)
K 1
CONNECTOR OUTPUT M8
K1 View of
CONFIGURATION WITH SHORT HOUSING
quadripole
2 4
male
connector.
SHIELDED NOT SHIELDED
NOMINAL SWITCHING DISTANCE (Sn) 1,5 mm 2 mm 3

NOMINAL VOLTAGE 10 30 VDC (-15 / +10%) Note: The K plug is compatible with the following connectors VAUDEHA,
BINDER, HIRSCHMANN, LUMBERG, AMPHENOL-TUCHEL.
RESIDUAL RIPPLE 10%
HYSTERESIS < 10% CONTACTS CONFIGURATION
MAX. OUTPUT CURRENT 200 mA
Contacts numbers
RESIDUAL CURRENT < 10 mA Available
1 2 3 4
VOLTAGE DROP < 1.2 V (l = 100 mA)
(NO or NC) NO/NC
OPERATION LED Yellow
SWITCHING FREQUENCY 1000 Hz
START UP DELAY 50 mS Connection with connector M8 (K1)
REPEATABILITY 3%
4
SHORT CIRCUIT PROTECTION Present (self-resetting)
ELECTRIC PROTECTIONS View of
Against polarity reversal - inductive loads
tripole
TEMPERATURE LIMITS - 25 +70 C 3 1
male
PROTECTION DEGREE IP 67
connector.
CABLE LENGTH 2m
CABLE SECTION 3 x 0,14 mm2
CONTACTS CONFIGURATION
HOUSING MATERIAL Stainless-steel
Contacts numbers
WEIGHT - Cable output - 80 g Available
WEIGHT - K1 connector output - 40 g 1 3 4
WEIGHT - K connector output - 55 g (NO or NC) NO/NC

Dimensions (mm)

42 LED 31 LED

CONFIGURATION
SHORT HOUSING
WITH CABLE

4 51 4 40

40 (29)* LED 42 (31)* LED X 4

CONNECTOR K CONNECTOR K1

29
4 69 (58)* 4 59 (48)*

(*) The dimensions into brackets reter to short housing models

54 EMX INDUSTRIES INC.


Amplified Inductive Sensors 8
AMPLIFIED INDUCTIVE SENSORS INCREASED RANGE 1030 VDC 3 WIRES NPN OR PNP OUTPUT
Three-wire
Increased range, shielded, not shielded IS Series
Range, 2 mm to 3 mm
Short housing cable models
200mA NPN or PNP
Housing stainless steel
Operation LED
Identification code Wiring diagrams
BROWN

IS 31 D K BLACK
NPN
SERIES IS
BLUE
NPN NO output
31 57
NOT SHIELDED

BROWN
SHIELDED

NPN NC output
32 58
BLACK
PNP NO output
33 59 PNP
PNP NC output
34 60 BLUE

INCREASED RANGE

CONNECTOR OUTPUT M12


Connection with connector M12 (K)
K 1
CONNECTOR OUTPUT M8
K1 View of
quadripole
SHIELDED NOT SHIELDED 2 4

INCREASED RANGE
male
NOMINAL SWITCHING DISTANCE (Sn) 2 mm 3 mm
connector.
NOMINAL VOLTAGE 10 30 VDC (-15 / +10%)
RESIDUAL RIPPLE 10% 3

HYSTERESIS < 10% CONTACTS CONFIGURATION


MAX. OUTPUT CURRENT 200 mA Contacts numbers
RESIDUAL CURRENT < 10 mA Available
1 2 3 4
VOLTAGE DROP < 1.2 V (l = 100 mA)
(NO or NC) NO/NC
OPERATION LED Yellow
SWITCHING FREQUENCY 500 Hz
START UP DELAY 75 mS Connection with connector M8 (K1)
REPEATABILITY 3% 4

SHORT CIRCUIT PROTECTION Present (self-resetting) View of


ELECTRIC PROTECTIONS Against polarity reversal - inductive loads tripole
TEMPERATURE LIMITS - 25 +70 C 3 1 male
PROTECTION DEGREE IP 67 connector.

CABLE LENGTH 2m
CABLE SECTION 3 x 0,14 mm2
CONTACTS CONFIGURATION
HOUSING MATERIAL Stainless-steel
Contacts numbers
WEIGHT - Cable output - 80 g Available
WEIGHT - K1 connector output - 40 g 1 3 4
WEIGHT - K connector output - 55 g (NO or NC) NO/NC

Dimensions (mm)

CONFIGURATION WITH CABLE CONNECTOR K CONNECTOR K1

31 LED 29 LED 31 LED X 4

29
4 40 4 58 4 48

Note: the front part in blue refers to not shielded models

55
Inductive Sensors 12
INDUCTIVE SENSORS CONFORMING TO NAMUR RULES
Two-wire sensors IS Series
5-24 VAC/VDC input
Nickel plated brass
Shielded versions up to 2 mm
Not shielded versions up to 4 mm

Identification code Wiring diagrams

BROWN
IS 03 K
NAMUR
SERIES IS SENSOR
BLUE
ORDER CODES - Shielded
03
ORDER CODES - Not shielded
08
Connection with connector M12 (K)
CONNECTOR OUTPUT M12
K
CONNECTOR OUTPUT M8 1
K1
View of
2 4 quadripole
SHIELDED NOT SHIELDED male
NOMINAL SWITCHING DISTANCE (Sn) 2 mm 4 mm connector
NOMINAL VOLTAGE (Load resistence 1 K) 7.7 9 V DC
3
DC SUPPLY VOLTAGE 5 24 V DC
RESIDUAL RIPPLE 10% CONTACTS CONFIGURATION
HYSTERESIS 10% Contacts numbers
OUTPUT CURRENT (Metal present) 1 mA Available
1 2 3 4
OUTPUT CURRENT (Metal absent) 3 mA
NAMUR
SWITCHING FREQUENCY 2000 Hz
REPEATABILITY 3% NOTE: The K plug is compatible with the following connectors VAUDEHA,
TEMPERATURE LIMITS -25 +60 C BINDER, HIRSCHMANN, LUMBERG and AMPHENOL-TUCHEL.

PROTECTION DEGREE IP 67
CABLE LENGTH 2m Connection with connector M8 (K1)
CABLE SECTION 2 x 0.25 mm2 4
HOUSING MATERIAL Nickel-plated brass
View of
WEIGHT - Cable output - 110 g
tripole
WEIGHT - K1 connector output - 60 g 1 3 male
WEIGHT - K connector output - 60 g connector

CONTACTS CONFIGURATION
Contacts numbers
Available
1 3 4
NAMUR

Dimensions (mm)

CONFIGURATION WITH CABLE CONFIGURATION WITH CONNECTOR K CONFIGURATION WITH CONNECTOR K1

27 31 31
6

8 9
4,5 41 4,5 46 4,5 48

Note: The front part in blue refers to not shielded models

56 EMX INDUSTRIES INC.


Amplified Inductive Sensors 12
AMPLIFIED INDUCTIVE SENSORS 1030 V DC 2 WIRES NO-NC PROGRAMMABLE OUTPUT
Two-wire - 10/30 VDC IS Series
M12 quick connect or integral cable
Shielded models up to 2 mm
Not shielded models up to 4 mm
Nickel plated brass

Identification code Wiring diagrams

BROWN

IS 11 K NO
BLUE
SERIES IS

BLUE
NO-NC PROGRAMMABLE OUTPUT - Shielded
11
NO-NC PROGRAMMABLE OUTPUT - Not shielded NC
17
BROWN
CONNECTOR OUTPUT M12

WARNING: The load can be indifferently connected in series to the blue


wire or to the brown wire to simulate NPN or PNP functionning logic.

SHIELDED NOT SHIELDED Connection with connector M12 (K)


NOMINAL SWITCHING DISTANCE (Sn) 2 mm 4 mm
NOMINAL VOLTAGE 10 30 VDC (-15 / +10%) 1
RESIDUAL RIPPLE 10%
HYSTERESIS < 10%
View of
MAX. OUTPUT CURRENT 100 mA
2 4 quadripole
MIN. OUTPUT CURRENT > 1,6 mA male
RESIDUAL CURRENT < 1,6 mA connector
VOLTAGE DROP < 6,5 V (I = 100 mA)
OPERATION LED Yellow
3
SWITCHING FREQUENCY 1000 Hz
START UP DELAY 50 mS
REPEATABILITY 3%
CONTACTS CONFIGURATION
SHORT CIRCUIT PROTECTION Present (self-resetting) Contacts numbers
ELECTRIC PROTECTIONS Against polarity reversal - inductive loads Available
1 2 3 4
TEMPERATURE LIMITS - 25 +70 C
NO
PROTECTION DEGREE IP 67
CABLE LENGTH 2m NC
CABLE SECTION 2 x 0.25 mm2
HOUSING MATERIAL Nickel-plated brass
WEIGHT - Cable output - 110 g
NOTE: The K plug is compatible with the following connectors VAUDEHA,
WEIGHT - K connector output - 60 g BINDER, HIRSCHMANN, LUMBERG, AMPHENOL-TUCHEL.

Dimensions (mm)

CONFIGURATION WITH CABLE CONFIGURATION WITH CONNECTOR K

LED x 4
40 6 50
LED

12 9
4,5 58 4,5 64

Note: The front part in blue refers to not shielded models

57 EMX INDUSTRIES INC.


Amplified Inductive Sensors 12
AMPLIFIED INDUCTIVE SENSORS INCREASED RANGE 1030 V DC 2 WIRES NO-NC PROGRAMMABLE OUTPUT
Two-wire, amplified


Increased range, shielded, not shielded
10 to 30 VDC
IS Series
Range, 4 mm to 8 mm
NO or NC select
M12 quick connect or integral cable
Nickel plated brass
Identification code Wiring diagrams

BROWN

IS 11 D K
NO
SERIES IS BLUE

NO-NC PROGRAMMABLE OUTPUT - Shielded


11 BLUE

NO-NC PROGRAMMABLE OUTPUT - Not shielded


17 NC
INCREASED RANGE BROWN

CONNECTOR OUTPUT M12


WARNING: The load can be indifferently connected in series to the blue
wire or to the brown wire to simulate NPN or PNP functionning logic.

SHIELDED NOT SHIELDED Connection with connector M12 (K)

INCREASED RANGE
NOMINAL SWITCHING DISTANCE (Sn) 4 mm 8 mm
NOMINAL VOLTAGE 10 30 VDC (-15 / +10%) 1
RESIDUAL RIPPLE 10%
HYSTERESIS < 10%
View of
MAX. OUTPUT CURRENT 100 mA
2 4 quadripole
MIN. OUTPUT CURRENT > 1,6 mA male
RESIDUAL CURRENT < 1,6 mA connector
VOLTAGE DROP < 6,5 V (I = 100 mA)
OPERATION LED Yellow
3
SWITCHING FREQUENCY 500 Hz
START UP DELAY 50 mS
REPEATABILITY 3%
CONTACTS CONFIGURATION
SHORT CIRCUIT PROTECTION Present (self-resetting) Contacts numbers
ELECTRIC PROTECTIONS Against polarity reversal - inductive loads Available
1 2 3 4
TEMPERATURE LIMITS - 25 +70 C
NO
PROTECTION DEGREE IP 67
CABLE LENGTH 2m NC
CABLE SECTION 2 x 0.25 mm2
HOUSING MATERIAL Nickel-plated brass
WEIGHT - Cable output - 110 g
NOTE: The K plug is compatible with the following connectors VAUDEHA,
WEIGHT - K connector output - 60 g BINDER, HIRSCHMANN, LUMBERG, AMPHENOL-TUCHEL.

Dimensions (mm)

CONFIGURATION WITH CABLE CONFIGURATION WITH CONNECTOR K

LED x 4
40 6 50
LED

12 9
4,5 58 4,5 65

Note: The front part in blue refers to not shielded models

58 EMX INDUSTRIES INC.


Amplified Inductive Sensors 12
AMPLIFIED INDUCTIVE SENSORS 1030 V DC 3 WIRES NPN OR PNP OUTPUT
Three-wire, amplified, sensors IS Series
Short housing models
M8 and M12 quick connect models
Operation LED

Identification code Wiring diagrams


BROWN

IS 35 K S NPN
BLACK

SERIES IS BLUE

NPN NO output
35 61 BROWN
NOT SHIELDED
SHIELDED

NPN NC output
36 62 PNP
BLACK

PNP NO output
38 64 BLUE

PNP NC output
39 65
CONNECTOR OUTPUT M12 Connection with connector M12 (K)
K 1
CONNECTOR OUTPUT M8
K1 View of
CONFIGURATION WITH SHORT HOUSING
quadripole
2 4
male
connector.
SHIELDED NOT SHIELDED
NOMINAL SWITCHING DISTANCE (Sn) 2 mm 4 mm 3

NOMINAL VOLTAGE 10 30 VDC (-15 / +10%) Note: The K plug is compatible with the following connectors VAUDEHA,
BINDER, HIRSCHMANN, LUMBERG, AMPHENOL-TUCHEL.
RESIDUAL RIPPLE 10%
HYSTERESIS < 10% CONTACTS CONFIGURATION
MAX. OUTPUT CURRENT 200 mA
Contacts numbers
RESIDUAL CURRENT < 10 mA Available
1 2 3 4
VOLTAGE DROP < 1.8 V (l = 100 mA)
(NO or NC) NO/NC
OPERATION LED Yellow
SWITCHING FREQUENCY 1000 Hz
START UP DELAY 50 mS Connection with connector M8 (K1)
REPEATABILITY 3%
4
SHORT CIRCUIT PROTECTION Present (self-resetting)
ELECTRIC PROTECTIONS View of
Against polarity reversal - inductive loads
tripole
TEMPERATURE LIMITS - 25 +60 C 3 1
male
PROTECTION DEGREE IP 67
connector.
CABLE LENGTH 2m
CABLE SECTION 3 x 0,25 mm2
CONTACTS CONFIGURATION
HOUSING MATERIAL Nickel-plated brass
Contacts numbers
WEIGHT - Cable output - 110 g Available
WEIGHT - K1 connector output - 60 g 1 3 4
WEIGHT - K connector output - 60 g (NO or NC) NO/NC

Dimensions (mm)
40 LED 27 LED

CONFIGURATION
SHORT HOUSING
WITH CABLE

12 16 8 6
4,5 68 4,5 41

50 (31)* LED 50 (31)* LED X 4

CONNECTOR K CONNECTOR K1

9 9

4,5 65 (46)* 4,5 68 (46)*

(*) The dimensions into brackets reter to short housing models


Note: the front part in blue refert to not shielded models.

59 EMX INDUSTRIES INC.


Amplified Inductive Sensors 12
AMPLIFIED INDUCTIVE SENSORS INCREASED RANGE 1030 VDC 4 WIRES NPN OR PNP OUTPUT
Four wire
Increased range, shielded, not shielded IS Series
Range, 4mm to 8mm
Short housing cable models
200mA NPN or PNP
Operation LED

Identification code Wiring diagrams

IS 37 D K BROWN NO NC

SERIES IS BLACK
NPN
WHITE
NO-NC
BLUE
NOT SHIELDED

NPN NO-NC
37 63
SHIELDED

PNP NO-NC
40 66 BROWN

WHITE
PNP
INCREASED RANGE
BLACK
CONNECTOR OUTPUT M12
NO-NC
K BLUE

CONNECTOR OUTPUT M8 NO NC
K1
SHIELDED NOT SHIELDED Connection with connector M12 (K)

INCREASED RANGE
NOMINAL SWITCHING DISTANCE (Sn) 4 mm 8 mm
NOMINAL VOLTAGE 10 30 VDC (-15 / +10%)
1
RESIDUAL RIPPLE 10%
HYSTERESIS < 10% View of

MAX. OUTPUT CURRENT 200 mA 2 4


quadripole
male
RESIDUAL CURRENT < 10 mA
connector.
VOLTAGE DROP < 1.2 V (l = 100 mA)
OPERATION LED Yellow 3

SWITCHING FREQUENCY 500 Hz


START UP DELAY 75 mS
REPEATABILITY 3%
CONTACTS CONFIGURATION
SHORT CIRCUIT PROTECTION Present (self-resetting)
ELECTRIC PROTECTIONS Against polarity reversal - inductive loads Contacts numbers
Available
TEMPERATURE LIMITS - 25 +70 C 1 2 3 4
PROTECTION DEGREE IP 67 (NO or NC) NC NO
CABLE LENGTH 2m
CABLE SECTION 3 x 0,25 mm2
HOUSING MATERIAL Nickel-plated brass
WEIGHT - Cable output - 110 g
WEIGHT - K connector output - 60 g

Dimensions (mm)

CONFIGURATION WITH CABLE CONNECTOR K

27 LED 31 LED

9
8 6
4,5 41 4,5 46

Note: the front part in blue refers to not shielded models

60 EMX INDUSTRIES INC.


Amplified Inductive Sensors 12
AMPLIFIED INDUCTIVE SENSORS 24230 VAC 2 WIRES NO OR NC OUTPUT

Two wires, 24-230 VAC IS Series


Cable or M12 quick-connect
Mini output current 20mA
Maxpeak (20ms) 1.5A
300mA max output

Identification code Wiring diagrams

IS 79 K BROWN
L
SERIES IS 24 230
VAC BLUE
N
NOT SHIELDED

NO output
79 85
SHIELDED

NC output
80 86 Warning: Short circuit in the output is not possible. Wrong supply
cables connections can irreparably damage the detector. Therefore sensors
whose output status is short-circuited will not be substituted under warranty.

CONNECTOR OUTPUT M12

SHIELDED NOT SHIELDED Connection with connector M12 (K)


NOMINAL SWITCHING DISTANCE (Sn) 2 mm 4 mm
NOMINAL VOLTAGE 24 230 VAC (-15/+10%)
1
NET FREQUENCY 50 60 Hz
HYSTERESIS < 10%
View of
MAX. OUTPUT CURRENT 300 mA quadripole
2 4
MIN. OUTPUT CURRENT 20 mA male
MAX. CURRENT PEAK (20 mS) 1,5 A connector.
RESIDUAL CURRENT < 1 mA
VOLTAGE DROP (Sensor ON) < 6 V (I = 100 mA) 3

OPERATION LED Yellow


SWITCHING FREQUENCY 12 Hz
START UP DELAY 300 mS CONTACTS CONFIGURATION
REPEATABILITY 3%
Contacts numbers
TEMPERATURE LIMITS -25 +70 C Available
PROTECTION DEGREE IP 67
1 2 3 4
CABLE LENGTH 2m (NO or NC) L N
CABLE SECTION 2 x 0.25 mm2
HOUSING MATERIAL Nickel-plated brass
WEIGHT - Cable output - 110 g
Note: The K plug is compatible with the following connectors VAUDEHA,
WEIGHT - K connector output - 60 g BINDER, HIRSCHMANN, LUMBERG, AMPHENOL-TUCHEL.

Dimensions (mm)

CONFIGURATION WITH CABLE CONFIGURATION WITH CONNECTOR K

55 64

LED LED x 4

4,5 73 4,5 78

Note: the front part il blue refers to not shielded models

61 EMX INDUSTRIES INC.


Amplified Inductive Sensors 12
AMPLIFIED INDUCTIVE SENSORS INCREASED RANGE 24230 VAC 2 WIRES NO OR NC OUTPUT
Two wires, 24-230 VAC


Increased range, shielded, not shielded
Range, 4 mm to 8 mm
IS Series
Cable or M12 quick-connect
Mini output current 20mA
Maxpeak (20ms) 1.5A
300mA max output

Identification code Wiring diagrams

BROWN
IS 79 D K L
SERIES IS
24 230
VAC
BLUE
N
NOT SHIELDED

NO output
79 85
SHIELDED

NC output
80 86
Warning: Short circuit in the output is not possible. Wrong supply
INCREASED RANGE
cables connections can irreparably damage the detector. Therefore sensors
whose output status is short-circuited will not be substituted under warranty.

CONNECTOR OUTPUT M12

SHIELDED NOT SHIELDED Connection with connector M12 (K)

INCREASED RANGE
NOMINAL SWITCHING DISTANCE (Sn) 4 mm 8 mm
NOMINAL VOLTAGE 24 230 VAC (-15/+10%)
1
NET FREQUENCY 50 60 Hz
HYSTERESIS < 10%
View of
MAX. OUTPUT CURRENT 300 mA quadripole
2 4
MIN. OUTPUT CURRENT 20 mA male
MAX. CURRENT PEAK (20 mS) 1,5 A connector.
RESIDUAL CURRENT < 1 mA
VOLTAGE DROP (Sensor ON) < 6 V (I = 100 mA) 3

OPERATION LED Yellow


SWITCHING FREQUENCY 12 Hz
START UP DELAY 300 mS CONTACTS CONFIGURATION
REPEATABILITY 3%
Contacts numbers
TEMPERATURE LIMITS -25 +70 C Available
PROTECTION DEGREE IP 67
1 2 3 4
CABLE LENGTH 2m (NO or NC) L N
CABLE SECTION 2 x 0.25 mm2
HOUSING MATERIAL Nickel-plated brass
WEIGHT - Cable output - 110 g
Note: The K plug is compatible with the following connectors VAUDEHA,
WEIGHT - K connector output - 60 g BINDER, HIRSCHMANN, LUMBERG, AMPHENOL-TUCHEL.

Dimensions (mm)

CONFIGURATION WITH CABLE CONFIGURATION WITH CONNECTOR K

55 64

LED LED x 4

4,5 73 4,5 78

Note: the front part il blue refers to not shielded models

62 EMX INDUSTRIES INC.


Inductive Sensors 18
INDUCTIVE SENSORS CONFORMING TO NAMUR RULES
Two-wire sensors IS Series
5-24 VAC/VDC input
Nickel plated brass
Shielded versions up to 5 mm
Not shielded versions up to 8 mm

Identification code Wiring diagrams

IS 04 K BROWN

NAMUR
SERIES IS
SENSOR
BLUE
ORDER CODES - Shielded
04
ORDER CODES - Not shielded
09
CONNECTOR OUTPUT M12

SHIELDED NOT SHIELDED Connection with connector M12 (K)


NOMINAL SWITCHING DISTANCE (Sn) 5 mm 8 mm
NOMINAL VOLTAGE (Load resistence 1 K) 7.7 9 V DC 1
DC SUPPLY VOLTAGE 5 24 V DC
RESIDUAL RIPPLE 10% View of
HYSTERESIS 10% 2 4 quadripole
OUTPUT CURRENT (Metal present) 1 mA male
OUTPUT CURRENT (Metal absent) 3 mA
connector
SWITCHING FREQUENCY 1000 Hz 3
REPEATABILITY 3%
TEMPERATURE LIMITS -25 +60 C
PROTECTION DEGREE IP 67 CONTACTS CONFIGURATION
CABLE LENGTH 2m Contacts numbers
CABLE SECTION Available
2 x 0.25 mm2
1 2 3 4
HOUSING MATERIAL Nickel-plated brass
NAMUR
WEIGHT - Cable output - 145 g
WEIGHT - K1 connector output - -
NOTE: The K plug is compatible with the following connectors VAUDEHA,
WEIGHT - K connector output - 95 g BINDER, HIRSCHMANN, LUMBERG and AMPHENOL-TUCHEL.

Dimensions (mm)

CONFIGURATION WITH CABLE CONFIGURATION WITH CONNECTOR K

28 28
6 16

9 12

7,5 43 7,5 53

Note: The front part in blue refers to not shielded models

65 EMX INDUSTRIES INC.


Amplified Inductive Sensors 18
AMPLIFIED INDUCTIVE SENSORS 1030 V DC 2 WIRES NO-NC PROGRAMMABLE OUTPUT
Two-wire - 10/30 VDC IS Series
M12 quick connect or integral cable
Shielded models up to 5 mm
Not shielded models up to 8 mm
Nickel plated brass

Identification code Wiring diagrams

BROWN

IS 13 K NO
BLUE
SERIES IS

BLUE
NO-NC PROGRAMMABLE OUTPUT - Shielded
13
NO-NC PROGRAMMABLE OUTPUT - Not shielded NC
19
BROWN
CONNECTOR OUTPUT M12

WARNING: The load can be indifferently connected in series to the blue


wire or to the brown wire to simulate NPN or PNP functionning logic.

SHIELDED NOT SHIELDED Connection with connector M12 (K)


NOMINAL SWITCHING DISTANCE (Sn) 5 mm 8 mm
NOMINAL VOLTAGE 10 30 VDC (-15 / +10%) 1
RESIDUAL RIPPLE 10%
HYSTERESIS < 10%
View of
MAX. OUTPUT CURRENT 100 mA
2 4 quadripole
MIN. OUTPUT CURRENT > 1,6 mA male
RESIDUAL CURRENT < 1,6 mA connector
VOLTAGE DROP < 6,5 V (I = 100 mA)
OPERATION LED Yellow
3
SWITCHING FREQUENCY 1000 Hz
START UP DELAY 50 mS
REPEATABILITY 3%
CONTACTS CONFIGURATION
SHORT CIRCUIT PROTECTION Present (self-resetting) Contacts numbers
ELECTRIC PROTECTIONS Against polarity reversal - inductive loads Available
1 2 3 4
TEMPERATURE LIMITS - 25 +70 C
NO
PROTECTION DEGREE IP 67
CABLE LENGTH 2m NC
CABLE SECTION 2 x 0.25 mm2
HOUSING MATERIAL Nickel-plated brass
WEIGHT - Cable output - 145 g
NOTE: The K plug is compatible with the following connectors VAUDEHA,
WEIGHT - K connector output - 95 g BINDER, HIRSCHMANN, LUMBERG, AMPHENOL-TUCHEL.

Dimensions (mm)

CONFIGURATION WITH CABLE CONFIGURATION WITH CONNECTOR K

50 6 50
LED LED x 4

12 12 16

7,5 68 7,5 78

Note: The front part in blue refers to not shielded models

66 EMX INDUSTRIES INC.


Amplified Inductive Sensors 18
AMPLIFIED INDUCTIVE SENSORS INCREASED RANGE 1030 V DC 2 WIRES NO-NC PROGRAMMABLE OUTPUT
Two-wire, amplified


Increased range, shielded, not shielded
10 to 30 VDC
IS Series
Range, 8 mm to 14 mm
NO or NC select
M12 quick connect or integral cable
Nickel plated brass

Identification code Wiring diagrams

BROWN
IS 13 D K
NO
SERIES IS BLUE

BLUE
NO-NC PROGRAMMABLE OUTPUT - Shielded
13
NO-NC PROGRAMMABLE OUTPUT - Not shielded
19 NC
BROWN
INCREASED RANGE

CONNECTOR OUTPUT M12 WARNING: The load can be indifferently connected in series to the blue
wire or to the brown wire to simulate NPN or PNP functionning logic.

SHIELDED NOT SHIELDED Connection with connector M12 (K)

INCREASED RANGE
NOMINAL SWITCHING DISTANCE (Sn) 8 mm 14 mm
NOMINAL VOLTAGE 10 30 VDC (-15 / +10%) 1
RESIDUAL RIPPLE 10%
HYSTERESIS < 10%
View of
MAX. OUTPUT CURRENT 100 mA
2 4 quadripole
MIN. OUTPUT CURRENT > 1,6 mA male
RESIDUAL CURRENT < 1,6 mA connector
VOLTAGE DROP < 6,5 V (I = 100 mA)
OPERATION LED Yellow
3
SWITCHING FREQUENCY 400 Hz
START UP DELAY 50 mS
REPEATABILITY 3%
CONTACTS CONFIGURATION
SHORT CIRCUIT PROTECTION Present (self-resetting) Contacts numbers
ELECTRIC PROTECTIONS Against polarity reversal - inductive loads Available
1 2 3 4
TEMPERATURE LIMITS - 25 +70 C
NO
PROTECTION DEGREE IP 67
CABLE LENGTH 2m NC
CABLE SECTION 2 x 0.25 mm2
HOUSING MATERIAL Nickel-plated brass
WEIGHT - Cable output - 145 g
NOTE: The K plug is compatible with the following connectors VAUDEHA,
WEIGHT - K connector output - 95 g BINDER, HIRSCHMANN, LUMBERG, AMPHENOL-TUCHEL.

Dimensions (mm)

CONFIGURATION WITH CABLE CONFIGURATION WITH CONNECTOR K

50 6 50
LED LED x 4

12 12 16

7,5 68 7,5 78

Note: The front part in blue refers to not shielded models

67
Amplified Inductive Sensors 18
AMPLIFIED INDUCTIVE SENSORS 1030 V DC 3 WIRES NPN OR PNP OUTPUT
Three-wire, amplified, sensors IS Series
Short housing models
M12 quick connect models
Operation LED

Identification code Wiring diagrams

IS 41 K S
BROWN
SERIES IS
BLACK
NPN
NPN NO output
41 67
NOT SHIELDED

BLUE
SHIELDED

NPN NC output
42 68 BROWN
PNP NO output
44 70 BLACK
PNP NC output PNP
45 71
BLUE
CONNECTOR OUTPUT M12

CONFIGURATION WITH SHORT HOUSING

SHIELDED NOT SHIELDED Connection with connector M12 (K)


NOMINAL SWITCHING DISTANCE (Sn) 5 mm 8 mm
NOMINAL VOLTAGE 10 30 VDC (-15 / +10%) 1
RESIDUAL RIPPLE 10%
HYSTERESIS < 10%
View of
MAX. OUTPUT CURRENT 200 mA
2 4 quadripole
RESIDUAL CURRENT < 10 mA
male
VOLTAGE DROP < 1.8 V (l = 100 mA) connector
OPERATION LED Yellow
SWITCHING FREQUENCY 1000 Hz
3
START UP DELAY 50 mS
REPEATABILITY 3%
SHORT CIRCUIT PROTECTION Present (self-resetting)
CONTACTS CONFIGURATION
ELECTRIC PROTECTIONS Against polarity reversal - inductive loads Contacts numbers
TEMPERATURE LIMITS - 25 +60 C Available
1 2 3 4
PROTECTION DEGREE IP 67
NO or NC NO/NC
CABLE LENGTH 2m
CABLE SECTION 3 x 0,25 mm2
HOUSING MATERIAL Nickel-plated brass
WEIGHT - Cable output - 145 g
WEIGHT - K1 connector output - -
NOTE: The K plug is compatible with the following connectors VAUDEHA,
WEIGHT - K connector output - 95 g BINDER, HIRSCHMANN, LUMBERG, AMPHENOL-TUCHEL.

Dimensions (mm)

CONFIGURATION WITH CABLE SHORT HOUSING CONNECTOR K

28 LED
50 (28)*
50 LED x 4
LED

9 6 12 16
12 16
7,5 78 7,5 43 7,5 78 (53)*

(*) The dimensions into brackets reter to short housing models


Note: the front part in blue refers 40 mt shielded models

68 EMX INDUSTRIES INC.


Amplified Inductive Sensors 18
AMPLIFIED INDUCTIVE SENSORS INCREASED RANGE 1030 VDC 4 WIRES NPN OR PNP OUTPUT
Four-wire, aplified sensors
Increased range, shielded, not shielded IS Series
Range, 8mm to 14mm
Short housing cable models
200mA NPN or PNP
Operation LED

Identification code Wiring diagrams

BROWN NO NC

IS 41 D K BLACK
NPN
SERIES IS
WHITE
NO-NC
BLUE
NOT SHIELDED

NPN NO-NC
43 69
SHIELDED

BROWN
PNP NO-NC
46 72 WHITE
PNP
BLACK
INCREASED RANGE NO-NC
BLUE
CONNECTOR OUTPUT M12 NO NC

SHIELDED NOT SHIELDED Connection with connector M12 (K)

INCREASED RANGE
NOMINAL SWITCHING DISTANCE (Sn) 8 mm 14 mm
NOMINAL VOLTAGE 10 30 VDC (-15 / +10%)
1
RESIDUAL RIPPLE 10%
HYSTERESIS < 10%
View of
MAX. OUTPUT CURRENT 200 mA quadripole
2 4
RESIDUAL CURRENT < 10 mA male
VOLTAGE DROP < 1.2 V (l = 100 mA) connector.
OPERATION LED Yellow
SWITCHING FREQUENCY 400 Hz 3

START UP DELAY 75 mS
REPEATABILITY 3%
SHORT CIRCUIT PROTECTION Present (self-resetting) CONTACTS CONFIGURATION
ELECTRIC PROTECTIONS Against polarity reversal - inductive loads Contacts numbers
Available
TEMPERATURE LIMITS - 25 +70 C 1 2 3 4
PROTECTION DEGREE IP 67
(NO or NC) NC NO
CABLE LENGTH 2m
CABLE SECTION 3 x 0,25 mm2
HOUSING MATERIAL Nickel-plated brass
WEIGHT - Cable output - 145 g
WEIGHT - K1 connector output - -
WEIGHT - K connector output - 95 g

Dimensions (mm)

CONFIGURATION WITH CABLE CONNECTOR K

28 LED
28
LED x 4

9 6
12 16

7.5 43 7.5 53

Note: the front part in blue refers to not shielded models.

69
Amplified Inductive Sensors 18
AMPLIFIED INDUCTIVE SENSORS 24230 VAC 2 WIRES NO OR NC OUTPUT
Two wires, 24-230 VAC IS Series
Cable or M12 quick-connect
Mini output current 20mA
Maxpeak (20ms) 1.5A
300mA max output

Identification code Wiring diagrams

IS 81 K BROWN
L
SERIES IS 24 230
VAC
BLUE
N
NOT SHIELDED

NO output
81 87
SHIELDED

NC output
82 88
Warning: Short circuit in the output is not possible. Wrong supply
CONNECTOR OUTPUT M12 cables connections can irreparably damage the detector. Therefore sensors
whose output status is short-circuited will not be substituted under warranty.

SHIELDED NOT SHIELDED Connection with connector M12 (K)


NOMINAL SWITCHING DISTANCE (Sn) 5 mm 8 mm
NOMINAL VOLTAGE 24 230 VAC (-15/+10%)
1
NET FREQUENCY 50 60 Hz
HYSTERESIS < 10%
View of
MAX. OUTPUT CURRENT 300 mA quadripole
2 4
MIN. OUTPUT CURRENT 20 mA male
MAX. CURRENT PEAK (20 mS) 1,5 A connector.
RESIDUAL CURRENT < 1 mA
VOLTAGE DROP (Sensor ON) < 6 V (I = 100 mA) 3

OPERATION LED Yellow


SWITCHING FREQUENCY 12 Hz
START UP DELAY 300 mS CONTACTS CONFIGURATION
REPEATABILITY 3%
Contacts numbers
TEMPERATURE LIMITS -25 +70 C Available
PROTECTION DEGREE IP 67
1 2 3 4
CABLE LENGTH 2m (NO or NC) L N
CABLE SECTION 2 x 0.25 mm2
HOUSING MATERIAL Nickel-plated brass
WEIGHT - Cable output - 145 g
Note: The K plug is compatible with the following connectors VAUDEHA,
WEIGHT - K connector output - 95 g BINDER, HIRSCHMANN, LUMBERG, AMPHENOL-TUCHEL.

Dimensions (mm)

CONFIGURATION WITH CABLE CONFIGURATION WITH CONNECTOR K

50 50
LED LED x 4

12 16 12 16

7,5 78 7,5 78

Note: the front part in blue refers to not shielded models

70 EMX INDUSTRIES INC.


Amplified Inductive Sensors 18
AMPLIFIED INDUCTIVE SENSORS INCREASED RANGE 24230 VAC 2 WIRES NO OR NC OUTPUT
Two wires, 24-230 VAC
Increased range, shielded, not shielded IS Series
Range, 8 mm to 14 mm
Cable or M12 quick-connect
Mini output current 20mA
Maxpeak (20ms) 1.5A
300mA max output
Identification code Wiring diagrams

IS 81 D K BROWN
L
SERIES IS
24 230
VAC
NOT SHIELDED

NO output
81 87
SHIELDED

BLUE
N
NC output
82 88
INCREASED RANGE

Warning: Short circuit in the output is not possible. Wrong supply


cables connections can irreparably damage the detector. Therefore sensors
CONNECTOR OUTPUT M12 whose output status is short-circuited will not be substituted under warranty.

SHIELDED NOT SHIELDED Connection with connector M12 (K)

INCREASED RANGE
NOMINAL SWITCHING DISTANCE (Sn) 8 mm 14 mm
NOMINAL VOLTAGE 24 230 VAC (-15/+10%)
1
NET FREQUENCY 50 60 Hz
HYSTERESIS < 10%
View of
MAX. OUTPUT CURRENT 300 mA quadripole
2 4
MIN. OUTPUT CURRENT 20 mA male
MAX. CURRENT PEAK (20 mS) 1,5 A connector.
RESIDUAL CURRENT < 1 mA
VOLTAGE DROP (Sensor ON) < 6 V (I = 100 mA) 3

OPERATION LED Yellow


SWITCHING FREQUENCY 12 Hz
START UP DELAY 300 mS CONTACTS CONFIGURATION
REPEATABILITY 3%
Contacts numbers
TEMPERATURE LIMITS -25 +70 C Available
PROTECTION DEGREE IP 67
1 2 3 4
CABLE LENGTH 2m (NO or NC) L N
CABLE SECTION 2 x 0.25 mm2
HOUSING MATERIAL Nickel-plated brass
WEIGHT - Cable output - 145 g
Note: The K plug is compatible with the following connectors VAUDEHA,
WEIGHT - K connector output - 95 g BINDER, HIRSCHMANN, LUMBERG, AMPHENOL-TUCHEL.

Dimensions (mm)

CONFIGURATION WITH CABLE CONFIGURATION WITH CONNECTOR K

50 50
LED LED x 4

12 16 12 16

7,5 78 7,5 78

Note: the front part in blue refers to not shielded models

71
Inductive Sensors 30
INDUCTIVE SENSORS CONFORMING TO NAMUR RULES
Two-wire sensors IS Series
5-24 VAC/VDC input
Nickel plated brass
Shielded versions up to 10 mm
Not shielded versions up to 15 mm

Identification code Wiring diagrams

BROWN
IS 05 K
NAMUR
SERIES IS SENSOR
BLUE
ORDER CODES - Shielded
05
ORDER CODES - Not shielded
10
CONNECTOR OUTPUT M12

SHIELDED NOT SHIELDED Connection with connector M12 (K)


NOMINAL SWITCHING DISTANCE (Sn) 10 mm 15 mm
NOMINAL VOLTAGE (Load resistence 1 K) 7.7 9 V DC 1
DC SUPPLY VOLTAGE 5 24 V DC
RESIDUAL RIPPLE 10% View of
HYSTERESIS 10% 2 4 quadripole
OUTPUT CURRENT (Metal present) 1 mA male
OUTPUT CURRENT (Metal absent) 3 mA
connector
SWITCHING FREQUENCY 500 Hz 3
REPEATABILITY 3%
TEMPERATURE LIMITS -25 +60 C
PROTECTION DEGREE IP 67 CONTACTS CONFIGURATION
CABLE LENGTH 2m Contacts numbers
CABLE SECTION Available
2 x 0.25 mm2
1 2 3 4
HOUSING MATERIAL Nickel-plated brass
NAMUR
WEIGHT - Cable output - 210 g
WEIGHT - K1 connector output - -
NOTE: The K plug is compatible with the following connectors VAUDEHA,
WEIGHT - K connector output - 170 g BINDER, HIRSCHMANN, LUMBERG and AMPHENOL-TUCHEL.

Dimensions (mm)

CONFIGURATION WITH CABLE CONFIGURATION WITH CONNECTOR K


28 28
6 16

11 12

9 45 9 55

Note: the front part in blue refers to not shielded models

74 EMX INDUSTRIES INC.


Amplified Inductive Sensors 30
AMPLIFIED INDUCTIVE SENSORS 1030 V DC 2 WIRES NO-NC PROGRAMMABLE OUTPUT
Two-wire - 10/30 VDC IS Series
M12 quick connect or integral cable
Shielded models up to 10 mm
Not shielded models up to 15 mm
Nickel plated brass

Identification code Wiring diagrams

BROWN

IS 15 K NO
BLUE
SERIES IS

BLUE
NO-NC PROGRAMMABLE OUTPUT - Shielded
15
NO-NC PROGRAMMABLE OUTPUT - Not shielded NC
21
BROWN
CONNECTOR OUTPUT M12

WARNING: The load can be indifferently connected in series to the blue


wire or to the brown wire to simulate NPN or PNP functionning logic.

SHIELDED NOT SHIELDED Connection with connector M12 (K)


NOMINAL SWITCHING DISTANCE (Sn) 10 mm 15 mm
NOMINAL VOLTAGE 10 30 VDC (-15 / +10%) 1
RESIDUAL RIPPLE 10%
HYSTERESIS < 10%
View of
MAX. OUTPUT CURRENT 100 mA
2 4 quadripole
MIN. OUTPUT CURRENT > 1,6 mA male
RESIDUAL CURRENT < 1,6 mA connector
VOLTAGE DROP < 6,5 V (I = 100 mA)
OPERATION LED Yellow
3
SWITCHING FREQUENCY 300 Hz
START UP DELAY 50 mS
REPEATABILITY 3%
CONTACTS CONFIGURATION
SHORT CIRCUIT PROTECTION Present (self-resetting) Contacts numbers
ELECTRIC PROTECTIONS Against polarity reversal - inductive loads Available
1 2 3 4
TEMPERATURE LIMITS - 25 +70 C
NO
PROTECTION DEGREE IP 67
CABLE LENGTH 2m NC
CABLE SECTION 2 x 0.25 mm2
HOUSING MATERIAL Nickel-plated brass
WEIGHT - Cable output - 210 g
NOTE: The K plug is compatible with the following connectors VAUDEHA,
WEIGHT - K connector output - 170 g BINDER, HIRSCHMANN, LUMBERG, AMPHENOL-TUCHEL.

Dimensions (mm)

CONFIGURATION WITH CABLE CONFIGURATION WITH CONNECTOR K

50 6 LED 50

LED x 4

12 12 16
9 68 9 78

Note: the front part in blue refers to not shielded models

75 EMX INDUSTRIES INC.


Amplified Inductive Sensors 30
AMPLIFIED INDUCTIVE SENSORS INCREASED RANGE 1030 V DC 2 WIRES NO-NC PROGRAMMABLE OUTPUT
Two-wire, amplified


Increased range, shielded, not shielded
10 to 30 VDC
IS Series
Range, 15 mm to 20 mm
NO or NC select
M12 quick connect or integral cable
Nickel plated brass

Identification code Wiring diagrams

BROWN
IS 15 D K
NO
SERIES IS BLUE

BLUE
NO-NC PROGRAMMABLE OUTPUT - Shielded
15
NO-NC PROGRAMMABLE OUTPUT - Not shielded
21 NC
INCREASED RANGE BROWN

CONNECTOR OUTPUT M12 WARNING: The load can be indifferently connected in series to the blue
wire or to the brown wire to simulate NPN or PNP functionning logic.

SHIELDED NOT SHIELDED Connection with connector M12 (K)

INCREASED RANGE
NOMINAL SWITCHING DISTANCE (Sn) 15 mm 20 mm
NOMINAL VOLTAGE 10 30 VDC (-15 / +10%) 1
RESIDUAL RIPPLE 10%
HYSTERESIS < 10%
View of
MAX. OUTPUT CURRENT 100 mA
2 4 quadripole
MIN. OUTPUT CURRENT > 1,6 mA male
RESIDUAL CURRENT < 1,6 mA connector
VOLTAGE DROP < 6,5 V (I = 100 mA)
OPERATION LED Yellow
3
SWITCHING FREQUENCY 200 Hz
START UP DELAY 50 mS
REPEATABILITY 3%
CONTACTS CONFIGURATION
SHORT CIRCUIT PROTECTION Present (self-resetting) Contacts numbers
ELECTRIC PROTECTIONS Against polarity reversal - inductive loads Available
1 2 3 4
TEMPERATURE LIMITS - 25 +70 C
NO
PROTECTION DEGREE IP 67
CABLE LENGTH NC
2m
CABLE SECTION 2 x 0.25 mm2
HOUSING MATERIAL Nickel-plated brass
WEIGHT - Cable output - 210 g
NOTE: The K plug is compatible with the following connectors VAUDEHA,
WEIGHT - K connector output - 170 g BINDER, HIRSCHMANN, LUMBERG, AMPHENOL-TUCHEL.

Dimensions (mm)

CONFIGURATION WITH CABLE CONFIGURATION WITH CONNECTOR K

50 6 LED 50

LED x 4

12 12 16
9 68 9 78

Note: the front part in blue refers to not shielded models

76 EMX INDUSTRIES INC.


Amplified Inductive Sensors 30
AMPLIFIED INDUCTIVE SENSORS 1030 V DC 3 WIRES NPN OR PNP OUTPUT
Three-wire, amplified, sensors IS Series
Short housing models
M12 quick connect models
Operation LED

Identification code Wiring diagrams

IS 47 K S BROWN

BLACK
SERIES IS NPN
BLUE
NPN NO output
47 73
NOT SHIELDED
SHIELDED

NPN NC output
48 74 BROWN
PNP NO output
50 76
BLACK
PNP NC output
51 77 PNP
BLUE
CONNECTOR OUTPUT M12

CONFIGURATION WITH SHORT HOUSING

SHIELDED NOT SHIELDED Connection with connector M12 (K)


NOMINAL SWITCHING DISTANCE (Sn) 10 mm 15 mm
NOMINAL VOLTAGE 10 30 VDC (-15 / +10%) 1

RESIDUAL RIPPLE 10% View of


HYSTERESIS < 10% quadripole
2 4
MAX. OUTPUT CURRENT 200 mA male
connector.
RESIDUAL CURRENT < 10 mA
VOLTAGE DROP < 1.8 V (l = 100 mA) 3

OPERATION LED Yellow


Note: The K plug is compatible with the following connectors VAUDEHA,
SWITCHING FREQUENCY 300 Hz BINDER, HIRSCHMANN, LUMBERG, AMPHENOL-TUCHEL.
START UP DELAY 50 mS
REPEATABILITY 3%
CONTACTS CONFIGURATION
SHORT CIRCUIT PROTECTION Present (self-resetting)
ELECTRIC PROTECTIONS Contacts numbers
Against polarity reversal - inductive loads Available
TEMPERATURE LIMITS - 25 +60 C 1 2 3 4
PROTECTION DEGREE IP 67 (NO or NC) NO/NC
CABLE LENGTH 2m
CABLE SECTION 3 x 0,25 mm2
HOUSING MATERIAL Nickel-plated brass
WEIGHT - Cable output - 210 g
WEIGHT - K1 connector output - -
WEIGHT - K connector output - 170 g

Dimensions (mm)

CONFIGURATION WITH CABLE SHORT HOUSING CONNECTOR K

28 LED
50 50 (28)*
LED LED x 4

12 16 9 6 12 16

7,5 78 7,5 43 7,5 78 (53)*

(*) The dimensions into brackets reter to short housing models


Note: the front part in blue refers to not shielded models

77 EMX INDUSTRIES INC.


Amplified Inductive Sensors 30
AMPLIFIED INDUCTIVE SENSORS INCREASED RANGE 1030 VDC 4 WIRES NPN OR PNP OUTPUT
Four-wire
Increased range, shielded, not shielded IS Series
Range, 15mm to 20 mm
Short housing
200mA NPN or PNP
Operation LED

Identification code Wiring diagrams

BROWN NO NC

IS 49 D K NPN BLACK

SERIES IS WHITE
NO-NC
BLUE
NOT SHIELDED

NPN NO-NC
49 75
SHIELDED

BROWN
PNP NO-NC
52 78 WHITE
PNP
BLACK
INCREASED RANGE NO-NC
BLUE
CONNECTOR OUTPUT M12 NO NC

SHIELDED NOT SHIELDED Connection with connector M12 (K)

INCREASED RANGE
NOMINAL SWITCHING DISTANCE (Sn) 15 mm 20 mm
NOMINAL VOLTAGE 10 30 VDC (-15 / +10%)
1
RESIDUAL RIPPLE 10%
HYSTERESIS < 10%
View of
MAX. OUTPUT CURRENT 200 mA quadripole
2 4
RESIDUAL CURRENT < 10 mA male
VOLTAGE DROP < 1.2 V (l = 100 mA) connector.
OPERATION LED Yellow
SWITCHING FREQUENCY 200 Hz 3

START UP DELAY 75 mS
REPEATABILITY 3%
SHORT CIRCUIT PROTECTION Present (self-resetting) CONTACTS CONFIGURATION
ELECTRIC PROTECTIONS Against polarity reversal - inductive loads Contacts numbers
Available
TEMPERATURE LIMITS - 25 +70 C 1 2 3 4
PROTECTION DEGREE IP 67
(NO or NC) NC NO
CABLE LENGTH 2m
CABLE SECTION 3 x 0,25 mm2
HOUSING MATERIAL Nickel-plated brass
WEIGHT - Cable output - 210 g
WEIGHT - K1 connector output - -
WEIGHT - K connector output - 170 g

Dimensions (mm)

CONFIGURATION WITH CABLE CONNECTOR K

28
28 LED x 4
LED

11 6 12 16

9 45 9 55

Note: the front part in blue refers to not shielded models.

78
Amplified Inductive Sensors 30
AMPLIFIED INDUCTIVE SENSORS 24230 VAC 2 WIRES NO OR NC OUTPUT


Two wires, 24-230 VAC
Cable or M12 quick-connect
IS Series
Mini output current 20mA
Maxpeak (20ms) 1.5A
300mA max output

Identification code Wiring diagrams

IS 83 K BROWN
L
SERIES IS 24 230
VAC
BLUE
N
NOT SHIELDED

NO output
83 89
SHIELDED

NC output
84 90 Warning: Short circuit in the output is not possible. Wrong supply
cables connections can irreparably damage the detector. Therefore sensors
whose output status is short-circuited will not be substituted under warranty.

CONNECTOR OUTPUT M12

SHIELDED NOT SHIELDED Connection with connector M12 (K)


NOMINAL SWITCHING DISTANCE (Sn) 10 mm 15 mm
NOMINAL VOLTAGE 24 230 VAC (-15/+10%)
1
NET FREQUENCY 50 60 Hz
HYSTERESIS < 10%
View of
MAX. OUTPUT CURRENT 300 mA quadripole
2 4
MIN. OUTPUT CURRENT 20 mA male
MAX. CURRENT PEAK (20 mS) 1,5 A connector.
RESIDUAL CURRENT < 1 mA
VOLTAGE DROP (Sensor ON) < 6 V (I = 100 mA) 3

OPERATION LED Yellow


SWITCHING FREQUENCY 12 Hz
START UP DELAY 300 mS CONTACTS CONFIGURATION
REPEATABILITY 3%
Contacts numbers
TEMPERATURE LIMITS -25 +70 C Available
PROTECTION DEGREE IP 67
1 2 3 4
CABLE LENGTH 2m (NO or NC) L N
CABLE SECTION 2 x 0.25 mm2
HOUSING MATERIAL Nickel-plated brass
WEIGHT - Cable output - 210 g
Note: The K plug is compatible with the following connectors VAUDEHA,
WEIGHT - K connector output - 170 g BINDER, HIRSCHMANN, LUMBERG, AMPHENOL-TUCHEL.

Dimensions (mm)

CONFIGURATION WITH CABLE CONFIGURATION WITH CONNECTOR K

50 LED 50

LED x 4

12 16 12 16

9 78 9 78

Note: the front part in blue refers to not shielded models

79 EMX INDUSTRIES INC.


Amplified Inductive Sensors 30
AMPLIFIED INDUCTIVE SENSORS INCREASED RANGE 24230 VAC 2 WIRES NO OR NC OUTPUT
Two wires, 24-230 VAC
Increased range, shielded, not shielded IS Series
Range, 15mm to 20mm
Cable or M12 quick-connect
Mini output current 20mA
Maxpeak (20ms) 1.5A
300mA max output
Identification code Wiring diagrams

IS 83 D K BROWN
L
SERIES IS 24 230
VAC
NOT SHIELDED

NO output
83 89
SHIELDED

BLUE
N
NC output
84 90
INCREASED RANGE Warning: Short circuit in the output is not possible. Wrong supply
cables connections can irreparably damage the detector. Therefore sensors
whose output status is short-circuited will not be substituted under warranty.
CONNECTOR OUTPUT M12

SHIELDED NOT SHIELDED Connection with connector M12 (K)

INCREASED RANGE
NOMINAL SWITCHING DISTANCE (Sn) 15 mm 20 mm
NOMINAL VOLTAGE 24 230 VAC (-15/+10%)
1
NET FREQUENCY 50 60 Hz
HYSTERESIS < 10%
View of
MAX. OUTPUT CURRENT 300 mA quadripole
2 4
MIN. OUTPUT CURRENT 20 mA male
MAX. CURRENT PEAK (20 mS) 1,5 A connector.
RESIDUAL CURRENT < 1 mA
VOLTAGE DROP (Sensor ON) < 6 V (I = 100 mA) 3

OPERATION LED Yellow


SWITCHING FREQUENCY 12 Hz
START UP DELAY 300 mS CONTACTS CONFIGURATION
REPEATABILITY 3%
Contacts numbers
TEMPERATURE LIMITS -25 +70 C Available
PROTECTION DEGREE IP 67
1 2 3 4
CABLE LENGTH 2m (NO or NC) L N
CABLE SECTION 2 x 0.25 mm2
HOUSING MATERIAL Nickel-plated brass
WEIGHT - Cable output - 210 g
Note: The K plug is compatible with the following connectors VAUDEHA,
WEIGHT - K connector output - 170 g BINDER, HIRSCHMANN, LUMBERG, AMPHENOL-TUCHEL.

Dimensions (mm)

CONFIGURATION WITH CABLE CONFIGURATION WITH CONNECTOR K

50 LED 50

LED x 4

12 16 12 16

9 78 9 78

Note: the front part in blue refers to not shielded models

80
Hall Effect Magnetic Sensors 9
HALL EFFECT MAGNETIC PROXIMITY SENSORS 1230 VDC PNP OUTPUT
Three-wire sensors
Fast 50 S ON/OFF HS Series
Sensing models: Front end travel
Bilateral side travel
Choice of magnet targets
PNP NC or NO
Identification code Wiring diagrams

HS 01 B BROWN

PNP BLACK
SERIES HS
NO
BLUE
PNP NO
01
BROWN
PNP NC
02
PNP BLACK
BILATERAL SENSITIVITY
B NC
BLUE
FRONTAL SENSITIVITY
F

MAGNETIC FLUX (Gauss) Hall effect sensor / magnet switching distance (mm)
SENSOR ON 25 (Tip. 15 at 25C)
SENSORE OFF 5 (Tip. 11 at 25C)
DIAMETER 9
HYSTERESIS Max. diff. 7 (Tip. 4 at 25C) Distance Hysteresis
NOMINAL VOLTAGE 12 30 VDC (-15/+10%)
RESIDUAL RIPPLE 10%
MAX. CURRENT OUTPUT 200 mA 33 4
ABSORPTION AT 30 VDC 10 mA MG01

VOLTAGE DROP (Sensor ON) < 1.8 V


YELLOW LED Output indicator 30 4
GREEN LED Supply indicator MG02

SWITCHING FREQUENCY (max.) 10 kHz


TIME RESPONSE 100 S 18 5
START UP DELAY 50 mS MG03

SHORT CIRCUIT PROTECTION Present (self-resetting)


ELECTRIC PROTECTIONS Against reversal polarity - inductive loads 41 6,5
TEMPERATURE LIMITS - 20 +60 C MG04

PROTECTION DEGREE IP 67
CABLE LENGTH 2m 35 7
CABLE SECTION 3 x 0.25 mm2 MG05

HOUSING MATERIAL Nickel-plated brass


WEIGHT (Approximately) 50 g WARNING: The data specified in this table have an approximate value because they
depend on the magnet position, on the material on which it is applied (ferromagnetic
or not) and because they are related to the magnet during the frontal approach.

Dimensions (mm) Magnets dimensions (mm)


LED MG01 (Ferrite) MG02 (Ferrite)
M5

FRONTAL MG05
Sensitivity
SENSITIVITY 4
(Ferrite in plastic housing)
7 9 10 18
20 10 22 16 7 12
40
MG03 MG04
10

(Alnico in aluminium housing) (Ferrite in plastic housing)


32 42,5
6 20 6
LED LED
52
63

Sensitivity
43

Sensitivity
10,5
8

Cable 33
BILATERAL 3,2
10

SENSITIVITY 5
4

18
15

27

7,5 2,5 2,5 15,5


2 Sensitivity
Sensitivity 6
9

40
Back view 3,2

EMX INDUSTRIES INC.


Hall Effect Magnetic Sensors 12
HALL EFFECT MAGNETIC PROXIMITY SENSORS 1230 VDC PNP OUTPUT
Three-wire sensors
Fast 50 S ON/OFF HS Series
Sensing models: Front end travel
Bilateral side travel
Choice of magnet targets
PNP NC or NO
Identification code Wiring diagrams

BROWN
HS 03 B
PNP BLACK
SERIES HS
NO
BLUE

PNP NO
03 BROWN
PNP NC
04 PNP BLACK

NC
BILATERAL SENSITIVITY
B BLUE
FRONTAL SENSITIVITY
F

MAGNETIC FLUX (Gauss) Hall effect sensor / magnet switching distance (mm)
SENSOR ON 25 (Tip. 15 at 25C)
SENSORE OFF 5 (Tip. 11 at 25C)
DIAMETER 12
HYSTERESIS Max. diff. 7 (Tip. 4 at 25C) Distance Hysteresis
NOMINAL VOLTAGE 12 30 VDC (-15/+10%)
RESIDUAL RIPPLE 10%
MAX. CURRENT OUTPUT 200 mA 33 4
ABSORPTION AT 30 VDC 10 mA MG01

VOLTAGE DROP (Sensor ON) < 1.8 V


YELLOW LED Output indicator 30 4
GREEN LED Supply indicator MG02

SWITCHING FREQUENCY (max.) 10 kHz


TIME RESPONSE 100 S 18 5
START UP DELAY 50 mS MG03

SHORT CIRCUIT PROTECTION Present (self-resetting)


ELECTRIC PROTECTIONS Against reversal polarity - inductive loads 41 6,5
TEMPERATURE LIMITS - 20 +60 C MG04

PROTECTION DEGREE IP 67
CABLE LENGTH 2m 35 7
CABLE SECTION 3 x 0.25 mm2 MG05

HOUSING MATERIAL Nickel-plated brass


WEIGHT (Approximately) 110 g WARNING: The data specified in this table have an approximate value because they
depend on the magnet position, on the material on which it is applied (ferromagnetic
or not) and because they are related to the magnet during the frontal approach.

Dimensions (mm) Magnets dimensions (mm)


LED MG01 (Ferrite) MG02 (Ferrite)
M5

FRONTAL Sensitivity MG05


(Ferrite in plastic housing)
SENSITIVITY 4
7 9 10 18
20 10 22 16 7 12

42 MG03 MG04
10

(Alnico in aluminium housing) (Ferrite in plastic housing)


32 42,5
Sensitivity
Sensitivity LED LED 6 20 6
52
63

43
10,5
8

BILATERAL Cable
33
3,2
SENSITIVITY
10
4

5
18
15

27

7,5 2,5 2,5 15,5


2 Sensitivity
6
Sensitivity
9

42
3,2
Back view

EMX INDUSTRIES INC.


Hall Effect Magnetic Sensors 18
HALL EFFECT MAGNETIC PROXIMITY SENSORS 1230 VDC PNP OUTPUT
Three-wire sensors
Fast 50 S ON/OFF HS Series
Sensing models: Front end travel
Bilateral side travel
Choice of magnet targets
PNP NC or NO
Identification code Wiring diagrams

HS 05 B BROWN

PNP BLACK
SERIES HS
NO
BLUE

PNP NO
05 BROWN
PNP NC
06
PNP BLACK

BILATERAL SENSITIVITY
B NC
BLUE
FRONTAL SENSITIVITY
F

MAGNETIC FLUX (Gauss) Hall effect sensor / magnet switching distance (mm)
SENSOR ON 25 (Tip. 15 at 25C)
SENSORE OFF 5 (Tip. 11 at 25C)
DIAMETER 18
HYSTERESIS Max. diff. 7 (Tip. 4 at 25C) Distance Hysteresis
NOMINAL VOLTAGE 12 30 VDC (-15/+10%)
RESIDUAL RIPPLE 10%
MAX. CURRENT OUTPUT 200 mA 33 4
ABSORPTION AT 30 VDC 10 mA MG01

VOLTAGE DROP (Sensor ON) < 1.8 V


YELLOW LED Output indicator 30 4
GREEN LED Supply indicator MG02

SWITCHING FREQUENCY (max.) 10 kHz


TIME RESPONSE 100 S 18 5
START UP DELAY 50 mS MG03

SHORT CIRCUIT PROTECTION Present (self-resetting)


ELECTRIC PROTECTIONS Against reversal polarity - inductive loads 41 6,5
TEMPERATURE LIMITS - 20 +60 C MG04

PROTECTION DEGREE IP 67
CABLE LENGTH 2m 35 7
CABLE SECTION 3 x 0.25 mm2 MG05

HOUSING MATERIAL Nickel-plated brass


WEIGHT (Approximately) 145 g WARNING: The data specified in this table have an approximate value because they
depend on the magnet position, on the material on which it is applied (ferromagnetic
or not) and because they are related to the magnet during the frontal approach.

Dimensions (mm) Magnets dimensions (mm)


LED visible through MG01 (Ferrite) MG02 (Ferrite)
transparence
M5

FRONTAL Sensitivity MG05


SENSITIVITY 4
(Ferrite in plastic housing)
7 9 10 18
20 10 22 16 7 12

42 MG03 MG04
10

(Alnico in aluminium housing) (Ferrite in plastic housing)


32 42,5
Sensitivity
Sensitivity LED visible through 6 20 6
transparence
52
63

43
10,5
8

Cable
BILATERAL 33
3,2
SENSITIVITY
10
4

5
18
15

27

7,5 2,5 2,5 15,5


Sensitivity
2 Sensitivity 6
9

42 3,2
Back view

EMX INDUSTRIES INC.


Reed Contact Magnetic Sensors 6
REED CONTACT MAGNETIC PROXIMITY SENSORS
Metal housing
2 S delay on activation SM Series
2 m integral cable
Choiche of magnets

Identification code Wiring diagrams

NO CONTACT
BROWN

SM 01
BLUE

SERIES SM

NO + NC CONTACT
BLUE
NO
01
NO + NC BROWN
02
BLACK

MAX. VOLTAGE 230 V AC Reed contact sensor / magnet switching distance (mm)
MAX. CURRENT 0.5 A
POWER 10 W/VA
DIAMETER 6
SWITCHING FREQUENCY 200 Hz
Distance Hysteresis
DELAY ON ACTIVATION 2 mS
REPEATABILITY 0.3 mm
TEMPERATURE LIMITS -25 +70C 24 5
PROTECTION DEGREE IP 67 MG01

CABLE LENGTH 2m
CABLE SECTION 3 x 0.50 mm2 22 5
HOUSING MATERIAL Nickel-plated brass MG02

6 2,5
MG03

32 5
MG04

Magnets dimensions (mm)


29 5
MG01 (Ferrite) MG02 (Ferrite) MG05

WARNING: The data specified in this table have an approximate value because they depend
on the magnet position, on the material on which it is applied (ferromagnetic or not) and
because they are related to the magnet during the frontal approach. Reed contact sensors
M5

can be also activated laterally considering that switching distances are always influenced
by the magnet position and orientation besides the material on which it is applied
4 MG05 (ferromagnetic or not).
7 9
20 10 (Ferrite in plastic housing)
22 16
10 18
7 12

MG03 MG04 Dimensions (mm)


10

(Alnico in aluminium housing) (Ferrite in plastic housing)

32 42,5
6 20 6
52
63

43
10,5
8

33
3,2
30
10
4

18
15

27

7,5 2,5 2,5 15,5


6
9

3,2

EMX INDUSTRIES INC.


Reed Contact Magnetic Sensors 8
REED CONTACT MAGNETIC PROXIMITY SENSORS
Metal housing
2 S delay on activation SM Series
2 m integral cable
Choiche of magnets

Identification code Wiring diagrams

NO CONTACT
BROWN

SM 03 BLUE

SERIES SM

NO + NC CONTACT
BLUE
NO
03
NO + NC BROWN
04
BLACK

MAX. VOLTAGE 230 V AC Reed contact sensor / magnet switching distance (mm)
MAX. CURRENT 0.5 A
POWER 10 W/VA
SWITCHING FREQUENCY 200 Hz DIAMETER 8
DELAY ON ACTIVATION 2 mS Distance Hysteresis
REPEATABILITY 0.3 mm
TEMPERATURE LIMITS -25 +70C
24 5
PROTECTION DEGREE IP 67 MG01
CABLE LENGTH 2m
CABLE SECTION 3 x 0.50 mm2
22 5
HOUSING MATERIAL Nickel-plated brass
MG02

6 2,5
MG03

32 5
MG04
Magnets dimensions (mm)

MG01 (Ferrite) MG02 (Ferrite)


29 5
MG05

WARNING: The data specified in this table have an approximate value because they depend
on the magnet position, on the material on which it is applied (ferromagnetic or not) and
M5

because they are related to the magnet during the frontal approach. Reed contact sensors
can be also activated laterally considering that switching distances are always influenced
4 by the magnet position and orientation besides the material on which it is applied
7 9 MG05 (ferromagnetic or not).
20 10 (Ferrite in plastic housing)
22 16
10 18
7 12

MG03 MG04 Dimensions (mm)


10

(Alnico in aluminium housing) (Ferrite in plastic housing)

32 42,5
6 20 6
52
63

43
10,5
8

33
3,2
10
4

30
18
15

27

7,5 2,5 2,5 15,5


6
9

3,2

EMX INDUSTRIES INC.


Reed Contact Magnetic Sensors 10
REED CONTACT MAGNETIC PROXIMITY SENSORS
Metal housing
2 S delay on activation SM Series
2 m integral cable
Choiche of magnets

Identification code Wiring diagrams

NO CONTACT
BROWN

SM 05 BLUE

SERIES SM

NO + NC CONTACT
BLUE
NO
05
NO + NC BROWN
06
BLACK

MAX. VOLTAGE 230 V AC Reed contact sensor / magnet switching distance (mm)
MAX. CURRENT 0.5 A
POWER 10 W/VA
SWITCHING FREQUENCY 200 Hz DIAMETER 10
DELAY ON ACTIVATION 2 mS Distance Hysteresis
REPEATABILITY 0.3 mm
TEMPERATURE LIMITS -25 +70C 24 5
PROTECTION DEGREE IP 67 MG01

CABLE LENGTH 2m
CABLE SECTION 3 x 0.50 mm2
22 5
HOUSING MATERIAL Nickel-plated brass MG02

6 2,5
MG03

32 5
MG04
Magnets dimensions (mm)

MG01 (Ferrite) MG02 (Ferrite)


29 5
MG05

WARNING: The data specified in this table have an approximate value because they depend
on the magnet position, on the material on which it is applied (ferromagnetic or not) and
M5

because they are related to the magnet during the frontal approach. Reed contact sensors
can be also activated laterally considering that switching distances are always influenced
by the magnet position and orientation besides the material on which it is applied
4 MG05
7 9 (ferromagnetic or not).
20 10 (Ferrite in plastic housing)
22 16
10 18
7 12

MG03 MG04 Dimensions (mm)


10

(Alnico in aluminium housing) (Ferrite in plastic housing)

32 42,5
6 20 6
52
63

43
10,5
8

33
3,2
10
4

18
15

30
27

7,5 2,5 2,5 15,5


6
9

3,2

EMX INDUSTRIES INC.


Reed Contact Magnetic Sensors 12
REED CONTACT MAGNETIC PROXIMITY SENSORS
Metal and plastic housing
2 S delay on activation SM Series
2 m integral cable
Choiche of magnets

Identification code Wiring diagrams

SM 07 NO CONTACT
SERIES SM
BROWN
NO - Length 30mm
07
NO + NC - Length 30mm
08 BLUE

POWER NO - Length 30mm (2)


09
POWER NO - Length 70mm
13
(1)
NO + NC CONTACT
(3)
BLUE
POWER NO+NC - Length 30mm
14
NO - Length 100mm - plastic (2) BROWN
19
POWER NO - Length 100mm - plastic BLACK
21
BISTABLE - Length 100mm - plastic (3)
22
MAX. VOLTAGE 230 V AC Reed contact sensor / magnet switching distance (mm)
MAX. CURRENT 0.5 A
POWER 10 W/VA DIAMETER 12
SWITCHING FREQUENCY 200 Hz Distance Hysteresis
DELAY ON ACTIVATION 2 mS
REPEATABILITY 0.3 mm 24 5
TEMPERATURE LIMITS -25 +70C 12 (Power) 7 (Power) MG01
PROTECTION DEGREE IP 67
CABLE LENGTH 2m 22 5
CABLE SECTION 3 x 0.50 mm2 10 (Power) 6 (Power) MG02
HOUSING MATERIAL Nickel-plated brass
(1) Power: 100W; l=3A
(2) Power: 50W; l=1A 6 2.5
(3) Power: 60W; l=3A
0 (Power) 0 (Power) MG03

Plastic housing models dimensions (mm)


22 9
22 (Power) 9 (Power) MG04

20 9
20 (Power) 9 (Power) MG05

WARNING: The data specified in this table have an approximate value because they depend
100 on the magnet position, on the material on which it is applied (ferromagnetic or not) and
because they are related to the magnet during the frontal approach. Reed contact sensors
can be also activated laterally considering that switching distances are always influenced
by the magnet position and orientation besides the material on which it is applied
(ferromagnetic or not).

Metal housing models dimensions (mm) Magnets dimensions (mm)


SHORT HOUSING MG01 (Ferrite) MG02 (Ferrite)
M5

MG05
(Ferrite in plastic housing)
4
7 9 10 18
20 10 22 16 7 12

40 MG03 MG04
10

(Alnico in aluminium housing) (Ferrite in plastic housing)


32 42,5
6 20 6
LONG HOUSING
52
63

43
10,5
8

33
3,2
10
4

18
15

27

7,5 2,5 2,5 15,5

70 6
9

3,2

EMX INDUSTRIES INC.


Reed Contact Magnetic Sensors 18
REED CONTACT MAGNETIC PROXIMITY SENSORS
Metal housing
2 S delay on activation SM Series
2 m integral cable
Choiche of magnets

Identification code Wiring diagrams

NO CONTACT
BROWN

SM 17 BLUE

SERIES SM

NO + NC CONTACT
(1) BLUE
POWER NO
17
POWER NO + NC (2) BROWN
18
BLACK

MAX. VOLTAGE 230 V AC Reed contact sensor / magnet switching distance (mm)
MAX. CURRENT 0.5 A
POWER 10 W/VA
DIAMETER 18
SWITCHING FREQUENCY 200 Hz
Distance Hysteresis
DELAY ON ACTIVATION 2 mS
REPEATABILITY 0.3 mm
TEMPERATURE LIMITS -25 +70C 12 7
MG01
PROTECTION DEGREE IP 67
CABLE LENGTH 2m
CABLE SECTION 3 x 0.50 mm2 10 6
HOUSING MATERIAL Nickel-plated brass MG02

(1) Power: 100W; l=3A


(2) Power: 60W; l=3A
- -
MG03

22 9
MG04

Magnets dimensions (mm)


20 9
MG05
MG01 (Ferrite) MG02 (Ferrite)

WARNING: The data specified in this table have an approximate value because they depend
on the magnet position, on the material on which it is applied (ferromagnetic or not) and
because they are related to the magnet during the frontal approach. Reed contact sensors
M5

can be also activated laterally considering that switching distances are always influenced
by the magnet position and orientation besides the material on which it is applied
(ferromagnetic or not).
4 MG05
7 9
20 10 (Ferrite in plastic housing)
22 16
10 18
7 12

MG03 MG04 Dimensions (mm)


10

(Alnico in aluminium housing) (Ferrite in plastic housing)

32 42,5 LONG HOUSING


6 20 6
52
63

43
10,5
8

33
3,2
10
4

18
15

70
27

7,5 2,5 2,5 15,5


6
9

3,2

EMX INDUSTRIES INC.


LS 150 Luminescence Scanner
Industrial Automation Sensor

FEATURES
Scan in visible blue light for detecting
fluorescent objects and markings.
Small die cast zinc housing with glass
lens. Protection class IP 65 industrial
application rated.
M 12 connector and non threaded
mounting holes for fast mounting.
Circular beam spot.
Various filtering
High speed switching frequency.
Digital sensitivity adjustment
Large scanning range
Long life light source
Short response time

DIMENSIONS 50mm
30-100mm
70-150mm

15437 Neo Parkway Cleveland, Ohio 44128


Toll-Free: 800-426-9912 / Phone: 216-518-9888 Fax: 216-518-9884
Web: www.emxinc.com / Email: sensors@emxinc.com
LS 150 Luminescence Scanner
Industrial Automation Sensor

TABLES SPECIFICATIONS
OPTICAL DATA
Scanning Range (Note 1) 50, 30-100, 70-150 mm
Light Source LED
light beam diameter in mm

optic 50
Wavelength 370450 nm (visible blue light)
Depending on filtering
Light Beam Diameter Circular (see tables)
Average Life (Note 2) 100,000 hours
TIMING
Switching Frequency 2 kHz
Response Time 250 s
scanning range in mm
Delay before start up 200 ms
ELECTRICAL DATA
Operating Voltage UB 1030 V DC (incl. Residual ripple)
light beam diameter in mm

optic 100
optic 150
Residual Ripple 15% of UB
Bias Current 40 mA
Switching Output PNP transistor output
Function Characteristics Light switched
Signal Voltage High/Low ( UB 2 V) / 2V
Output Current Max. 200 mA
Sensitivity Adjustable using potentiometer 270
scanning range in mm INDICATORS
LED Yellow Reflection
MECHANICAL DATA
Housing Die cast zinc
Optics Cover Glass
ELECTRICAL Weight 250 g
Connection Type M 12 dia. Connector, stainless steel,
CONNECTION 5 pole
ENVIRONMENTAL DATA
Ambient Temp. (operation/storage) -20 C - +60 C / -40 C - + 70 C
Protection Class IP 65
VDE Safety Class III
Extraneous Light Limit 20 kLux accord. To EN 60947-5-2
Protective Circuit (Note 3) 2,3
Impact Resistance Accord to EN 60947-5-2
Vibration Resistance Accord to EN 60947-5-2
Electromagnetic Compatibility Accord to EN 60947-5-2
OPTIONS
Warning Output (warn) PNP transistor output, low for
Function failure
Signal Voltage High/Low (UB -2 V) / 2V
Output Current Max 100 mA
(Note 1) Scanning range: recommended range
(Note 2) At + 25 C
(Note 3) 2 = polarity reversal protection, 3 = short circuit protection for all outputs

15437 Neo Parkway Cleveland, Ohio 44128


Toll-Free: 800-426-9912 / Phone: 216-518-9888 Fax: 216-518-9884
Web: www.emxinc.com / Email: sensors@emxinc.com

Potrebbero piacerti anche